TRN 5103 410 03 - SG Ins - EN

Advanced Assembly Design using Creo
Parametric 4.0
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
r
Fo
Authored and published using

Copyright © 2018 PTC Inc. and/or Its Subsidiary Companies. All Rights Reserved.
User and training guides and related documentation from PTC Inc. and its subsidiary companies (collectively
"PTC") are subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and are provided under a license
agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed
software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but
only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software
is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided
by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation
may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or
made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to
make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject
y
to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
nl
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade
secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other
countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any
O
manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND
CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
se
PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is, and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the
piracy of PTC software products, and we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal
means available, including public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data
monitoring and scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This
U
data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized distributors. If
you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection and transmission of such data
(including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed
copy.
al
Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: See the About Box, or copyright notice,
of your PTC software.
rn
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
PTC software products and software documentation are “commercial items” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.
te
2.101. Pursuant to Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 12.212 (a)-(b) (Computer Software) (MAY 2014) for
civilian agencies or the Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement (DFARS) at 227.7202-1(a) (Policy)
and 227.7202-3 (a) (Rights in commercial computer software or commercial computer software documentation)
In
(FEB 2014) for the Department of Defense, PTC software products and software documentation are provided
to the U.S. Government under the PTC commercial license agreement. Use, duplication or disclosure by the
U.S. Government is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in the applicable PTC software license
agreement.
C
PTC Inc., 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

PRINTING HISTORY
PT
Document No. Date Description

TRN-5103-M03-EN-LM-P01 03/06/2018 Initial Printing of:
Advanced Assembly Design using Creo
Printed in the U.S.A Parametric 4.0
r
Fo
About PTC University
Welcome to PTC University!
With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge, PTC University helps
you realize the most value from PTC products. Only PTC University offers:
• An innovative learning methodology – PTC’s Precision Learning Methodology is a proven
proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and deliver learning solutions.
y
• Flexible Delivery Options – PTC University ensures you receive the same quality training programs
nl
regardless of the learning style. Our extensive experience, innovative learning techniques, and
targeted learning modules facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity.
• Premier Content and Expertise – A thorough instructor certification process and direct access to
O
the PTC product development and PTC consulting organizations means that only PTC courses
can give you highly qualified instructors, the most up-to-date product information, and best
practices derived from thousands of deployments.
se
• Global Focus – PTC University delivers training where and when you need it by providing over
100 training centers located across 35 countries offering content in nine languages.
• Delivering Value – A role-based learning design ensures the right people have the right tools to do
U
their jobs productively while supporting the organization’s overall performance goals.
The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning offerings that PTC
University has available. These include:
al
• Instructor-led Training (ILT) – The ideal blend of classroom lectures, personal demonstrations,
rn
hands-on workshops, assessments, and post-classroom tools.
• PTC University Proficiency – This Web-based, skills assessment and development-planning tool
will help improve your skills and productivity.
te
• eLearning Libraries – 24/7 access to Web-based training that will compliment your instructor-led
course.
In
• Precision LMS – A powerful learning management system that will manage your eLearning
Library and PTC University Proficiency assessments.
PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are corporate learning
programs designed to your organization’s specific goals, current skills, desired competencies, and
C
training preferences.
PT
Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most out of your PTC
products.
r
Fo
PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers
North America
• Education Services Registration
– Tel: (888) 782-3773
– Fax: (781) 370-5307
• Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
y
– Tel: (800) 477-6435
nl
– Fax: (781) 707-0328
• License Management and Contracts
O
– Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782)
– Fax: (781) 707-0331
se
Europe
• Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting
– Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)
U
Asia
• Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact information.
al
In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web site contains the latest
training schedules, registration information, directions to training facilities, and course descriptions.
rn
You can also reach technical support, and register for online service options such as knowledge
base searches, reference libraries, and documentation. You can also find general information about
PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer Support, and PTC Partners.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo
Precision Learning
Precision Learning in the Classroom
PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop effective, comprehensive class
material that will improve the productivity of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches
using the proven instructional design principal of ‘Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do’:
• Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key concepts.
y
• These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the software application.
nl
• You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.
After the course, a PTC University Proficiency assessment is provided to enable you to assess
O
your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also identify the class topics
that require further review.
At the end of the class, you will either take a PTC University Proficiency assessment via your PTC
se
University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training on how to do this after the class.
Precision Learning After the Class
U
Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning account. This account will
be automatically created if you do not already have one.
al
As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:
• A PTC University Proficiency assessment from the course content that generates a
rn
Recommended Learning Report based on your results.
• A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same instructional approach of lecture,
demonstration, and exercise. The Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections
te
of this training that you may want to review.

Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages. The Web-based training
In
is available in your account for one year after the live class.
C
r PT
Fo
Precision Learning Recommendations
PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated training
are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are available for
numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of our Web site at
http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.
Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and that the map above is
partial and for illustration purposes only.
y
Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map corresponding to the course you
nl
are taking. This review, along with instructor recommendations, should give you some ideas for
additional training that corresponds to your role and job functions.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo
Training Agenda
Day 1
Module 01 ― Advanced Component Selection
Module 02 ― Using Advanced Assembly Constraints
Module 03 ― Creating and Using Component Interfaces
Module 04 ― Utilizing Intelligent Fasteners
Module 05 ― Creating and Using Flexible Components
y
Module 06 ― Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies
nl
Day 2
O
Module 07 ― Using Assembly Features and Shrinkwrap
Module 08 ― Replacing Components in an Assembly
Module 09 ― Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps
se
Module 10 ― Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and Combined Views
Day 3
U
Module 11 ― Substituting Components Using User Defined, Envelopes, and Simplified Reps
Module 12 ― Understanding Advanced Simplified Rep Functionality
al
Module 13 ― Creating and Using Assembly Structure and Skeletons
Module 14 ― Utilizing Design Exploration
rn
Module 15 ― Project
te
In
C
rPT
Fo
Fo
r PT
C
In
te
rn
al
U
se
O
nl
y
Table of Contents
Advanced Assembly Design using Creo Parametric 4.0
Advanced Component Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Locating Components in the Model Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Using the Assembly Model Tree Search Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Selecting Multiple Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
y
Using Advanced Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
nl
Constraining Components using Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Constraining Two Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
O
Constraining a Point on a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Constraining a Point on a Surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Constraining an Edge on a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
se
Constraining a Point on a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Creating a Tangent Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Configuring Constraint Sets with Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
U
Creating and Using Component Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Understanding Component Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
al
Using a Placing Component Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Using a Receiving Component Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
rn
Creating a Component Interface Using the Save as Interface Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Auto Placing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
te
Copying and Pasting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Repeating Component Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
In
Utilizing Intelligent Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Understanding the Intelligent Fastener Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Assembling Intelligent Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
C
Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Assembling Intelligent Fasteners Using Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
PT
Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners Using Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Creating and Using Flexible Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Adding Flexibility to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Placing Flexible Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
r
Exercise 1: Using Measure to Define a Flexible Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Fo
Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Creating Flexible Components with Varied Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Exercise 2: Using Flexibility to Remove Interference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Using Flexible Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Creating Mirrored Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Creating Mirrored Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Using Assembly Features and Shrinkwrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Understanding Assembly Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Understanding Assembly Feature Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Creating an Assembly Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Exercise 1: Creating an Assembly Extruded Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Creating Assembly Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Exercise 2: Creating Assembly Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Creating a Shrinkwrap Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Creating a Shrinkwrap Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Summarizing Shrinkwrap Features and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
y
Replacing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Understanding Component Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
nl
Replacing Components using Family Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Replacing Components using Reference Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
O
Replacing Components using By Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Replacing Unrelated Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
se
Exercise 1: Replacing Unrelated Components using the Reference Table Method . . . . . . . . 8-14
Understanding Interchange Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Replacing using a Functional Interchange Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
U
Exercise 2: Creating Interchange Assemblies using Evaluate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
al
Retrieving Assembly Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Understanding Standard Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Understanding Custom Simplified Reps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
rn
Using Automatic Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Excluding Components Using Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
te
Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
In
Creating Part Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Opening Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Exercise 1: Using Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
C
Exercise 2: Using Part Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and Combined Views . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
PT
Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Creating Assembly Cross-Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
r
Fo
Creating Display Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Exercise 1: Creating Display Styles using the View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Exercise 2: Creating and Editing Display Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Creating Appearance States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Creating Layer States in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Creating Combination Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Substituting Components Using User Defined, Envelopes, and Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Understanding Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Creating and Using a Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Creating and Using a Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Creating and Using an All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Creating and Using a Create Features Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from an Existing Part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Substituting Components using User Defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Substituting by Interchange and Family Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Exercise 1: Substituting Components Using Envelopes and Simplified Reps. . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Understanding Advanced Simplified Rep Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Searching for Components for Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Creating Simplified Reps by Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Creating Simplified Reps using Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
y
Creating Simplified Reps by Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
nl
Creating Simplified Reps using Exterior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Defining Simplified Reps Using Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
O
Using On-Demand Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Creating External Simplified Reps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Creating and Using Assembly Structure and Skeletons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
se
Understanding Skeletons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Creating an Assembly Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
U
Creating Skeletons for Space Claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Creating Skeletons for Placement References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Copying a Model to a Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
al
Creating Multiple Skeletons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Sharing Skeleton Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
rn
Creating and Placing Models using Skeleton References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Creating a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
te
Sketching a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29

Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
In
Assigning Connections for a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35

Creating Solid Models from a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
Utilizing Design Exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
C
Understanding Design Exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Exploring Part and Assembly Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
PT
Creating Design Exploration Branches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

Opening and Saving Design Exploration Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Using Design Exploration Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
r
Utilizing Update Control with Copy Geometry Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25

Fo
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
The Table Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Skeleton Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
The Shaft and Arm Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Components to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Editing the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Course Description
In this course, you will learn how to use Creo Parametric 4.0 to create and manage complex
assemblies. You will discover how to use advanced assembly tools that enable you to add and
maintain designs, increase your efficiency, and increase system performance when working with
large assemblies. In addition, you will learn the basics of using and creating predefined assembly
structures and skeletons, which are both valuable tools typically used in a top-down design process.
The course also includes an assembly design project that enables you to practice your new skills by
y
performing various design tasks in an assembly model.
nl
At the end of each module, you will complete a set of review questions to reinforce critical topics
from that module. At the end of the course, you will complete a course assessment in PTC
University Proficiency intended to evaluate your understanding of the course as a whole.
O
This course has been developed using Creo Parametric 4.0
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo
Course Objectives
• Use advanced component selection
• Use advanced assembly constraints
• Create and use component interfaces
• Utilize intelligent fasteners
• Create and use flexible components
y
• Restructure and mirror assemblies
nl
• Use assembly features and shrinkwrap
• Replace components in an assembly
O
• Understand the basics of simplified reps
• Create cross-sections, display styles, and combined views
• Substitute components by reps, envelopes, and simplified reps
se
• Understand advanced simplified rep functionality
• Create and use assembly structure and skeletons
• Utilize design exploration
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo
Fo
r PT
C
In
te
rn
al
U
se
O
nl
y
Student Preface — Using the Header
y
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and the header used to begin each
nl
lab in Creo Parametric.
O
Course Handbook Layout:
• Modules
se
– Topics
♦ Concept
♦ Theory
U
♦ Procedure
♦ Exercise (if applicable) al
Procedure / Exercise Header:
rn
te
In
C
PT
Course Handbook Layout

r
The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate information after the
course is complete. Each course is organized into modules, each covering a general subject. Each
Fo
module contains topics, with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each
individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:
• Concept — This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and is presented during the
class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with figures and bullets.
• Theory — This section provides detailed information about content introduced in the Concept,
and is discussed in the class lecture but not shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section
contains additional paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.
• Procedure — This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to complete the topic
within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused, and cover a specific topic. Procedures are
found in the Student Handbook only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge
topics that contain only Concept and Theory.
• Exercise — Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are typically longer, more
involved, and use more complicated models. Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not
every topic will have an associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise
Guide and/or the online exercise HTML files.
The first module for certain courses is known as a “process module.” Process modules
introduce you to the generic high-level processes that will be taught over the span of the
entire course.
Procedure / Exercise Header

To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as “labs”) as concise as possible,
each begins with a “header.” The header lists the name of the lab, the working directory, and the
y
file you are to open.
nl
The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable:
1. Procedure/Exercise Name — This is the name of the lab.
O
2. Scenario — This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The Scenario is only found in
Exercises.
3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed — A reminder that you should close any open files
se
and erase them from memory:
• Click Close until the icon is no longer displayed.
• Click Erase Not Displayed and then click OK.
U
4. Folder Name — This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are stored in topic folders
within specific functional area folders. The path to the lab files is:
al
• PTCU\CreoParametric4\functional_area_folder\topic_folder
In the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variable is the topic folder, so you
would set the Working Directory to PTCU\CreoParametric4\Round\Variable.
rn
• To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or browser, and select Set
Working Directory.
te
5. Model to Open — This is the file to be opened from the working directory. In the above
example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to open. The model could be a part, drawing,
assembly, and so on. If you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead
In
create a new model, you will see Create New.

• To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and select Open.
6. Task Name — Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one or more tasks within
C
a lab.
7. Lab Steps — These are the individual steps required to complete a task.
PT
Two other items to note for labs:

• Saving — Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless otherwise stated.
• Exercises — Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
r
Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

Fo
Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you configure Creo Parametric
to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the
training labs on a computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:
• Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
– The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such as
C:\PTCU\CreoParametric4\.
• Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
– Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
– Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
– Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as the default folder.
For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric4\.
• Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
– The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric4 folder. You can then navigate
easily to the functional area and topic folders.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
r
Fo
PROCEDURE - Student Preface — Using the Header
In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo Parametric working environment
for each lab in the course.
Close Window Erase Not Displayed
SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder EXTRUDE_1.PRT
Step 1: Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises
properly.
y
nl
Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer outside of a training
center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.
O
1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
• The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically, such as
C:\PTCU\CreoParametric4.
se
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
• Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
U
• Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
• Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be PTCU\CreoParametric4.
3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
al
• The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric4 folder. You can then navigate
easily to the functional area and topic folders.
rn
Step 2: Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to avoid any possible conflicts.
te
1. If you currently have files open, click Close from the Quick Access toolbar, until the
icon no longer displays.
In
2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon.
• Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.
C
Step 3: Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure and set the folder
indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric working directory.
PT
1. Notice the SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_

Folder as indicated in the header above.
2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser
tab from the navigator.
r
Fo
3. Click Working Directory to view the
current working directory folder in the
browser.
• Double-click SampleFunctionalArea.
y
nl
O
se
4. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working Directory.
5. Click Working Directory from the Common Folders section to display the contents of the
U
new working directory in the browser.
al
rn
te
In
Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the browser to navigate to the topic
folder, and then right-click and select Set Working Directory from the browser.
C
Step 4: Open the file for this procedure.

PT
1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header above.

• Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.
2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:
r
• Read the first task.

Fo
• Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial datum display for the
procedure or exercise.
• Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
Step 5: Set the initial datum display options.
1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which Datum Display types to enable
and disable. For example, “Enable only the following Datum Display types: .”
2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-down menu from the In Graphics
toolbar.
y
nl
3. Next, enable and disable the check boxes as
necessary. For example you could disable
the Select All check box, and then enable
O
only the desired datum types.
se
4. The model should now appear as shown.
U
al
rn
te
This completes the procedure.

In
C
r PT
Fo
Module 1
y
Advanced Component Selection
nl
O
Module Overview
se
In this module, you learn advanced methods for selecting components in an assembly. Learning
these methods enables you to be more efficient when working on your designs.
U
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Locate components in the model tree.
al
• Use the assembly model tree search field.
rn
• Select multiple components using 2-D and 3-D box selection.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo
© 2017 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

Locating Components in the Model Tree
You can easily locate a selected feature or component in the model tree.
• Select a component or feature.

• Right-click and select Locate in Model Tree.
• Model tree expands as necessary
y
nl
Figure 1 – Select a Feature or Component
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Original Model Tree Figure 3 – Component Located in Model Tree
Locating Components in the Model Tree

te
You can easily locate a feature or component in the model tree. Select a feature or component in
In
the graphics window, right-click, and select Locate in Model Tree. The system then expands and
scrolls the model tree as necessary, highlighting the selected feature or component.
This feature is particularly useful for locating features or components that are included in
C
sub-assemblies, patterns, or groups.

r PT
Fo
Module 1 | Page 2 © 2017 PTC

Using the Assembly Model Tree Search Field
You can search the model tree for components using text strings.
• Use conventional wildcard syntax.

• Found components display in solid green.
• All other components display in gray.
• Predefined searches are available.
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Original Assembly
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Viewing Found Components Figure 3 – Model Tree Before and After Filter
te
Using the Assembly Model Tree Search Field

In
There is a search field at the top of the model tree that performs searches based on text strings.
You can use conventional wildcard syntax when searching.
When you type a search into the field, components that match the search criteria highlight in both
C
the model tree and in the graphics window in a solid green color. All other components display in
solid gray. These found components are not selected until you click Add . You can filter the
PT
model tree to display only the found components.

A set of predefined searches is available within the drop-down list next to the search field. These
predefined searches color components accordingly. The component coloring remains until you
clear the search by clicking Clear Search .
r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Using the Assembly Model Tree Search Field
Selection\Tree_Search ENGINE.ASM
Task 1: Search for and select components from the model tree.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Type cylinder in the search field at the top of
y
the model tree and click Apply Search .
3. Notice that found components display in
nl
green and other models display in gray.
4. Click Add to add the found components.
O
• Hide CYLINDER.PRT.
5. In the search field, click Clear Search .
se
U
6. Type *block* in the search field at the top of
the model tree and click Apply Search .
7. Notice that found components display in
al
green and other models display in gray.
rn
te
8. Notice the highlighted components in the

In
model tree.
C
r PT
9. Click Filter Tree to filter the model tree

Fo
display.

11. Click the drop-down arrow next to the search
field.
12. Notice that you can search based on common
status or recent searches.
y
nl
13. Select Packaged components from the
drop-down list.
O
14. Click Add to add the found components.
se
U
field and select CYLINDER.
16. In the model tree, select the CYLINDER.PRT,
and click Show
al
from the mini toolbar.
rn
18. Click in the background to de-select all
components.
te
19. Click the drop-down arrow next to the search field and select Configuration queries >
In
Interchange Group Members.

20. Notice that the PISTON.PRT is a member of an interchange assembly.
C
field and select Configuration queries >

Family table instances.
PT
22. Notice that the BOLT_5-28.PRT is a family

table instance.
field and select Configuration queries >
r
Family table generics.

Fo
24. Notice that the BOLT_5-18.PRT is a family

table generic.

Selecting Multiple Components
You can use either 2-D or 3-D Box Selection to select components.
• 2-D Box Selection:

– Draw a rectangle.
– Components selected.
• 3-D Box Selection:
– Draw a rectangle.
y
– A 3-D box is created from the drawn
2-D rectangle.
nl
– Manipulate the 3-D box. Figure 1 – 2-D Selection
– Components selected.
O
• The direction you follow while drawing the
rectangle determines selection.
– Inside
se
– Crossing
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – 3-D Selection
te
Selecting Multiple Components

You can use either 2-D or 3-D Box Selection to select components. Perform the following steps
In
to use 2-D Box Selection:

• From an assembly, edit the selection filter to Parts.
• Draw a rectangle over the model. The direction you follow while drawing the rectangle determines
C
whether the system uses Inside Box or Crossing selection types.

Perform the following steps to use 3-D Box Selection:
PT
• From an assembly, click 3D Box Select , and select a plane or surface.

• Draw a rectangle in the selected plane. The direction you follow while drawing the rectangle
determines whether the system uses Inside Box or Crossing Box selection types.
r
• Once the rectangle is created, a 3-D box appears, as shown in Figure 2. Drag arrows display on
Fo
each surface. You can drag the arrows and watch the components dynamically select.
2-D and 3-D Selection Box Options

The following types of selection are available when using the selection box:
• Inside Box Selection – Only components that are fully inside the box are selected. To achieve this
type of selection, draw a selection rectangle from the upper-left towards the lower-right.
• Crossing Box Selection – All components that are either inside or crossing the box are selected.
To achieve this type of selection, draw a selection rectangle from the lower-right towards the
upper-left.
Considerations When Using Box Selection

Consider the following when using box selection:

• You can work from 2-D or 3-D model orientations when creating the box region. For the 3-D box
selection, it may be useful to manipulate the box region from multiple orientations.
• The system considers the component bounding box for selection purposes.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Selecting Multiple Components
Selection\Multiple_Components ENGINE.ASM
Task 1: Select components using 2-D Box Selection.

2. Edit the selection filter to Part.
3. Orient to the LEFT view orientation.
y
4. Draw a rectangle from the upper-left of the
nl
model towards the lower-right of the model,
as shown.
O
5. Notice the selected components.
se
components.
U
al
7. Draw a rectangle from the lower-right of the
rn
model towards the upper-left of the model,
as shown.
te
In
C
8. Notice the selected components.

PT
components.
r
Fo
Task 2: Select components using 3-D Box Selection.
1. Orient to the Standard Orientation.

2. Click 3D Box Select from the status bar.
3. Select the front surface.
4. Draw a rectangle from the upper-left of the
model towards the lower-right of the model,
as shown.

5. Manipulate the 3-D box as necessary to
select the components shown.
components.
y
7. Click 3D Box Select .
nl
8. Select the front surface.
9. Draw a rectangle from the lower-right of the
model towards the upper-left of the model,
O
as shown.
se
10. Manipulate the 3-D box as necessary to
U
select the components shown.
components.
al
rn
te

In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 2
y
Using Advanced Assembly Constraints
nl
O
Module Overview
se
You can properly position most components in an assembly using the Automatic Assembly option or
by specifically applying basic constraint types such as Coincident or Distance. In some situations
however, these basic constraints do not work or are not efficient to use. In these more complex
U
or unique situations, it is helpful to apply more advanced constraints to position components in
your assembly.
In this module, you will learn how to use Creo Parametric's advanced assembly constraints for
al
positioning components in an assembly.
rn
Objectives
te
• Assemble a component using the Fix constraint.

• Use Coincident to constrain components using the two coordinate systems.
In
• Use Coincident to constrain components using a point on a line.

• Use Coincident to constrain components using a point on a surface.
• Use Coincident to constrain components using an edge on a surface.
C
• Use Coincident to constrain components using a point on a point.

• Use auto constrain to constrain components using a tangency.
PT
• Configure constraint sets with parameters.

r
Fo

Constraining Components using Fix
The Fix constraint enables you to maintain a component's position even when it has not
been fully constrained.
• Locks the component into the current position.

• Used where a component is partially constrained but final DOF is not explicitly defined.
y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Packaged Control Arm Figure 2 – Fixed Control Arm
Constraining Components using Fix

al
You can use the Fix constraint to maintain the current position of a component that has not been
rn
fully constrained. This is helpful in cases where a component is partially constrained but the final
degree of freedom is not explicitly defined. The ball end of the control arm is mated to the bottom of
the housing socket but the final orientation is not defined, as shown in Figure 2. After moving the
te
control arm to a random position, you can apply the Fix constraint to lock that position.
Common Uses for the Fix Constraint

In
You can use the Fix constraint when you have intentionally assembled a component into position
without fully constraining that position. The Fix constraint locks the component into the current
position so that it does not move while you are working with other components in the design.
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Fix
Assembly\Fix PIVOT_CONTROL_FIX.ASM
Task 1: Position the PIVOT_ARM.PRT and lock it in place using the Fix constraint.

2. In the model tree, notice the Packaged
Component icon next to PIVOT_ARM.PRT.
y
This icon indicates that the component is
nl
packaged or partially constrained.
3. Edit the definition of PIVOT_ARM.PRT.
O
Notice in the dashboard that the constraint
STATUS is also shown as Partially
Constrained.
se
4. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to move
the component in its remaining degrees of
freedom.
You can move the component to any position.
U
al
rn
5. After positioning the component, right-click and select New Constraint in the graphics
window.
te
6. In the dashboard, select Fix from the

drop-down list.
In
7. Notice that the constraint STATUS is now

Fully Constrained.
C
8. Click Complete Component .

You can also apply the Fix constraint
PT
to your model by right-clicking in the

graphics window. The Fix option is
located just below the New constraint
option in the pop-up menu.
r

Fo

Constraining Two Coordinate Systems
The Coincident constraint enables you to position a component in an assembly by aligning
coordinate systems.
• Each of the three coordinate systems axes

aligned.
• Component fully placed with a single
constraint.
• Uses:
y
– Top-down design.
nl
– Industries that use a global csys.
– Complicated orientations.
Figure 1 – Selecting Coordinate Systems
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Modifying Coordinate System Orientation Figure 3 – Viewing Updated Orientation
te
Constraining Two Coordinate Systems

You may use the Coincident constraint to position a component in an assembly by aligning its
In
coordinate system with a coordinate system in the assembly. You position the component by
aligning any corresponding axes of the selected coordinate systems.
Because each of the three coordinate system axes is aligned, only one coordinate system on each
C
part or assembly is required to fully constrain a component.

During the assembly process, you can select coordinate systems in one of the following four ways:
PT
• From the graphics window.

• From the model tree.
• Using the Search tool.
r
• Creating them on-the-fly.

Fo
Common Uses for the Coincident Constraint Using Two Coordinate Systems
You can use the Coincident constraint on two coordinate systems in a variety of situations, some of
which are as follows:
• In an assembly created using top-down design techniques, component position is often defined
using coordinate systems prior to completion of component designs.
• In some industries, it is common to create designs using a single common coordinate system. You
can use coordinate systems to position components in the design's common coordinate system.
• When you position components in complicated orientations defined by multiple offsets, angles,
and cylindrical or spherical coordinate positions.

PROCEDURE - Constraining Two Coordinate Systems
Assembly\Coordinate_Systems PIVOT_CONTROL.ASM
Task 1: Position the PIVOT_ARM.PRT using a Coincident constraint.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Edit the definition of PIVOT_ARM.PRT. Notice the constraint STATUS is No Constraints.
y
3. Select both coordinate systems named
nl
ARM_ASSY_REF.
O
se
4. Notice that the component snaps to its new
U
location and the constraint STATUS is now
Fully Constrained.
al
Because a coordinate system defines
orientation in the X, Y, and Z directions,
rn
only one coordinate system, Coincident
constraint, is required to fully define a
component's position.
te
Task 2: Change the orientation of the PIVOT_ARM.PRT.

In
1. In the model tree, click Settings and

select Tree Filters .
C
2. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the

Features check box and click OK.
PT
3. Edit the coordinate system ARM_ASSY_REF.

4. Edit the 25 degree X value to –25.
5. Regenerate the model.
r

Fo

Constraining a Point on a Line
The Coincident constraint enables you to position a component by fixing a point or vertex
onto an edge, axis, or datum curve.
• Common uses:
– Contact location between a point and a
path.
– Assemble a component to framework or
skeleton geometry.
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Selecting a Vertex and Curve
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Viewing a Coincident Constraint Figure 3 – Vertex on Curve Position

In
Constraining a Point on a Line

The Coincident constraint can be used to constrain a point on a line or a point or vertex to an edge,
C
axis, or datum curve. In Figure 2, the vertex at the end of the push pin is constrained to the curve in
the slider model. As the slider moves, the push pin follows the curve.
PT
Common Uses for Constraining Coincident a Point on a Line

Constraining a point coincident to a line can be used in a variety of situations, some of which
are as follows:
r
• To position a contact location between a point and a path, defined by a curve or edge.
Fo
• To constrain a component vertex onto a model edge.

• To assemble a component to framework or skeleton geometry.

PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Line
Assembly\Point_on_Line PNT_ON_LINE.ASM
Task 1: Position the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT using a Coincident constraint.

2. Edit the definition of FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT. Notice that because the vertical orientation
of the component has not been defined, the constraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.
y
3. Query-select the vertex at the end of the
nl
FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT and Curve:F6
from the FIXTURE_SLIDE.PRT.
O
se
U
al
It is important that Curve Feature 6, not the model edge, is selected as the assembly
reference. Because this curve is a Composite Curve, the Coincident constraint remains
connected along its entire length as it transitions from one entity to another.
rn

te
Fully Constrained.
In
C
PT
Task 2: Pattern the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT and edit the assembly.
1. In the model tree, select FIXTURE_PUSH_

PIN.PRT and click Pattern from the mini
r
toolbar.
Fo
3. Edit FIXTURE_SLIDE.PRT.
4. Edit the dimension to -20.
Notice that because of the new constraint, the
FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT stays connected
to the curve as the slide moves.

Constraining a Point on a Surface
onto a surface or datum plane.
• Common uses:
– Contact location between a component
vertex and a component surface.
– Fix a component datum point to a datum
or surface.
y
nl
Figure 1 – Selecting a Vertex and Curve
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Viewing Coincident Constraints al Figure 3 – Vertex on Curve Position
Constraining a Point on a Surface

You can use the Coincident constraint to constrain a point on a surface. You can use part or
rn
assembly datum points, surface features, datum planes, or solid surfaces for constraint references.
Common Uses for Constraining a Coincident Point on a Surface

te
The Coincident constraint is used on a point and surface in a variety of situations, some of which
are as follows:
In
• To position a contact location between a component vertex and the surface of another component.
• To fix a component datum point to a design datum or surface.
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Surface
Assembly\Point_on_Surface CARBURETOR_PNT.ASM
Task 1: Position the IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT using a Coincident constraint.

2. Edit the definition of IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT. Notice that because the depth position of the
component has not been defined, the constraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.
y
3. Select the facing surface on
nl
CONTROL_ARM.PRT and the vertex
at the end of the IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT.
O
se
U
Fully Constrained.
al
rn
te
6. Orient to the TOP view orientation.

7. Edit CONTROL_ARM.PRT.
In
8. Edit the angle to 90.

C

PT
10. Notice how the IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT

maintains contact with the CONTROL_ARM.
PRT and moves accordingly.
r
Fo

Constraining an Edge on a Surface
The Coincident constraint enables you to position a component by fixing a linear edge to
a planar surface or datum plane.
• Places the edge of a component onto the surface of another component.

• Beneficial for fixture design and sheetmetal products.
– These typically contain many linear edges and planar surfaces.
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Selecting an Edge and Surface Figure 2 – Viewing the Coincident Constraint
se
Constraining an Edge on a Surface
You can use the Coincident constraint to constrain a linear edge to a planar surface. The surface
U
reference can be a datum plane, surface feature, or solid surface.
Common Uses for Constraining an Edge Coincident to a Surface

al
You can constrain an edge coincident to a surface for a variety of situations. The most common
situation is when you place the edge of a component onto the surface of another component. This
rn
method is especially helpful when you design fixtures and sheetmetal products because both
products typically contain many linear edges and planar surfaces.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Constraining an Edge on a Surface
Assembly\Edge_on_Surface RATCHET.ASM
Task 1: Position the RATCHET_ARM.PRT using a Coincident constraint.

2. Edit the definition of RATCHET_ARM.PRT. Notice that because the rotational orientation of
the component has not been defined, the constraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.
y
3. Use the 3D Dragger to rotate the component
nl
so that it is close to the final assembly
position shown.
O
se
4. Select the flat surface on the hex geometry
of RATCHET.PRT and the vertical edge of
U
RATCHET_ARM.PRT.
al
rn
Fully Constrained.
te

In
This Coincident constraint requires a linear edge or a curve to lie on a planar surface.
C
Because the outer walls of the RATCHET.PRT are drafted, the vertical edge on the
RATCHET_ARM.PRT could not be constrained to any of the outer walls.
PT

r
Fo

Constraining a Point on a Point
onto another point or vertex.
• Define attachment geometry for components

without planar or cylindrical features.
y
nl
Figure 1 – Selecting Two Points
O
se
Figure 2 – Viewing Coincident Constraints Figure 3 – Constrained Spring
U
Constraining a Point on a Point
You can use the Coincident constraint point on point option to position a point or vertex with another
al
point or vertex. In Figure 2, the spring is positioned by constraining points at the attachment
locations of the spring to the corresponding attachment points on the clutch shoes.
rn
Common Uses for Constraining a Point Coincident on a Point
You can constrain a point coincident to a point for a variety of situations, some of which are as
te
follows:
• You can control component positions by aligning a vertex on one component with a vertex on
In
another.
• You can constrain a point on a point when you assemble components to framework or skeletal
type geometry that consists mostly of datum type features.
C
• You can easily define attachment geometry without planar or cylindrical features using datum
points and then positioning the points using the point on point constraint.
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Point
Assembly\Point_on_Point CLUTCH.ASM
Task 1: Position the CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT using two Coincident constraints.

2. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
y
3. Enable Point Tag Display from the Show group.
nl
4. Edit the definition of CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT. Notice the constraint STATUS is Partially
Constrained.
O
5. Select datum point PNT1 on the
CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and datum point
SPRING1 on the CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT.
se
U
al
6. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the
component into the position shown.
rn
7. Right-click and select New Constraint.
8. In the dashboard, select Coincident from
te
the Constraint Type drop-down list.

9. Select point PNT2 on the CLUTCH_
In
SPRING.PRT and SPRING1 on the

CLUTCH_SHOE_R.PRT.
C

Fully Constrained.
PT

12. Disable Point Tag Display .

r
Fo

Creating a Tangent Constraint
The Tangent constraint enables you to position a component by constraining two surfaces
at their point of tangency.
• Common uses:
– Contact point between a cam and
actuator.
– Any design in which a cylindrical,
spherical, or conical surface is to be
y
tangent to a planar surface.
nl
Figure 1 – Viewing The Tangent Constraint
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Initial Contact Position Figure 3 – Position After Edit
Creating a Tangent Constraint

al
The Tangent constraint can be selected automatically or manually. It is used to position the contact
rn
point of two surfaces at their point of tangency. This placement constraint causes the contacting
surfaces to face each other. It is important to understand that this constraint does not align them.
Common Uses for the Tangent Constraint

te
You can use the Tangent constraint in a variety of situations, some of which are as follows.
In
• A contact point between a cam and its actuator.

• Any design in which a cylindrical, spherical, or conical surface has a tangent contact with a
planar surface.
C
The Tangent constraint creates references from one surface patch to another. The Tangent
constraint does not automatically transition from one surface patch to another to show cam
PT
and actuator type motion. You can address more complicated assembly cases using datum
features within Creo Parametric or with mechanism constraint types in Creo Mechanism
Dynamics Extension.
r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating a Tangent Constraint
Assembly\Tangent CARBURETOR_TAN.ASM
Task 1: Position the CONTROL_ARM.PRT using a Tangent constraint.

2. Edit the definition of CONTROL_ARM.PRT. Notice that because the rotational orientation of
the component has not been defined, the constraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.
y
3. Select the ball end of the IDLE_SCREW.PRT
nl
and the facing surface on CONTROL_ARM.
PRT.
O
se
Fully Constrained.
U
5. Click Complete Component . al
rn
7. Edit IDLE_SCREW.PRT.
8. Edit the offset value to 6.
te
In

C
10. Notice how the CONTROL_ARM.PRT

maintains tangency with the IDLE_SCREW.
PT
PRT and moves accordingly.

r
Fo

Configuring Constraint Sets with Parameters
You can create multiple constraint sets for a given component.
• Quickly toggle assembly positions

• Parameter: PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET
– Created when multiple constraint sets are
created.
– Active set by default
y
– Edit to alternate set
• Family Table
nl
– Vary Parameter
Figure 1 – Constraint Set in Model Tree
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – First Constraint Set Figure 3 – Second Constraint Set
rn
Configuring Constraint Sets with Parameters
You can create multiple constraint sets for a given component, as shown in Figure 1. The constraint
te
sets can be enabled or disabled to assemble components into alternate positions. When more than
one constraint set is created, a feature parameter called PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET is created for
the component, and the PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET parameter is set as the active constraint set
In
by default.
You can edit the parameter value to activate an alternate constraint set. The parameter can then be
varied in a family table to create different variations, as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3.
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Configuring Constraint Sets with Parameters
Advanced_Assembly\Constraint_Sets DRILL_CHUCK.ASM
Task 1: Configure a second constraint set.

2. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters .
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Placement folder check box and click OK.
y
4. Edit the definition of KEY_BASE.PRT.
nl
5. Select the Placement tab in the dashboard.
6. Select Set1 and clear the Set Enabled check box.
O
7. Click New Set.
8. Select the set named Set6, type Set2 in the Set Name field, and press ENTER.
se
9. Drag KEY_BASE.PRT out of the model.
10. Click 3D Dragger in the dashboard to disable the 3D Dragger.
U
11. Select the surfaces shown.
al
rn
te
12. Click New Constraint.

13. Select the surfaces shown.
In
C
PT
14. Select the first constraint, Angle Offset.

15. Edit the Constraint Type to Coincident
and click Flip.
r

Fo

select Tree Columns .
18. Select Feat Params from the Type drop-down
list.
19. Type PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET in the Name
field, click Add Column , and edit the
Width to 14.
20. Click OK.

21. In the model tree, edit Set2 to Set1.
Task 2: Configure the constraint set parameter in a Family Table.
y
nl
1. Click Family Table from the Model Intent group.
2. Click Insert Instance in the Family Table dialog box.
O
3. Edit the instance name to DRILL_CHUCK_SET2.
4. Click Add Columns .
se
5. Select Parameter from the Add item section of the Family Items dialog box.
6. Select Component from the Look In drop-down list and select KEY_BASE.PRT.
7. Select the PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET parameter.
U
8. Click Insert Selected > Close.
9. Click OK in the Family Items dialog box.
al
10. Edit the instances as shown.
rn
11. Select the DRILL_CHUCK_SET2 instance
row and click Preview Instance .
te
12. Click Close.

13. Click OK.
In
C
PT

r
Fo

Module 3
y
Creating and Using Component
nl
Interfaces
O
se
Module Overview
U
Component interfaces are user-defined sets of constraints and references that are stored with a
model and used to quickly place that component during an assembly operation. After you define an
interface, you can use it whenever you place the component in an assembly.
al
Adding component interfaces to an organization's standard components increases assembly
productivity, enabling faster and more accurate component placement.
rn
The same functionality used in component interfaces is also used to place components using Copy
and Paste, Repeat, and Auto Place.
te
Objectives
In
• Create and use a placement component interface.

• Create and use a receiving component interface.
• Create a component interface using the Save As Interface dialog box.
C
• Auto place components in an assembly.

PT
• Copy and paste components within assemblies.

• Repeat the placement of components within an assembly.
r
Fo

Understanding Component Interfaces
Component interface features contain stored constraints and references used to assemble
components more efficiently.
Elements of a component interface:

• Interface Name
• Interface Template
• Interface Type: Placing or Receiving
Figure 1 – Constraints and References on the Model
y
• Constraints and References
nl
O
se
Figure 2 – Constraints and References Figure 3 – Constraints and References
U
in the Model Tree in the Dialog Box
Understanding Component Interfaces

al
Component interfaces are user-defined sets of constraints stored in a model and used to quickly
rn
place components during assembly operations. After a component interface is defined, you can
reuse it during any assembly operation.
You can add Component Interface features to part or assembly models. Like any feature,
te
component interfaces appear in the model tree, have their own identifying icon, and can be edited.
Elements of a Component Interface

In
A unique set of elements are used to define a component interface.

• Interface Name – Used to identify and select the component interface.
C
• Interface Template – Used to create interfaces with mechanism connection sets.

PT
• Placement/Receiving Interface – Determines if the component interface is used for placing the
component or receiving another component.
• The Either type interface can be used for either placing or receiving.
r
Fo
Figure 4 – Elements
• Constraints – Each component interface contains a set of predefined constraints that are applied
when using the interface.
• References – Each component interface contains selected geometry, corresponding to each
constraint in the interface.

Figure 5 – Constraints and References
• Dependent – Select Dependent to ensure that Offset types (Coincident, Orient, Offset) and
orientations (Mate, Align) cannot be changed.
If you delete a component interface, any components referencing the interface fail to
regenerate and you are required to select new references.
y
Creating a Component Interface
nl
Component interfaces are created explicitly using the Component Interface dialog box or on-the-fly
by saving a component's existing set of assembly constraints.
O
se
U
al
Figure 6 – Dialog Box
rn
te
In
C
Figure 7 – Save as Interface
Placing Components using Component Interfaces

PT
When placing a component containing an interface, the placement dashboard presents you with the
following placement options:
• Interface to Geom – Place a component containing an interface in an assembly without a receiving
r
interface. You are required to select matching references from the assembly.
Fo
Figure 8 – Interface to Geom

• Interface to Interface – Place a component containing an interface in an assembly containing
a receiving interface. To position components, you click one or more white circles. Each circle
represents a receiving interface.
Figure 9 – Interface to Interface

• Multiple Interfaces – When the component being placed contains multiple component interfaces,
the default is used unless you select another interface from the drop-down list.

Figure 10 – Multiple Interfaces
• Place Manually – Click Place Manually from the dashboard to assemble a component without
using an existing interface.
y
Figure 11 – Place Manually
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Using a Placing Component Interface
You use a Placing Component interface when inserting a component into an assembly.
Placing Component Interface:
• Interface Name
• Component Constraints
• Component References
y
nl
Figure 1 – Component Interface Dialog Box
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Placing Interface in the Model Tree Figure 3 – References and Constraints
al
Understanding Placing Interfaces
rn
You use Placing Component interfaces to save constraints and associated references that you
typically use to assemble a component. Each time you assemble that component, the constraints
and references of the component interface are preselected, enabling a more efficient assembly
te
process.
These interfaces are typically added to standard hardware components so that you can easily
and quickly place them in assemblies.
In
The Either type interface can also be used as a Placing interface. The Either type interface behaves
as a Placing interface when it is inserted into an assembly. The Either type also behaves as a
Receiving interface when components are added to it. While flexible, this behavior may or may
C
not meet your needs.

Placing Interface Feature Location
PT
By default, both the Placing and Either component interfaces are created in the Interfaces folder,
found in the footer of the model tree. To move an interface from the footer, select it in the model
tree, right-click, and select Move from footer.
r
Designate Default
Fo
If a model contains more than one Placing or Either interface, the first one created is the default
interface. The default interface is the interface first used when the component is placed in an
assembly. You can select the other interfaces of a component from the drop-down list in the
assembly dashboard.
To designate another interface as the default, select the feature in the model tree, right-click, and
select Set Default.
Using a Placing Interface
When you assemble a component with a Placing interface in a model that does not contain
receiving interfaces, the constraints and associated references of the component interface are
automatically selected. This is an Interface to Geometry assembly, and you are only required to
select corresponding reference geometry from the assembly model.

If a component contains multiple interfaces, select the interface you would like to use from the
interface list in the assembly dashboard.
If you do not want to use any of a component's interfaces, select Place Manually from the
dashboard.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Using a Placing Component Interface
Assembly\Interface_Placing PLACING_BOLT.PRT
Task 1: Create a Placing Component interface.

y
nl
Placement folder check box and click OK.
4. Click Component Interface from the
O
Model Intent group.
• Type insert_mate as the Interface Name
and press ENTER.
se
• Notice the Interface Template drop-down
list contains only Mechanism connection
sets.
U
• Select Placing from the Placement/
Receiving Interface drop-down list. al
At any time, you can edit the interface properties defined by clicking the interface name
in the upper-left corner of the dialog box.
rn
5. Select the cylindrical surface of
PLACING_BOLT.PRT as an Insert
reference.
te
6. Select the bottom of the bolt head as a Mate

reference.
In
7. Click Apply from the COMPONENT

INTERFACE dialog box.
C
Both Coincident constraints were created using the Automatic option. You can select
specific constraint types from the Constraint Type drop-down list.
PT
8. In the model tree, expand the Footer

and INTERFACES nodes. Observe the
INSERT_MATE feature.
r
9. Expand the INSERT_MATE feature and

notice the feature’s listed constraints.
Fo
Task 2: Insert a component using its placing interface.
1. Click Open . Select PLACING_INTF.ASM and click Open.

2. Click Assemble from the Component group.
3. In the Open dialog box, select PLACING_BOLT.PRT and click Open.
In the ribbon, notice that because PLACING_BOLT.PRT contains a Component interface,

the placement method has defaulted to Place Using Interface .

4. Select a surface in the upper-left hole in
PLACING_INTF.PRT as the assembly's first
Coincident reference.
5. Select the top surface of PLACING_INTF.PRT
y
as the assembly's second Coincident
reference.
nl
O
se
7. Using the previous steps, place three
additional bolts into the assembly.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Using a Receiving Component Interface
You use a Receiving type component interface to receive and automatically place
components containing Placing interfaces.
Receiving component interfaces:

• Automatic Interface to Interface assembly.
• Select multiple receiving interfaces to place multiple components.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Viewing Receiving Interfaces
U
Using a Receiving Component Interface
Receiving type interfaces automatically receive and position components containing Placing or
Either type interfaces.
al
You typically add Receiving interfaces to components that routinely have models assembled to them
rn
that contain component interfaces. These include models with holes that receive bolts, bolts that
receive nuts, washers, and so on.
The Either type interface can also be used as a Receiving interface. The Either type interface
te
behaves as a Receiving interface when components are assembled to it. The Either type interface
behaves as a Placing interface when inserted into an assembly. While flexible, this behavior may or
In
may not meet your needs.
Receiving Interface Feature Location

C
By default, Receiving component interfaces are placed in the model tree along with other features
and components. Unlike Placing interfaces, you do not create them in the footer of the model tree.
To move a Receiving interface to the footer, right-click it in the model tree and select Move to footer.
PT
Designate Default
Unlike Placing or Either type interfaces, you cannot designate a Receiving interface as a default
component interface. This is because all receiving interfaces are active when you place a
r
component.
Fo
Using Receiving Interfaces

When you insert a component with a Placing or Either type interface into an assembly with a
Receiving interface, Creo Parametric defaults to the Interface To Interface assembly method. Small
white circles appear in the assembly. Each white circle represents a Receiving interface in the
assembly. Select one or more of the white circles to place a component at that interface location.
If a component being assembled does not contain a Placing or Either interface, the Receiving
interface is not recognized and cannot be referenced.
If you do not want to use the Receiving interface, edit the assembly method to Interface To Geom
and select assembly references as required.
If you do not want to use interfaces for assembly, click Place Manually from the dashboard.

PROCEDURE - Using a Receiving Component Interface
Assembly\Interface_Receiving RECEIVE_INTF.ASM
Task 1: Create a Receiving Component interface.

2. Open RECEIVE_INTF.PRT from the model tree.
y
nl
4. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Placement folder check box and click OK.
5. Click Component Interface from the
O
Model Intent group.
• Type insert_mate_hex as the Interface
Name and press ENTER.
se
• Select Receiving from the Placement/
Receiving Interface drop-down list.
• Click Yes from the Remove Default warning
U
dialog box.
al
You receive the Remove Default warning because Receiving Component interfaces
cannot be set to default.
rn
6. Select the cylindrical surface of the hole in

the lower-left corner of RECEIVE_INTF.PRT
te
as an Insert reference.
7. Select the top surface of the model as a
In
C
PT
Both Coincident constraints were created using the Automatic option. You can select
specific constraint types from the Constraint Type drop-down list.
9. In the model tree, expand the

INSERT_MATE_HEX feature.
r
Notice that Receiving Component

Fo
interfaces are not located in the model

footer.
10. In the model tree, select the INSERT_MATE_HEX component interface and click Pattern
11. Click Complete Feature to complete the Reference pattern.
12. Click Close .

Task 2: Insert a component using an Interface to Interface placement.
1. Click Assemble from the Component group.

2. In the Open dialog box, select RECEIVE_BOLT.PRT and click Open.
3. You immediately notice eight small white
circles, each representing a Receiving
Component interface.
Place the component three times by clicking
the interfaces shown in the figure.
y
nl
O
4. In the dashboard, select INSERT_MATE_OFFSET from the Component Interface drop-down
list.
This selection changes the interface used to place the highlighted component.
se
U
al
The RECEIVE_BOLT.PRT model contains two Component Interfaces, INSERT_MATE
and INSERT_MATE_OFFSET. The INSERT_MATE interface is the default interface.
rn
5. Click the four interfaces shown.

This component is also placed using the
te
selected INSERT_MATE_OFFSET interface.

In
C
PT

r
Fo

Creating a Component Interface Using the Save as Interface Dialog Box
You can save assembly constraints and references to a component interface on-the-fly.
Right-Click > Save as Interface:

• Efficient
• Reuse
• Creates the Either type
interface
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Save as Interface Dialog Box
se
Creating a Component Interface Using the Save as Interface Dialog Box
U
You can save the constraints and references used to assemble a component to a component
interface feature using the Save as Interface dialog box.
With the assembly dashboard open, right-click in the graphics window and select Save as Interface.
al
This opens the Save as Interface dialog box, enabling you to create the Either type interface.
You can save interfaces by editing the definition of a component and then saving its interface during
rn
the initial assembly process, after all constraints and references have been defined, or at a later time.
Save as Interface Type

te
An interface saved using the Save as Interface dialog box is created as an Either type interface.
If you need to change it to a Placing or Receiving interface, you can edit the definition of the
In
interface to do so.
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating a Component Interface Using the Save as
Interface Dialog Box
Assembly\Interface_Save-As SAVE_AS_INTF.ASM
Task 1: Insert a component and save the interface.
y
2. Click Assemble from the Component
nl
group.
3. In the Open dialog box, select INTF_CAP.PRT
and click Open.
O
4. Select a cylindrical surface on
INTF_CAP.PRT and a surface in the
lower-left hole of SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT to
se
create a Coincident constraint.
5. Drag INTF_CAP.PRT up and out of
SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT, if required.
U
6. Select the small surface at the bottom of the
sphere-shaped head of INTF_CAP.PRT and
the top surface of SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT to
al
create a Coincident constraint.
rn
te
7. Right-click in the graphics window and select Save as Interface.

8. Type insert_mate in the Name field of the dialog box and click OK.
In
Task 2: Insert the cap model again using the new component interface.
C
1. Click Assemble .
PT
2. In the Open dialog box, select INTF_CAP.PRT and click Open.

3. Using the newly created component
interface, select the lower-right hole in
SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT as the assembly's first
r
Fo
4. Select the top of SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT as the

assembly's second Coincident reference.
Task 3: Edit the interface to a Placing type component interface.
1. Open the topmost INTF_CAP.PRT from the model tree.

2. In the model tree, expand the Footer and INTERFACES nodes.
3. Edit the definition of INSERT_MATE.

4. Click INSERT_MATE in the upper-left corner
of the COMPONENT INTERFACE dialog box.
5. Select Placing from the Placement/Receiving
Interface drop-down list.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Auto Placing Components
You can position components containing component interfaces in an assembly using Auto
Place.
Auto Place dialog box:

• Screen point
• Search scope
• Locations found
y
• Locations selected Figure 1 – Auto Place Button
• Preferences
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Viewing Different Found Locations Figure 3 – Auto Place Dialog Box
te
Understanding Auto Place

The Auto Place functionality in Creo Parametric positions a component containing a component
In
interface into an assembly based on a selected screen point location and search scope.
Auto Place Workflows

C
There are two basic workflows you can follow when positioning components using Auto Place.
PT
• Before selecting any references, click Auto Place in the assembly dashboard. This opens the
Auto Place dialog box enabling you to do the following:
– Select a screen point for Creo Parametric to begin searching for a suitable assembly location.
– Select components limiting the search scope for Creo Parametric to use when searching
for a suitable assembly location.
r
Fo
– After locating the correct position(s), use Add Item to select the position. You can select
multiple locations for assembly.
• Preselect components to limit the search scope of the Auto Place position search. In this case,
as soon as you insert a component, the Auto Place dialog box opens with the search scope
model(s) already listed.
– Select a screen point for Creo Parametric to begin searching for a suitable assembly location.
– The search scope is already defined with this workflow.
– After locating the correct position(s), use Add Item to select the position. You can select
multiple locations for assembly.
Auto Place Preferences

You can adjust placement search preferences at any time during the operation.

• You can adjust the maximum number of locations. By default, Creo Parametric searches for and
finds five possible assembly locations. Increasing this amount enables you to find more assembly
locations, but it also slows down the search process.
• You can also increase or decrease the search area around the selected screen point to effect
performance as well as the number of locations found.
Best Practices
With all but the smallest assemblies, it is important to limit the search scope to a component or two.
An assembly-wide search scope increases search time and may not provide good results.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Auto Placing Components
Assembly\Auto-Place AUTO-PLACE.ASM
Task 1: Place a component using Auto Place.

y
group.
3. Select BOLT_6-20.PRT and click Open.
nl
4. Click Auto Place from the dashboard and
click the left hole to auto place the component.
O
5. In the Auto Place dialog box, select each
of the locations found to identify the correct
se
placement location.
6. Select the correct location and click Add Item
.
U
• Click Close.
al
Task 2: Auto place additional components, limiting the search scope to a selected component.
rn
1. Select GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.PRT.
2. Click Assemble , select BOLT_6-20.PRT, and click Open.
te
Because GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.PRT was preselected, the Auto Place dialog box

automatically opens, listing the first five potential placement locations found in the part.
In
3. In the Auto Place dialog box, select and

review each of the locations found.
Notice that GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.
C
PRT is specified in the Auto Place dialog

box as an item to define the search
PT
scope.
r
Fo

4. Click Preferences.
5. Edit the Max. number of locations to 20.
6. Begin selecting each location starting at
number 6. Stop when you have identified the
location that positions the bolt in either the
center or right-side hole shown in the figure.
7. Click Add Item .
y
nl
O
8. Review the remaining locations to find the
bolt positioned in the remaining hole.
9. Click Add Item .
se
10. Click Close.
U
al
rn

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Copying and Pasting Components
You can copy and then paste a component, its placement constraints, and its references.
• Use CTRL+C and CTRL+V.

• Select assembly references.
• Paste components multiple times.
y
nl
O
Figure 2 – Pasting a Second Instance of
Figure 1 – Copy and Pasting a Component the Component
se
Copying and Pasting Components
U
You can copy and then paste components within the current assembly or into other assemblies.
One of the most efficient methods for placing a component multiple times within an assembly
is to use Copy and Paste. This is also an efficient method for copying a component from one
assembly into another.
al
When you copy a component, the constraints and references used to place it are also copied. When
rn
you paste the component into an assembly, you also paste the constraints and references with it,
enabling you to place the component by selecting corresponding assembly references.
te
Copy and Paste Component Workflow

Use the following workflow to copy and paste components within an assembly.
In
• Select the component to copy and either click Copy from the Operations group or use the
keyboard shortcut CTRL+C to copy it.
C
• Paste the component into the desired assembly by clicking Paste from the Operations group
or use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+V. An unconstrained copy of the component appears in
PT
the graphics window.

• Select assembly references corresponding to those in the component.
Best Practices
r
Copy and Paste is a very efficient method to use when copying a single component in an assembly
Fo
multiple times. Depending on your situation, the Repeat functionality may be even more efficient.

PROCEDURE - Copying and Pasting Components
Component_Operations\Copy_Paste COPY_PASTE.ASM
Task 1: Copy and paste a component within the assembly.

2. Select BOLT_6-25.PRT.
y
3. Press CTRL+C to copy the component.
4. Press CTRL+V to paste the component.
nl
5. Select a surface in the middle hole as the
assembly's first Coincident reference.
O
se
6. Select the front surface as the assembly's
second Coincident reference.
U
al
rn
8. Press CTRL+V again to paste a second

instance of the bolt.
te
9. Select a surface in the far-right hole as the

In

C

PT
Task 2: Copy and paste a component to another assembly.

r
1. Click Open and double-click

Fo
CARBURETOR.ASM to open the assembly.

2. Press CTRL+V to paste the component into
the new assembly.
3. Drag the copied bolt to the position shown
in the figure.
4. Select a surface in the left hole as the

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Repeating Component Placement
You can use the Repeat Component tool to place a component multiple times within an
assembly.
• Select component, right-click and select Repeat.
– Select which assembly refs are variable.
– Place component by selecting new refs.
– Multiple occurrences, if desired.
• Repeat constraints in model tree, too.
y
– One component at a time.
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
Figure 1 – Repeating Constraint Placement Figure 2 – Repeat Component Dialog Box
Repeating Component Placement

In
You can use the Repeat Component dialog box to quickly place a component multiple times
throughout an assembly. To open the Repeat Component dialog box, select the component you
want to repeat, then right-click the component and select Repeat .
C
You can also repeat the placement of a component one time by right-clicking one or more of its
PT
constraints in the model tree and then selecting Repeat .
Using the Repeat Component Dialog Box

The Repeat Component dialog box contains the following elements used to repeat the placement
r
of a component:
Fo
• Component – The component selected prior to opening the Repeat Component dialog box is
listed in the Component section of the dialog box.
In the dialog box, you can leave the component selected or select a different component to be
repeated.
A component must be preselected or the Repeat menu option is grayed out and
unavailable.
• Variable assembly references – This section lists all constraints used to place the selected
component. Select the constraint that will be different for each repeated component placement.
For example, when repeating the placement of a bolt into various holes in a block, you select only
the cylindrical Coincident constraint, not the planar Coincident constraint. This is because the bolt
will be inserted into different holes, but the head of the bolt will always mate to the same surface.
If more than one constraint will vary, press CTRL and select each varying constraint.

• Place component – To repeat a component's placement, click Add after selecting constraints to
vary. As you select new assembly references, components are added to the assembly and
listed in the Place component section.
To remove a repeated component, select it in the list and click Remove.
Repeat using the Model Tree

To repeat the placement of a component using the model tree, expand the component’s placement
and constraint set nodes. In the constraint set node, right-click the constraint(s) you wish to repeat
and click Repeat . This opens the component placement dashboard and displays the new
component in the graphics window, enabling you to select required references for the component’s
y
placement.
nl
Unlike the Repeat Component dialog box that enables you to repeat the placement of a component
multiple times, this technique only enables you to repeat placement one component at a time.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Repeating Component Placement
Component_Operations\Repeat REPEAT.ASM
Task 1: Repeat the placement of a component and vary a single reference.

y
nl
Placement folder check box and click OK.
4. In the model tree, right-click BOLT_5-18.PRT
O
and click Repeat .
5. In the Variable assembly references section
se
of the Repeat Component dialog box, select
the first Coincident reference and click Add.
6. Reorient the assembly, as necessary, to
U
select the three inside hole surfaces.
7. Click OK in the Repeat Component dialog
box to complete the assembly of the three
al
bolts.
rn
te
Task 2: Repeat the placement of a component and vary two references.
1. In the model tree, right-click the last instance

In
of BOLT_6-25.PRT and click Repeat .

2. In the Variable assembly references section
C
of the Repeat Component dialog box, select

both Coincident references and click Add.
PT
3. Reorient the assembly and select the inner

hole surface as the first Coincident constraint
reference and the front surface as the second
Coincident constraint reference.
r
Fo
4. Click OK in the Repeat Component dialog

box.

Task 3: Repeat the placement of another component using the model tree.
1. In the model tree, expand the first instance of BOLT_6-25.PRT.

2. Expand the Placement node and the Set25 node.
3. Right-click the top Coincident constraint and select Repeat .
4. Select the cylindrical surface of the
hole located at the upper-center of
GEARBOX_REAR_REPEAT.PRT, as shown
y
in the figure.
nl
Using this method, you can only repeat
one component at a time.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 4
y
Utilizing Intelligent Fasteners
nl
O
Module Overview
se
In this module, you learn about the Intelligent Fastener extension in PTC Creo Parametric, which
enables you to assemble and manipulate intelligent fasteners.
U
Objectives
al
• Describe how to rapidly create fasteners and the required holes.
• Assemble intelligent fasteners by selecting references to determine the fastener type.
rn
• Explain the various methods available to manipulate intelligent fasteners.
• Assemble dowel pins and assemble all instances during fastener placement.
• Explain how the Check Fasteners and Options dialog boxes can be used with intelligent fasteners.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Understanding the Intelligent Fastener Extension
You can rapidly create fasteners and required holes.
• Tools tab
– Intelligent Fastener group
• Built-in Intelligence
– Screws
– Hardware
y
– Holes
• Fastener Definition
nl
– Dialog box
– Hardware library
O
– 2D and 3D - Preview
• IFX Versions
se
U
Figure 1 – Screw Fastener Definition Dialog Box
Understanding the Intelligent Fastener Extension

al
The Intelligent Fastener extension (IFX) enables you to rapidly place common fasteners in an
rn
assembly. Intelligent Fastener functionality is accessed from the Intelligent Fastener group within
the Tools tab in the ribbon.
IFX brings a built-in Intelligence to the assembly of fasteners. Screws and Bolts can be placed
te
rapidly with required hardware such as nuts and washers. In addition, IFX automatically creates
any required holes in components as features at the part level.
In
Once placement references are selected, you can configure the fastener using the Fastener
Definition dialog box. The dialog box contains several options to access the built-in hardware library:
• Catalog – Millimeter or inch
C
• Screw Type
• Thread
PT
– Diameter Value
– Measure Diameter – Select an assembly reference (such as a hole) to measure diameter.
– Length Value
r
– Set Length Automatically – Enable the system to select the appropriate length from the library.
This option is momentary and does not remain in effect each time the dialog is opened.
Fo
– Permanently Set Length Automatically – Maintains the automatic length option as the default
each time the dialog is opened, until the icon is manually disabled.
• Washers – Under the head of the fastener, and under the nut.
• Nut Type
• Hole Layout
– Tolerances
– Counterbore
2D and 3D - Previews:
• The Fastener Definition dialog box also provides a color-coded 2D - Preview of the fastener
connection. The 2D - Preview updates with fastener and hardware selections, and also displays a
representation of the affected assembly components.

• The 3D - Preview can be enabled using the Preview button in the dialog box. A wireframe preview
of the fastener is displayed in the graphics window.
IFX Versions:
• The basic Intelligent Fastener functionality (Lite) is provided with PTC Creo Parametric. You can
upgrade to the Intelligent Fastener extension (Full) to access advanced functionality, as outlined
in the following table:
Library Lite Full
Screws (mm and Inch)
y
DIN EN ISO 1207, 2009,1580, 4762, 10642
nl
DIN 84, 85, 580, 912, 921, 931, 933, 960, 961, 963, 6912, 7990, 7984, 7991
X X
ISO 4014, 4017, 6914, 8765, 8676,
O
EN 24017,
EN ISO 1207
se
Washers (mm and inch)
Plain – wide and narrow X X
U
Lock – regular and heavy
Nuts (mm and inch) X X
al
Dowels (mm and inch) X
Customization X
rn
Placement Lite Full

te
Automatic hole creation X X

Counterbores X X
In
Automatic length selection X X

Automatic thread diameter selection X X
Pattern fastener during placement X X
C
Assemble fastener on all points/axes X

PT
Create holes without external references X

Alignment of fasteners on beams with sloped inner surfaces X
Assembling nuts to subassemblies (encapsulated/welded nuts) X
r
Validation Lite Full

Fo
Updating hole positions X X

Fastener length X X

Assembling Intelligent Fasteners
Selected references determine the fastener type.
• Location References
– Axis/Point/Hole
– Dimension References
• Opposing References
– Bolt/Nut
y
• Aligning References
nl
– Bolt/Thread
Figure 1 – Opposing References for
Bolt/Nut Connection
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Aligning References for Bolt/Thread Figure 3 – Bolt/Thread and Bolt/Nut Connections
Connection
al
Assembling Intelligent Fasteners
rn
To assemble intelligent fasteners, you select Location and Placement references. The references
selected determine the fastener type.
te
Location References can be:

In
• An axis, point, or surface of a hole – These references are selected when using the Assemble on
point or axis option.
• A pair of XY dimension references to locate the center axis – These references are selected when
using the Assemble by mouse click option. During placement, the system displays the current
C
offset values, which update as the cursor is moved. If you leave a valid position, the values
disappear and the preview is grayed out.
PT
Placement references can be two opposing surfaces or two aligning surfaces:

• Opposing Surfaces – Face in opposite directions, and result in a Screw/Nut connection.
• Aligning Surfaces – Face in the same direction, and result in a Screw/Thread connection.
r
Once the Location and Placement references are defined, you can use the Screw Fastener
Fo
Definition dialog box to configure the fastener type, size, and options.

PROCEDURE - Assembling Intelligent Fasteners
Intelligent_Fastener\Asm-Std IFX-STD1.ASM
Task 1: Create a bolt and nut connection using an axis.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display

types: .
y
nl
O
2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.
• Click the Screw drop-down menu from
the Intelligent Fastener group and select
se
Assemble on point or axis .
• Select datum axis AA_1.
U
3. Select the top surface of the upper plate and
the bottom surface of the lower plate.
al
rn
te
4. Click OK.
5. Click Preview and expand 2D - Preview, if
In
necessary.
• Select mm from the Catalog types
drop-down list.
C
• Select DIN 7984 - 8.8 from the Screw types

drop-down list.
PT
• Select M12 from the Thread types

drop-down list.
• Select 25.000 from the Thread length
drop-down list.
r
• Notice the bolt length is too short in the 2D

Fo
- Preview.
6. Click Set Length Automatically .

• Notice the bolt length is updated in the 2D -
Preview.

7. Click Show Hole Layout .
• Select Medium Fit - 14 from the ISO types
drop-down list.
• Select the Side 1 - Counterbore check
box.
• Click Permanently Set Length
Automatically to correct the bolt
length.
y
Clicking Permanently Set Length
Automatically will make the
nl
automatic length option the default in the
dialog box until it is disabled.
O
8. Select the top Side 2 Washers check box.
• Select DIN 127-A.
se
9. Select the Nut check box.
• Select ISO 4033-12.
10. Click OK.
U
11. Disable Annotation Display from the In
Graphics toolbar. al
12. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.
• View the nut and washer assembly and
press CTRL+D.
rn
te
13. Open PART1.PRT from the model tree.

• In the model tree, select the hole feature
IFX_ID_414.
In
• Notice the hole feature on the model and

click Close .
C
14. In the model tree, select Tree Filters from

PT
the Settings types drop-down menu.

• Select the Features check box.
• Click OK.
15. Expand PART2.PRT and Group
r
IFX_SCREW.
Fo
• Notice the created hole in PART2.PRT and

the fastener components.

Task 2: Create a bolt and nut connection using a hole.
1. Click the Screw drop-down menu and select

• Select a surface of the hole shown.
y
the bottom surface of the lower plate.
nl
O
se
3. Click OK.
• Notice the Thread defaulted to M8.
U
4. Select M12 from the Thread types drop-down
list and notice the 2D - Preview updates.
5. Click Measure Diameter .
al
• Select the surface of the hole again.
• Notice the thread reverts to M8.
rn
6. Clear the Side 1 - Counterbore check box.
7. Disable Permanently Set Length
te
Automatically .
8. Click OK.
In
Task 3: Create a bolt and thread connection using a datum point.

C

• Select datum point APNT0.
rPT

Fo
the top surface of the lower plate.

3. Click OK.

• Select both Side 1 Washers check boxes
and set the types to:
– DIN 127-A and DIN 125-1-A
• Notice the 2D - Preview.
• Click OK.
y
Task 4: Create bolt and thread connections using mouse click locations.
nl
Assemble by mouse click .
O
• Select the dimension references shown.
se
U
the top surface of the lower plate.
3. Click OK. al
rn
4. Leave all of the previous settings and click

OK.
te
5. Place the first component at dimension of

approximately 15.000 | 15.000.
In
Use the cursor location on the placement

surface to visually judge the placement,
and not the tip of the bolt.
C
6. Place the second component at a dimension

of approximately 50.000 | 50.000.
PT
• Middle-click in the background to finish

placements.
r
Fo

Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners
You can manipulate fasteners using various techniques.
• Suppress / Resume
• Reassemble
• Redefine
• Pattern
• Delete
y
• Edit mouse click dimensions
nl
Figure 1 – Editing Dimensions
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Reassemble Figure 3 – Redefine, Pattern, and Delete
Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners

al
Once created, you can manipulate intelligent fasteners using various options found in the Intelligent
Fastener group within the Tools tab:
rn
• Suppress/Resume – Suppresses or Resumes all intelligent fasteners. Any created holes remain
visible.
te
• Reassemble – Allows you to select an existing fastener and repeat the assembly to another
reference.
In
• Redefine – Provides access to the Screw Fastener Definition dialog box, where any fastener
options can be changed. Redefining a fastener causes any child fasteners to update.
• Pattern – You can manually or reference pattern an intelligent fastener. If a fastener is placed
on a member of a pattern, you are provided with the option to assemble a single fastener or
C
pattern the fastener using a Reference Pattern.

• Delete – Deletes the entire fastener connection, including any hardware and created holes in
PT
components. If the fastener has been repeated using the Reassemble option, you are prompted
with the option to delete the selected fastener, or all occurrences.
When editing dimensions for fasteners placed using the mouse click option, you can edit the created
axis in the model tree to access the offset dimensions. Once regenerated, the fasteners update
r
parametrically.
Fo

PROCEDURE - Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners
Intelligent_Fastener\Manip-Std IFX-STD2.ASM
Task 1: Manipulate existing IFX fasteners.

types: .
y
2. Disable Annotation Display from the In
Graphics toolbar.
nl
• Click the Intelligent Fastener group
O
drop-down menu and select Suppress.
• Notice the fasteners are suppressed but
the holes remain.
se
4. Click the Intelligent Fastener group drop-down
menu and select Resume.
U
the Settings types drop-down menu.
al
• Click OK.
6. Edit datum axis AA_2.
rn
• Edit both dimensions to 50 and press
ENTER.
te
• Regenerate the model.
7. Click Reassemble from the Intelligent

In
Fastener group.
• Select the center bolt.
• Select the top-left datum point APNT0.
C
• Click Apply.
PT
8. Select the upper-right hole.

• Click OK.
• Select Assemble single instance? and
click OK.
r
Fo
Selecting Pattern fastener? would

have resulted in fasteners in both
holes.

9. Click Redefine from the Intelligent
Fastener group.
• Select the upper-left bolt.
• Select Redefine all elements from the
Redefine Options dialog box, if necessary.
• Click OK.
• Select ISO 4762 - 8.8 from the Screw types
drop-down list.
y
• Clear the bottom Side 1 Washers check
box.
nl
• Click OK and notice all three bolts update.
10. In the model tree, expand the Group
O
IFX_SCREW_1 node.
• Click and drag axis IFX_A_1134 to be the
first feature in Group IFX_SCREW_1.
se
11. Select Group IFX_SCREW_1 and click
Pattern from the mini toolbar.
U
• Click Complete Feature from the
dashboard.
12. Click in the background to de-select the
al
pattern.
13. Click Delete from the Intelligent Fastener
rn
group.
• Select the lower-left bolt.
te
• Click Yes.
• Notice this has removed the bolt/nut and
hole.
In
14. With Delete still active, select the upper-left

bolt.
• Click No.
C
• Notice only the selected bolt was deleted.

PT
15. With Delete still active, select the center bolt.

• Click Yes.
r
• Middle-click in the background to finish

Fo
deleting fasteners.
• Click Close from the Quick Access
toolbar.

Task 2: Pattern IFX fasteners.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.

• Double-click IFX-PATTERN.ASM.
y
2. Select the Tools tab.
nl
• Click Reassemble .
• Select the center bolt.
• Select any available bolt hole and click OK.
O
• Select Pattern fastener? and click OK.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Assembling Intelligent Fasteners Using Advanced Options
You can utilize advanced options during fastener placement.
• Dowel Pins
– Location References
♦ Axis / Point / Hole
– Dimension References
• Assemble All Instances
y
– Holes in Multiple Parts
nl
– Orientation Reference
Figure 1 – Dowel Pins
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Holes in Two Underlying Parts Figure 3 – Hardware Aligned
al
Assembling Intelligent Fasteners Using Advanced Options
rn
Advanced assembly options available with the Intelligent Fastener extension include:
• Dowel Pins – Create cylindrical alignment pins between mating parts. Similar to the placement of
te
screw fasteners, you specify location and placement references:

– Location References can be:
♦ An axis, point, or surface of a hole – These references are selected when using the
In
Assemble on point or axis option.

♦ A pair of XY dimension references to locate the center axis – These references are selected
when using the Assemble by mouse click option. During placement, the system displays the
C
current offset values, which update as the cursor is moved. If you leave a valid position, the
values disappear and the preview is grayed out.
PT
– The placement reference for a dowel pin is the mating surface that separates the two
components.
• Assemble All Instances – Creates a fastener connection on each member of an underlying
pattern. Instead of creating a reference pattern, each fastener instance is individually assembled
in the model tree. The Assemble All Instances option also handles special cases, such as:
r
Fo
– Holes in Multiple Parts – The Assemble All Instances option enables the creation of holes in
multiple underlying parts, which is useful in cases where patterning the fasteners only creates
holes in the model whose surface was selected as a placement reference.
– Orientation Reference – In cases where the placement references for a bolt/nut connection are
not parallel (such as with the slanted underlying surface of an I-beam), you can specify an
additional orientation reference. When used in conjunction with the Assemble All Instances
option, the system can automatically align the fasteners with the non-parallel surfaces (such
as slanted washers).

PROCEDURE - Assembling Intelligent Fasteners Using Advanced
Options
Intelligent_Fastener\Asm-Adv IFX-ADV1.ASM
Task 1: Assemble dowel pins on axes.
y
types: .
nl
2. Orient to the 3D1 view orientation.
O
se
U
• Click the Dowel Pin drop-down menu from
al
rn
• Select datum axis AA_22.
te
4. Query-select the placement surface as

shown.
In
C
PT
5. Click OK.
• Select ISO 2338 - m6 - St from the Dowel
Pin types drop-down list.
• Select 8.000 as the Dowel Pin diameter.
r
• Select 45.000 as the Dowel Pin depth.

Fo

6. Click OK.
• Select Pattern fastener? from Additional
Options dialog box, if necessary.
• Click OK.
• In the model tree, select the Pattern
feature.
• Zoom out and notice the two dowel pins
created.

Task 2: Assemble dowel pins by mouse click.

• Click the Dowel Pin drop-down menu and
select Assemble by mouse click .
• Select the position reference surfaces as
shown.
y
2. Query-select the placement surface as
shown.
nl
O
se
3. Click OK.
U
al
• For the Top Bore, select Blind hole and
type 10.5 as the Drill Depth.
rn
• For the Bottom Bore, select Blind hole and
te
In
5. Click OK.
• Click to place the first dowel pin at
C
Your values may display in the opposite

PT
order, depending on the order of the

selected references.
6. Click to place the second dowel pin at

r
• Middle-click in the background to complete

Fo
dowel placement.

7. Hide HOUSING_COVER.PRT .
• Select Tree Filters from the Settings
types drop-down menu.
• Select the Features check box and click
OK.
8. Press CTRL and select the datum axes
AA_28 and AA_29.
• Edit both datum axes.
y
• Edit the dimensions as shown.
nl
• Select HOUSING_COVER.PRT and click
Show from the mini toolbar..
O
Task 3: Assemble on all instances.
se
U
• Select the datum axis A_11.
al
rn
3. Select the placement surfaces as shown.

• Click OK.
te
In
C
PT
4. Select ISO 4762 - 8.8 from the Screw types

drop-down list.
• Clear all Side 1 Washers, if necessary.
• Click Measure Diameter and select the
r
hole.
Fo

• Click OK.

5. Select Assemble fastener on all instances?
and click OK.
• Scroll to the bottom of the model tree and
notice the groups are not patterned.
Using the Pattern fastener? option
would create all six bolts in a pattern,
but would only create holes in one of the
underlying housing halves.
y
Task 4: Assemble using screw connection orientation.
nl
O
• Select datum axis A_8.
se
U
3. Select the placement surfaces shown.
• Notice the arrows are not parallel.
al
rn
te
4. Click in the Orientation reference collector.

• Select the surface shown.
In
• Notice the arrows are now parallel.

• Click OK.
C
PT
5. Select ISO 4017 - 8.8 from the Screw types

drop-down list.
• Click Measure Diameter .
r
• Select the hole.

Fo
• Click Set Length Automatically .

• Select DIN 433-1 for the Side 1 Washer.
• Select DIN 435 I for the Side 2 Washer.
8. Select the Nut check box, if necessary.
• Select DIN 6923 - 10 for the Nut.
• Click OK.

9. Select Assemble fastener on all
instances?.
• Click OK.
• Notice the orientation of the tapered
washer.
• Notice the orientation of the tapered
washer.
y
Using the Pattern fastener? option
nl
would create all four bolts, but would not
mirror the tapered washer appropriately
for the right side I-beam.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners Using Advanced Options
You can utilize advanced options to manipulate fasteners.
• Check Fasteners dialog box

– Hole Positions
– Fastener Length
• Options dialog box
– External References
y
– Enter Distance Values
Figure 1 – Check Fasteners
nl
– Library Paths
– Color Options
• Update Holes
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Entering and Editing Values Figure 3 – Updating Holes
Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners Using Advanced Options

te
Advanced manipulation options available with the Intelligent Fastener extension include:
In
• Check Fasteners dialog box – Provides validation and the ability to correct fastener issues such as:
– Hole Positions – Find misaligned fastener holes.
– Fastener Length – Find fasteners that are too short.
C
• Options dialog box – Provides access to several Intelligent Fastener extension specific
configuration options. Examples of available options include:
PT
– USE_EXTERNAL_REFERENCES – When set to NO, enables you to create holes from

fasteners in part models without creating external references to the assembly. Note that the
Pattern options are only available when external references are created.
– ENTER_DISTANCE_VALUES – Enables you to type offset values immediately after clicking
each fastener location, when using the Assemble by mouse click method. You can still edit
r
the dimension values normally after placement is complete.

Fo
– Library Paths – Provides system file paths to the fastener library.

– Color Options – Enables you to specify colors for screws, nuts, washers, and dowel pins.
• Update Holes – If the USE_EXTERNAL_REFERENCE option is set to NO, you can use the
Update Holes command to update holes after fasteners are moved or redefined.

PROCEDURE - Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners Using Advanced
Options
Intelligent_Fastener\Manip-Adv IFX-ADV2.ASM
Task 1: Utilize the Check Fastener option.
y
nl
O
se
3. Activate GEAR_SHAFT_COVER-CLOSED.
PRT
U
4. Double-click the main body of the cover.
• Edit the 10 width dimension on the left to
30 and press ENTER.
al
rn
te
5. Press CTRL+A.
In
C
PT

• Click the Intelligent Fastener group
drop-down menu and select Check Screw
r
Fasteners.
Fo
• Double-click the SHORT entry.


• Notice the updated 2D - Preview.
• Click OK.
• Select Assemble single instance?.
• Click OK.
• Notice both fastener entries indicate OK.
• Click Close.
y
Task 2: Utilize IFX options for external references and mouse click offsets.
nl
O
2. Click Delete from the Intelligent Fastener
group.
• Select the existing dowel pin.
se
• Click Yes to delete all.
U
3. Click the Intelligent Fastener group drop-down menu and select Options .
• Select NO from the USE_EXTERNAL_REFERENCES row.
• Select YES from the ENTER_DISTANCE_VALUES row.
al
• Click OK.
4. Click the Dowel Pin drop-down menu from
rn
Assemble by mouse click .
te
• Select the Position Reference on the right.

• Select the Position Reference on the left.
In
5. Query-select the Placement Surface.

C
rPT
6. Click OK.
Fo
• Verify the Dowel Pin type is ISO 2338 - m6

- St.
• Select 8.000 as the Dowel Pin diameter.

• For the Top Bore, select Blind Hole and
• For the Bottom Bore, select Blind Hole
and type 10.5 as the Drill Depth.
y
8. Click OK.
• Click to place the first Dowel Pin at
nl
• Edit the values to 20.000 and 75.000.
O
se
9. Click to place the second Dowel Pin at
• Edit the values to 75.000 and 20.000.
U
• Middle-click to complete the Dowel Pin
placements. al
10. In the model tree, select HOUSING_COVER.
PRT and click Hide from the mini toolbar.
rn
11. Select Tree Filters from the Settings
te
• Click OK.
12. In the model tree, press CTRL and select
In
datum axes AA_28 and AA_29.

• Edit both datum axes.
• Edit both 75 dimensions to 50 as shown.
C
13. Press CTRL+G and notice the holes are not

updated.
r PT
Fo
14. Click the Intelligent Fastener group drop-down

menu and select Update holes.
• Notice the holes are now updated.
• Select HOUSING_COVER.PRT and click
Show from the mini toolbar.

Task 3: Explore other IFX options.
1. Click the Intelligent Fastener group drop-down menu and select Options .
• Select YES from the USE_EXTERNAL_REFERENCES row.
• Select NO from the ENTER_DISTANCE_VALUES row.
• Locate the COLOR options and view their values.
2. Select the Screws tab.
y
3. Select the Dowel Pins tab.
nl
• Click OK.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 5
y
Creating and Using Flexible Components
nl
O
Module Overview
se
A flexible component readily adapts to new, different, or changing requirements within an assembly.
You can include it in an assembly in various states. Each flexible state is defined by any combination
of variable dimensions, features, geometric tolerances, surface finishes, and parameters. For
U
example, a spring can have various compression lengths in different places throughout an assembly.
You can define flexibility for any part or sub-assembly and you can use it for every placement
instance of the component.
al
Objectives
rn
• Add flexibility to a component.
te
• Place flexible components into assemblies.

• Use a measured distance to define a flexible dimension.
In
• Add flexibility to components already placed in assemblies.

• Add a feature as a flexible item in a model.
• Use a measured diameter to define a flexible dimension.
C
• Edit the flexibility of a component in an assembly.

• Use flexible parameters.
r PT
Fo

Adding Flexibility to a Component
Flexibility enables selected component items to vary, or “flex,” within an assembly.
Variable Items:
• Dimensions
• Features
• Parameters
• Surface Finish
y
• Geometric Tolerances
nl
• Components
O
Figure 1 – Prepare Varied Items
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Free State Contact Figure 3 – Compressed Contact in Assembly
Understanding Flexibility
te
Components such as springs, clips, rubber washers all typically vary geometrically in their
assembled condition. These are called flexible components. A spring, for example, can have
In
various compression lengths throughout an assembly.

Creo Parametric enables you to add flexibility to a component by changing the value of selected
component items. Note that this change is only within the assembly; the part remains unaltered.
C
You can select dimensions, parameters, surface finishes, geometric tolerances, features, and
components as flexible items and vary their values during assembly.
PT
Flexible Items
To open the Flexibility: Prepare Varied Items dialog box, click File > Prepare > Model Properties and
click change in the Flexible row of the Tools section of the Model Properties dialog box. Flexible
r
items are selected in the model and added to the Flexibility dialog box.
Fo
• Dimensions – You can select any model dimension as a flexible item. When the component is
placed in an assembly, you are given the option to vary one, none, or all of the flexible dimension
values in the dialog box.
• Geometric Tolerances – You can vary the value of geometric tolerances to ensure that a
component is not flexed to the breaking point.
• Parameters – You can designate a parameter as flexible and vary the value upon assembly. This
is a powerful tool when used in conjunction with relations to define known assembly states.
• Surface Finish – You can vary the value of a flexible Surface Finish symbol within an assembly to
meet the varying finish conditions at different locations within an assembly.
• Features – You can suppress and resume flexible features within an assembly.
• Components – You can suppress and resume components within an assembly. You only see the
Components tab when adding flexibility to an assembly model.

Best Practices
You should always test your model to ensure that it will regenerate successfully using the same
dimension values and feature statuses that are used when it is placed in an assembly as a
flexible component. To test the model, edit the value and status of all flexible items to ensure
they regenerate successfully at those values.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Adding Flexibility to a Component
Component_Operations\Flexible_Adding ADDING_FLEX.PRT
Task 1: Add a flexible dimension.

2. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.
y
3. In the Tools section, click change in the Flexible row.
nl
4. In the Flexibility dialog box, select the
Dimensions tab, if necessary.
5. In the model tree, select Extrude 1.
O
6. Select the 60 degree dimension.
7. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
se
8. Notice the dimension is added to the list of
variable dimensions.
U
Task 2: Add a flexible feature.
1. In the Flexibility dialog box, select the

al
Features tab.
2. Select the topmost section of the part.
rn
3. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
4. Notice the extrude feature is added to the list
te
of variable features.
5. Click OK in the Flexibility dialog box.
In
6. In the Tools section, click Expand in the Flexible row to verify that one flexible dimension
and one flexible feature has been defined.
7. Click Close.
C
r PT
Fo

Placing Flexible Components in an Assembly
When placing a flexible component, you can use or ignore the flexible definition.
• Confirm the use of flexible definition.
• Type values for variable items.
• Assemble the component.
Figure 1 – Confirming Use of Flexible Definition
y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Typing Values for Variable Definition
al Figure 3 – Specifying Feature Status
Placing Flexible Components

Placing a flexible component is not much different than placing a non-flexible component. There are
rn
just two additional steps added to the process.
• Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box to confirm that you want to use the flexibility defined in the
te
component.
• In the Varied Items dialog box for the component, type new values for the items you want
to make flexible.
In
If you do not want to place a component in its flexible state, click No in the Confirm dialog
box and continue with the assembly as normal.
C
Flexible Items
PT
You are not required to type a new value for every item in the Varied Items dialog box. You should
only type values that are required to define flexibility for the instance being placed. A flexible
component used several times within an assembly may have a different flexible definition each
time it is used.
r
Flexible Values
Fo
Except for features, the flexible value for any item is, by default, defined using the By value method,
in which you type a new value in the New Value field of the dialog box.
For flexible dimensions, the following are five additional measurement-based methods that can
be used to define the flexible value:
• Curve Length – Measures a curve length to define the flexible dimension value.
• Distance – Measures a distance between two entities to define the flexible dimension value.
• Angle – Measures an angle to define the flexible dimension value.
• Area – Measures a surface area to define the flexible dimension value.
• Diameter – Measures the diameter to define the flexible dimension value.
Flexible features are not varied using a flexible value. Instead, they have a flexible status that
you can edit to either Resumed or Suppressed.

PROCEDURE - Placing Flexible Components in an Assembly
Component_Operations\Flexible_Placing PLACING_FLEX.ASM
Task 1: Add a flexible part to an assembly.

2. Click Assemble from the Component group, select FLEX_CONTACT.PRT, and click
y
Open.
3. Click Yes to confirm using the model’s predefined flexibility.
nl
4. Select the Dimensions tab in the Varied
Items dialog box, if necessary.
O
5. Click in the New Value field for the ang
dimension, and type 90.
se
6. Select the Features tab and then click in the
New Status field. Select Suppressed from
the drop-down menu.
U
7. Click Yes from the Warning prompt, and OK
to close the Varied Items dialog box. al
rn
8. Select the radial surface at the bottom of the connector slot as the assembly's Coincident
reference.
te
9. Select the surface in the connector slot as the assembly's Coincident reference.
10. Select the top surface of the connector as the assembly's Parallel reference.
In

C
PT
Task 2: Pattern the contact placement and verify the correct placement.
r
1. In the model tree, select FLEX_CONTACT.

Fo
PRT and click Pattern from the mini

toolbar.
2. Click Complete Feature to create the
Reference pattern.
3. Activate section A.
4. Verify the correct placement of
FLEX_CONTACT.PRT.
Task 3: Edit the free state contact part and update the connector assembly.
1. In the model tree, expand the pattern, then open any FLEX_CONTACT.PRT.

2. Edit Extrude 1.
3. Edit the 4 dimension to 8 and press ENTER.
4. Click twice in the background to de-select all
geometry.
5. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar
to return to the assembly.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Exercise 1: Using Measure to Define a Flexible Dimension
Objectives
After successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Use a measured distance to define a flexible dimension.
• Assemble part components using flexible components.
Scenario
To create real life figures for the Marketing Department’s brochures, you are assigned to assemble
y
the drill’s clutch using flexible components. First, define the clutch springs as flexible components.
Then, assemble the clutch springs into the clutch assembly.
nl
O
Component_Operations\Flexible_Dimension CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT
Task 1: Define the component flexibility.
se
types: .
2. Edit the datum point SPRING_LENGTH.
U
3. Edit the value of the SPRING_LENGTH
from 18 to 22 and click twice in the graphics
window to update the geometry.
al
4. Click Undo from the Quick Access toolbar.
rn
The length of the spring is controlled
by this single dimension, reflecting
the design intent of the spring. Now
te
that you have tested the extended

length, you know that this model
can easily be used as a flexible
In
component.
5. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar,

C
select CLUTCH.ASM, and click Open.

PT

group, select CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT, and
click Open.
7. Click Complete Component to leave the
spring packaged.
r
Fo
8. In the model tree, right-click

CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and select
Make Flexible > Make Flexible.
• Enable the display of Point Tag Display
from the Show group.
• Select the Component Placement tab.
10. In the graphics window, select datum point
PNT1.
11. Select the 18 dimension in the graphics
window, and click OK from the Select dialog
box.

Task 2: Assemble the first CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT.

• Notice that the distance between the holes for SPRING1 and SPRING 2 points are different.
y
nl
O
2. Edit the Method from By value to Distance in the Varied Items dialog box.
se
3. To measure the distance between them, press CTRL and select both SPRING1 datum points.
This measured value, currently 18, now determines the length of this spring instance,
no matter what the distance between the points changes to.
U
4. Click OK from the Distance dialog box.
Using the measurement method of defining the flexible value of the spring length
al
ensures that the spring length updates according to changes in the assembly.
5. Click OK from the Varied Items dialog box.

rn
te
In
C
rPT
Fo

6. Use the 3D Dragger to move the component to the approximate position shown below.
7. Select datum point PNT1 on CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and the left datum point SPRING1 on
CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT to create a Coincident constraint.
8. Reorient the assembly and rotate the spring slightly away from the assembly, as shown below.
9. Reorient to the TOP view orientation.
y
nl
O
se
U
10. Select datum point PNT2 on CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and the right datum point SPRING1 on
CLUTCH_SHOE_R.PRT to create the Coincident constraint.
11. Right-click and select Fix Constraint to fully constrain the spring.
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Task 3: Assemble the second clutch spring.

r
1. Click Assemble , select CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT, and click Open.

Fo
2. Click Complete Component to leave the spring packaged.

3. In the model tree, right-click the newly packaged CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and select Make
Flexible > Make Flexible.
4. In the graphics window, select datum point PNT1.
5. Select the 18 dimension in the graphics window, and click OK to add it to the list of variable
dimensions.

6. Edit the Method from By value to Distance in the Varied Items dialog box.
7. Press CTRL and select both SPRING2 datum points in the assembly.
8. Click OK from the Distance dialog box.
9. Click OK from the Varied Items dialog box.
10. Use the 3D Dragger to move the component above the top of the clutch assembly.
11. Select datum point PNT1 on CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and the left datum point SPRING2 on
CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT. If necessary, change this to a Coincident constraint.
12. Reorient the assembly and rotate the spring slightly away from the assembly.
y
13. Select datum point PNT2 on CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and the right datum point SPRING2 on
nl
CLUTCH_SHOE_R.PRT to create the Coincident constraint.
14. Right-click and select Fix Constraint to fully constrain the spring.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In

• Disable Point Tag Display .
C
This completes the exercise.

r PT
Fo

Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components
You can add flexibility to any component already in an assembly.
• Right-click and select Make Flexible.
• Add Varied Items.
• Edit flexibility in the dashboard.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Add Varied Items
U
Figure 2 – Add Flexibility to an Assembly
al
Adding Flexibility to an Already Placed Component
rn
Many designs contain flexible components such as springs, clips, and rubber washers. All of these
components typically vary geometrically in their assembled condition. For example, you can position
a spring with various compression lengths in different locations throughout an assembly.
te
Creo Parametric enables you to select any component in an assembly and make it flexible. The
component does not have to contain predefined flexible items.
In
Adding Flexible Items

To make a component of an assembly flexible, select the component, right-click it, and select Make
C
Flexible > Make Flexible. This opens the File Name: Varied Items dialog box.
With the dialog box open, you can select flexible items and type values that are used by the flexible
PT
component.
Editing Flexibility of an Already Placed Component

To edit the flexibility of an already placed component, select the component, right-click it, and
r
select Edit Definition . From the Component Placement dashboard, select the Flexibility tab.
Fo
Then select the Varied Items button.

Best Practices
Predefined flexibility that you add to a component is saved with that component model and can be
used anytime that component is placed. Flexibility that is added to an already-placed component is
not saved with the component. The flexibility is only saved within the assembly model.
To save time, you should add and save flexible items in components that are regularly assembled
in a flexible state. This way you are not required to re-select the items each time the component
is placed.
There are use cases where you may want to define flexibility at the assembly level. For example, if
you are not exactly sure what a dimension value needs to be until it is assembled, you can define
flexibility for the component at the assembly level and determine the correct dimension using a
measurement. Once the correct value is determined, it can be propagated back to the model by

right-clicking the newly flexible component and selecting Make Flexible > Propagate to > Model.
The model regenerates to the new values, and flexibility remains undefined at the part model.
If desired, you can then remove the assembly flexibility defined for the component by right-clicking
the component and selecting Make Flexible > Remove Var Items.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components
Component_Operations\Flexible_Placed FLEX_PLACED.ASM
Task 1: Add flexibility to a component in the assembly.

y
geometry.
nl
4. Notice the interferences between the models.
O
se
5. From the model tree, right-click
U
al
NOZZLE_HOUSE_B.PRT and select
rn
6. In the Varied Items dialog box, select the
• In the graphics window, select feature Hole
te
1.
• Select the 12 dimension.
In
• Click OK from the Select dialog box to add

it to the list of variable dimensions.
• Edit the New Value to 14.
C
• Click OK.
PT

The interference has been eliminated
from NOZZLE_HOUSE_B.PRT but
remains in NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT.
r
Fo

Task 2: Add flexibility to a second component in the assembly.
1. From the model tree, right-click

NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT and select
• In the graphics window, select feature
Extrude 3. This is the inner cut in
y
the NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT model,
highlighted in green.
nl
• Select the 8 dimension.
• Click OK from the Select dialog box.
O
• Edit the New Value to 9.
• Click OK.
se
The interference has increased. The
dimension was flexed in the wrong
U
direction.
al
rn
Task 3: Edit the flexibility of a component in the assembly.

te
1. Edit the definition of NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.

PRT.
In
2. From the Component Placement dashboard,

select the Flexibility tab.
3. On the Flexibility tab, click Varied Items.
C
4. In the Varied Items dialog box, edit the New

Value to 7.
PT
5. Click OK.
The interference has been eliminated.
r
Fo

Task 4: Propagate the new value to the part model and remove the assembly flexibility.
1. Open NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT from the

model tree.
2. Edit Extrude 3.
3. Notice the dimensions.
y
nl
O
4. Click Windows and select
FLEX_PLACED.ASM.
se
NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT and select
Make Flexible > Propagate to > Model.
6. Click OK from the Changing Models dialog
U
box.
The Message Log informs you that
one varied item was propagated.
al
7. Right-click NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT and
rn
select Make Flexible > Remove Var Items.
8. Read the Warning dialog box and click Yes.
te

NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT.
10. Edit Extrude 3.
In
11. Notice the updated dimension.

C
r PT
Fo

Creating Flexible Components with Varied Material
You can add material flexibility to already placed components.
• Add variable materials to the top level

assembly.
• Make component or subassembly flexible.
• Choose from the top level assembly materials
as flexible option.
• Material passed to component.
y
Figure 1 – Materials Added to the Top
Level Assembly
nl
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Selecting the New Flexible Material
al Figure 3 – Material Flexibility Added
Creating Flexible Components with Varied Material

rn
You can add material flexibility to already placed components. The Varied Items dialog box now
displays a Materials tab that enables you to select components whose material you wish to make
flexible. The Orig Material column displays the material assigned at the component level, if any.
te
The New Material column has a drop-down list that enables you to select from the list of materials
added at the top-level assembly level. Like any other flexible item, the component icon updates in
the model tree, and the new flexible material passed from the top level assembly displays under
In
the Materials tab for that component.

C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Flexible Components with Varied Material
Component_Operations\Flexible_Material VARIED-MATERIAL.ASM
Task 1: Verify the mass properties of the assembly.

2. In the model tree, expand the BODY.PRT
and Materials nodes.
y
• Expand the first BOLT.PRT and Materials
nl
nodes.
3. Every component has had a material
O
assigned to it.
se
4. Select the Analysis tab in the ribbon.
U
5. Click Mass Properties from the Model
Report group. al
6. Click Preview from the Mass Properties
dialog box.
7. Notice the overall assembly mass is 0.656 kg.
rn
• Click OK.
te
Task 2: Make the material of already-placed components flexible.

In
VARIED-MATERIALS.ASM and select

Edit Materials .
2. In the Materials tab, double-click
C
Legacy-Materials.
• Double-click the mg.mtl, ss.mtl, and
PT
tially.mtl materials.
• Click OK.
3. Expand the newly added Materials node in
the model tree.
r
4. Notice that the newly added materials have

Fo
been added to this node.

5. Right-click BODY.PRT and select Make
Materials tab.
• Click Add .
7. Notice that the original material is specified in
the Orig Material column.
8. Click in the New Material column and expand
the drop-down list.
y
9. Notice that the materials added to the
nl
assembly are available for selection for the
components.
O
10. Select SS as the New Material.
11. Click OK.
se
13. Expand the BODY.PRT and Materials nodes.
14. Notice that the component is now assigned
U
the stainless steel material, passed from the
top level assembly. al
rn
te
15. Click Mass Properties and click Preview.

16. Notice that the assembly mass has updated
due to the material change.
In
17. Click OK.

18. Expand the SUB.ASM sub-assembly.
C
19. Right-click SUB.ASM and select Make

PT

Materials tab.
21. Select component ARM.PRT from the
graphics window and middle-click to add it.
r
22. Click in the New Material field and select

Fo
TIALLY.
23. Click OK.

Exercise 2: Using Flexibility to Remove Interference
Objectives
• Add a feature as a flexible item in a model.
• Use a measured diameter to define a flexible dimension.
• Add flexibility to a component that is already assembled.
• Edit the flexibility of a component in an assembly.
y
Scenario
nl
The insert and base models used in this exercise are assembled in the workshop using a press-fit
type interface. In real life, the interference caused by the press-fit is intended to be used to keep the
O
parts together. In Creo Parametric, an interference between components is an annoyance because
it is listed every time a global interference check is run. Also, the interference can cause line display
inconstancies in drawings. To avoid these problems, use flexibility to remove the interference yet
se
maintain both the component and assembly design intent.
U
Component_Operations\Flexible_Interference FLEX_PRESS_FIT.ASM
Task 1: Identify interference in the assembly.

al
2. Select the Analysis tab.
rn
• Click Global Interference from the

Inspect Geometry group.
te
3. In the Global Interference dialog box, click

Preview.
In
The interference between the

components highlighted in red.
4. Click Cancel.
C
Task 2: Make the insert model flexible within the assembly.

PT

FLEX_PRESS_INSERT.PRT and select
r
2. Select the Features tab in the Varied Items

Fo
dialog box.
3. Select one of the knurl features shown and
click OK in the Select dialog box.
4. Click Yes in the Warning dialog box.

5. Click Suppressed from the New Status field.
6. Click OK.
Even though the knurled geometry
has been removed, there is still
interference in the assembly. The
head diameter of the insert is too
large and you should reduce it to
eliminate the interference.
y
nl
O
Task 3: Edit the defined flexibility.
se
1. In the Component Placement dashboard,
select the Flexibility tab.
U
2. Click Varied Items.
3. Select the Dimensions tab, if necessary, and
select the head of the insert, Extrude_1, as
al
shown.
4. Select the 15 dimension and click OK in the
rn
Select dialog box. This places the dimension
in the list of variable dimensions.
te
In
C
5. Edit the Method from By value to Diameter in

the Varied Items dialog box.
PT
6. Select the inner cylindrical surface, as shown,

to measure the diameter of the hole in the
base model.
• Notice this measured value, currently
r
14, now determines the diameter of this

Fo
assembled insert model, no matter how the

diameter of the hole changes.
7. Click OK in the Diameter dialog box.
8. Click OK to close the Varied Items dialog box.

Task 4: Verify that the interference has been removed from the assembly.
• Notice the interference appears to be
eliminated.
2. Ensure that there are no interfering models
by clicking Global Interference .
Preview.
y
• The interference has been removed.
nl
4. Click OK.
5. Open FLEX_PRESS_INSERT.PRT from the
O
model tree.
Even with flexible dimensions and
features applied to the assembly
se
instance of the insert, the part model
maintains its design state.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Using Flexible Parameters
You can use flexible parameters with relations to create predefined flexible states of a model.
• Flexible Parameter
– CLAMP_POS
• Dimensions
– head_ang_dim
– stroke_dim
y
• Relations
nl
– IF (CLAMP_POS) == 1
head_ang_dim = 45
O
stroke_dim = 0 Figure 1 – Flexible Parameter Values
ELSE ...
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Flexible State #1 Figure 3 – Flexible State #2
rn
Predefined Flexible States

te
You can use flexible parameters and relations to establish a predefined set of flexible model states.
You select and use a set of dimension values defining each flexible state of the model, based on the
In
flexible parameter value used during assembly.

For example, if the value of flexible parameter CLAMP_POS is 1, the stroke distance and head
angle dimensions receive one set of values. If the value of CLAMP_POS is 2, the dimensions
C
receive another set of values.
Parameter Controlled Relations

PT
Relations using a parameter called CLAMP_POS to define two predefined states of a flexible
model are shown below.
IF (CLAMP_POS) == 1
r
stroke_dim = 0
Fo
head_ang_dim = 45
ELSE
IF (CLAMP_POS) == 2
stroke_dim = 34
head_ang_dim = 0
ENDIF

PROCEDURE - Using Flexible Parameters
Component_Operations\Flexible_Parameters
FLEX_PARAMS.ASM
Task 1: Verify that the parameter and relations control the assembly.
y
2. Click Relations from the Model Intent
group.
nl
• Highlight stroke_dim in the set of relations
and then click Display Dimension to
O
display it in the model.
• Highlight head_ang_dim and click Display
Dimension .
se
3. Click Local Parameters to expand the dialog
U
box.
4. Edit the value of CLAMP_POS to 2 and click
OK.
al
The parameter change has forced a
rn
change in the assembly dimensions.
te
6. Click Parameters from the Model Intent group, edit the value of CLAMP_POS to 0, and
click OK.
In

The assembly does not change after this regeneration. Your relations do not specify
dimension values to use when the CLAMP_POS is edited to 0, thus the assembly has
C
not changed.
PT
Task 2: Edit dimensions and the parameter to be flexible.
1. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to

access the Model Properties dialog box. In
the Tools section, click change in the Flexible
r
row.
Fo
2. In the model tree, select CYL_CLAMP_PIN.

PRT.
3. In the graphics window, press CTRL and
select both dimensions.
4. Click OK in the Select dialog box.

5. Select the Parameters tab.
6. Select the CLAMP_POS parameter, and then click Insert Selected > Close.
7. Click OK in the Flexibility dialog box.
8. In the Tools section, click Expand in the Flexible row to verify that two flexible dimensions
and one flexible parameter have been defined.
9. Click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.
y
nl
O
Task 3: Insert the flexible clamp assembly into another assembly.
se
1. Click Open from the Quick access toolbar, select TOOL.ASM, and click Open.
U
2. Click Assemble from the Component group, select FLEX_PARAMS.ASM, and click Open.
3. Click Yes to confirm using the model’s predefined flexibility.
al
4. On the Dimensions tab of the Varied Items
dialog box, type 0 in the New Value field for
the stroke_dim.
rn
5. Click OK to close the Varied Items dialog box.
6. Place the sub-assembly by clicking the white
te
dot of the receiving interface in the lower-left

corner of the assembly.
In
8. Click Assemble , select FLEX_PARAMS.

ASM, and click Open.
C
9. Click Yes to confirm using the model's

predefined flexibility.
PT
10. Select the Parameters tab in the Varied

Items dialog box and type a new value of 1
for the CLAMP_POS parameter.
• Click OK.
r
11. Place the sub-assembly by clicking the white

Fo
dot of the receiving interface in the upper-left

corner of the assembly.

13. Place a third instance of FLEX_PARAMS.
ASM in the upper-right corner of the assembly;
this time use a flexible CLAMP_POS value
of 2.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 6
y
Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies
nl
O
Module Overview
se
The assembly structure of a design often changes throughout the design process. The Restructure
tool in Creo Parametric provides a tool for reorganizing the assembly structure of your design.
U
Mirror functionality in Creo Parametric enables you to create mirrored copies of parts and
assemblies. You can mirror geometry and placement of models as dependent or independent
copies of the original models.
al
In this module, you learn how to efficiently restructure and mirror assemblies using the Creo
Parametric tools and functions.
rn
Objectives
te
• Restructure and reorder components in an assembly.

• Mirror an assembly structure.
In
• Mirror a component inside of an assembly.

• Mirror a sub-assembly inside of an assembly.
C
r PT
Fo

Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components
The Restructure tool enables you to move components to different locations in an assembly
structure.
• Restructure:
– Drag and drop component(s).
– Places the components where you drop
them.
– There are some limitations.
y
• Move to New Subassembly:
nl
– Creates a new sub-assembly and moves
components into it in one step.
O
– Sub-assembly is placed at the same level
as source components. Figure 1 – Restructured Assembly
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Restructuring Components Figure 3 – Reordering Components

te
Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components

You can move components to different locations in an assembly structure. This is called
In
restructuring. You can restructure and/or reorder multiple components by dragging and dropping
them in the model tree. You can reorganize components from one sub-assembly to another, and
from the top-level assembly to a sub-assembly, or vice versa. Prior to Creo Parametric, you used
C
the Restructure dialog box to reorganize components and this option is still available by clicking
Restructure from the Component drop-down menu in the ribbon.
PT
The drag-and-drop method of restructuring is easier and less restrictive than using the Restructure
dialog box. When restructuring components using drag-and-drop, the system also reorders the
components to where you drop them in the target sub-assembly. The Restructure dialog box simply
places the components at the bottom of the target assembly structure, requiring an additional
reorder step.
r
In some cases, displaying Features in the model tree makes it easier to select the
Fo
appropriate drop location.
New Sub-Assemblies
It is common for an assembly to be reorganized during a design process. Top-level components are
often restructured into numerous sub-assemblies.
You may create a new, empty sub-assembly and restructure a number of components into that new
sub-assembly or you may use Move to New Subassembly to accomplish this in a single
operation. After you select components to be restructured, you can right-click and select Move to
New Subassembly to create a new sub-assembly and automatically restructure the selected
components into that sub-assembly. The new sub-assembly is placed at the same level as the
selected source components.

Assembly References
The Restructure tool enables you to move components from a top-level assembly into a
sub-assembly, from one sub-assembly to another sub-assembly, and from a sub-assembly to a
higher level assembly. Restructuring a component often places the assembly references of the
moved component outside of the new assembly level.
It is a best practice to always keep assembly references within one level rather than permitting
them to travel through multiple levels of an assembly. For example, it is best to avoid assembling
a component contained in a sub-assembly to references in a higher or lower level assembly. In
addition, be sure to keep the reference inside of that sub-assembly. This practice enables you to
more easily restructure the reference and work with an assembly.
y
Edit the definition of restructured components so that you can verify their references are
nl
inside of the new sub-assembly and not external to it. If the component uses references
external to the current assembly level, the Remove External References dialog box appears
O
and enables you to remove any external references.
Restructuring Limitations
se
The Restructure tool contains several limitations. Some of the limitations are not related to the tool,
but rather to the logical function of assembly references.
U
• You cannot restructure components that are part of a pattern.
• If an assembly contains multiple copies of the same sub-assembly, restructuring components
from that sub-assembly reduces the total number of the restructured components located in
al
the assembly to only one. All other instances of the component are simply removed from the
assembly.
rn
• You cannot restructure a parent component to succeed any child components.
• If you restructure components with children into a sub-assembly, you cannot restructure the
same component out of the sub-assembly unless you first restructure those children into the
te
same sub-assembly.
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components
Component_Operations\Restructure_Reorder VALVE.ASM
Task 1: Restructure components into a sub-assembly.

2. In the model tree, expand COVER.ASM and
ARM.ASM.
y
3. Press CTRL and select both HANDLE.PRT
nl
and RING.PRT from the model tree.
4. Drag HANDLE.PRT and RING.PRT and drop
O
them just below ARM.PRT.
Task 2: Simultaneously restructure and reorder components out of a sub-assembly.
se
1. In the model tree, select the first
BOLT_HEX.PRT model, press CTRL,
U
and then select the remaining two
BOLT_HEX.PRT models.
2. Drag the three selected components and
drop them just before PLATE.PRT.
al
• Move the cursor to the left until VALVE.ASM
rn
highlights (instead of ARM.ASM) to ensure
the correct location is selected.
Task 3: Restructure components into a new sub-assembly.

te
1. In the model tree, select the PLATE.PRT

In
model, press CTRL, and then select both

SCREW.PRT models.
2. Right-click and select Move to New
C
Subassembly .
3. In the Create Component dialog box, type
PT
plate in the Name field and click OK.

4. Click Browse in the Creation Options dialog
box.
5. In the Choose template dialog box,
r
double-click MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM.
Fo
6. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.

7. Right-click and select Default Constraint.
8. In the dashboard, click Complete
Component .
9. In the model tree, expand PLATE.ASM.

Task 4: Remove external references from the new sub-assembly.
1. Open PLATE.ASM from the model tree.

2. Edit the definition of PLATE.PRT.
The Remove External References dialog box opens because PLATE.PRT was originally
assembled to the VALVE.ASM and still has references to it.
3. Click OK from the Remove External References dialog box. Creo Parametric automatically
removes any external reference and enables you to create new assembly constraints within
y
PLATE.ASM.
nl
4. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab, select Set15 (User Defined), and then right-click
and select Delete.
5. Right-click in the graphics window and select Default Constraint.
O
se
7. Click Close .
8. Edit the definition of PLATE.ASM.
9. In the dashboard, select the Placement
U
tab, select Set30 (User Defined), and then
right-click and select Delete.
10. Select the center of the 3D Dragger and
al
drag the sub-assembly out of the top-level
assembly.
rn
11. Click Coincident to add coincident
constraints referencing the front face and two
holes of SHAFT.PRT.
te
• Note that the second hole’s coincident

constraint automatically changes to
In
Oriented.
Task 5: Reorder components within an assembly.

C
1. Collapse all nodes in the model tree.

PT
2. Reorder the plate assembly by dragging it

before the cover assembly.
r
Fo

Creating Mirrored Assemblies
You can create a mirrored copy of an assembly directly within Creo Parametric.
• Options:
– Dependency control
– Symmetry analysis
• Component actions:
– Mirror Geometry
– Reuse
y
– Exclude
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Mirroring Assembly Components
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Original Assembly Figure 3 – Mirrored Assembly
Creating Mirrored Assemblies

te
You can create a mirrored copy of an assembly directly within Creo Parametric. To begin, click File
In
> Save As > Save a Mirror Assembly to open the Mirror Assembly dialog box.
In the Mirror Assembly dialog box, complete the following:
• Determine if mirrored assembly geometry should be dependent or independent from the source
C
assembly. If you mirror geometry independently without selecting the Geometry dependent check
box, it does not update when the source model changes.
PT
• Type a name for the new mirrored assembly file.

• Preview the mirrored assembly.
r
Fo
Figure 4 – Mirror Assembly Dialog Box

Performing a Symmetry Analysis
In the Mirror Assembly dialog box, if you select the Perform symmetry analysis check box, the
system performs an analysis on the geometry of all components in the assembly to check for
potential reuse of symmetric components. By default, the system automatically reuses components
deemed to be symmetric. If you expand the Options area, you can clear the Reuse symmetric
components check box to disable that behavior. Additionally, you can specify whether the system
should consider Quilts, Datums, and Curves in its symmetry analysis, too.
Symmetry analysis cannot be performed on the following model types:
• Skeletons
y
• Non-geometric simplified reps.
nl
• Assemblies with excluded or non-geometric simplified rep components.
Advanced Mirrored Assembly Actions
O
After defining the mirrored assembly name, geometry dependency, and whether or not you want a
symmetry analysis, you can click Advanced from within the Mirror Assembly dialog box. This
se
launches the Mirror Assembly Components dialog box, and enables you to assign mirror actions
for each component of the assembly. You can manually define the following actions for each
component:
U
• Mirror Geometry – The default option for every component in the original assembly is Mirror
Geometry. A mirrored copy of the assembly and every component in the source assembly
is created.
al
You can assign new names to components mirrored with geometry or you can accept the default
“_MIR” suffix added to each file name. You can also specify a prefix as well as a naming
convention template.
rn
• Reuse – This option reuses the selected component and only mirrors its placement. New models
are not created for these components. This is useful for symmetrical models that you can use in
te
both the original and mirrored location.

• Exclude – Use this option to exclude any component from the mirrored assembly.
In
If the system performs a symmetry analysis, it automatically sets the Reuse action for any
component deemed to be symmetric, although you can manually change this action if desired.
Dependency Questions
C
What happens to the mirrored assembly if the original source assembly is deleted?
PT
• You can open and reference the mirrored assembly; however, all mirrored geometry is frozen.
You can add features but you cannot edit the Mirrored Merge feature.
What happens to a component of a mirrored assembly if the original source component is deleted?
r
• You can open and reference the mirrored component; however, all mirrored geometry is frozen as
if the model was created without dependency.
Fo
Best Practices
Only use Mirror Assembly when creating assemblies that are truly mirrors of the original model. The
functionality is not intended for creating mirrored assemblies that you later turn into independent
assemblies with little resemblance to the original.

PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Assemblies
Component_Operations\Mirror_Assembly MIRROR_ASSY.ASM
Task 1: Create a mirrored copy of MIRROR_ASSY.ASM.

y
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK.
nl
4. Click File > Save As > Save a Mirror Assembly.
5. In the Mirror Assembly dialog box, type mirror_assy_mir in the Name field.
O
6. Select the Perform symmetry analysis
check box.
7. Select the Preview check box and spin
se
the model to observe the preview of
MIRROR_ASSY_MIR.ASM.
U
al
rn
8. Click Advanced in the Mirror Assembly dialog box.
9. Notice that the symmetry analysis runs.
te
10. In the Mirror Assembly Components dialog box, select the Preview check box to preview
the mirrored assembly, as it is configured:
In
• Notice that STOPPER_COVER.PRT, STOPPER.ASM, and STOPPER_BASE.PRT receive

the Mirror Geometry action.
• Accept the default new name suffix “_MIR” for the mirrored copies.
C
• The STOPPER_PLUG.PRT and STOPPER_SCREW.PRT components have been found

to be symmetric from the analysis and therefore have been assigned the Reuse action.
r PT
Fo

11. Select Exclude from the Action drop-down list for STOPPER_SCREW.PRT.
12. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new assembly.
y
nl
O
Task 2: Observe the new mirrored assembly and make edits to the original.
se
1. In the model tree, expand the node of each
component. Notice the following:
• Each component mirrored with geometry
U
contains a Mirrored Merge feature.
• The stopper plug does not contain a
al
Mirrored Merge feature because it was
reused.
• The screw components are removed
rn
because they were excluded.
te
In
2. Click Windows from the Quick Access

toolbar and select MIRROR_ASSY.ASM.
3. Expand STOPPER_COVER.PRT and edit
C
Extrude 1.
4. Edit the 50 dimension to 70 and the 30
PT
dimension to 50.
r

Fo
MIRROR_ASSY_MIR.ASM.
7. Click Regenerate .
You can edit the definition of the Mirrored Merge feature to change dependency between
the original and mirrored geometry.

Creating Mirrored Components
You can create a mirrored part from inside of an assembly.
• Select the part to mirror.
• Select the planar reference.
• Mirror options:
– Geometry only
– Geometry with features
• Dependency control:
y
– Geometry dependent
Figure 1 – Assembly
nl
– Placement dependent
• Symmetry Analysis
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Assembly with Mirrored Part
Creating Mirrored Components

al
You can create a mirrored copy of a part from within an assembly by clicking Mirror Component
from the Component group in the ribbon. This opens the Mirror Component dialog box, in
rn
which you can complete the following:
• Select the part to mirror as the Component.
te
• Select the Mirror plane.

• Type a name for the new mirrored part.
In
Mirror Part Options

When creating a mirrored copy of a part, the Mirror Component dialog box enables you to define the
mirrored copy.
C
The following mirror options are available:

PT
• Geometry only – Creates a mirrored merge of only geometry from the selected part.
• Geometry with features – Creates a mirrored copy that includes feature structure. You include all
features of the original part in this mirrored copy.
Having feature structure in the mirrored part enables you to edit the structure, independent
r
of the original model.

Fo
The following dependency controls are available:

• Geometry dependent – This option defines the mirrored geometry as dependent or independent
of the original model.
• Placement dependent – Sets placement of the mirrored part dependent or independent of the
original model's placement.

In the Mirror Component dialog box, if you select the Perform symmetry analysis check box, the
system performs an analysis on the geometry of the component being mirrored for potential reuse.
By default, the system automatically reuses the component if it is deemed to be symmetric. If you
expand the Options area, you can clear the Reuse symmetric components check box to disable that
behavior. Additionally, you can specify whether the system should consider Quilts, Datums, and
Curves in its symmetry analysis, too.

What happens to the mirrored part if the original source part is deleted?
• You can open and reference the mirrored part; however, all mirrored geometry is frozen. You can
add features but you cannot edit the mirrored feature.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Components
Component_Operations\Mirror_Component
MIRROR_COMP.ASM
Task 1: Create a mirrored copy of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
y
nl
O
4. Click Mirror Component from the
Component group.
se
5. Select BASE_RIGHT.PRT as the Component
reference.
6. In the Mirror Component dialog box, edit the
U
Name field as base_left-1.
• Select datum plane ASM_RIGHT as the
Mirror plane reference.
al
• Select Geometry only as the Mirror type.
• Select the Geometry dependent check
rn
box, if necessary.
• Clear the Placement dependent check
te
box, if necessary.
• Select the Perform symmetry analysis
check box.
In
• Select the Preview check box.

• Click OK.
C
7. In the model tree, expand the BASE_LEFT-1.PRT node.

PT
Because Geometry only was used, the part's feature structure is a single Mirrored
Merge feature.
Task 2: Edit the geometry of BASE_RIGHT.PRT and observe the results.

r
1. Expand component BASE_RIGHT.PRT and

Fo
edit the radius dimension in Round 2 from 1

to .25.
Because Geometry dependent was used,
the corresponding round geometry in
BASE_LEFT-1.PRT also updates.

Task 3: Edit the placement of BASE_RIGHT.PRT and observe the results.
1. Edit BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
2. Edit the assembly offset dimension value
from 0 to 5.
Because Placement dependent
was not used, the placement of
BASE_LEFT-1.PRT is independent
y
of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
nl
4. Suppress BASE_LEFT-1.PRT.
O
Task 4: Create another mirrored copy of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
1. Click Mirror Component .
se
2. Select BASE_RIGHT.PRT as the Component
Reference.
3. In the Mirror Component dialog box, edit the
U
Name field as base_left-2.
• Select ASM_RIGHT as the Mirror plane
reference.
al
• Select Geometry with features.
rn
• Select the Placement dependent check
box.
te
check box.
• Click OK.
In
Task 5: Edit the geometry and placement of both models. Observe the results.
C

BASE_LEFT-2.PRT node.
PT
2. Select Chamfer 3, right-click, select Delete

, and click OK.
3. Notice that Chamfer 3 remains in
BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
r
Fo

4. In BASE_RIGHT.PRT, edit the radius
dimension in Round 2 from .25 to 1.
y
nl
6. Because Include all Feature data was used,
this mirrored part contains a full feature
O
structure, each independent of the original
source model.
se
U
7. Edit BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
al
8. Edit the assembly offset dimension value
rn
from 5 to 0.
te
Because Placement dependent was used, the placement of BASE_LEFT-2.PRT

In
changes with that of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.

C
r PT
Fo

Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies
You can create a mirrored sub-assembly from inside of an assembly.
• Select the sub-assembly to mirror.

• Select the planar reference.
• Options:
– Dependency control:
♦ Geometry dependent
y
♦ Placement dependent
nl
– Symmetry analysis
• Component actions:
– Mirror Geometry
O
– Reuse Figure 1 – Assembly
– Exclude
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Mirroring Sub-Assembly Components
te
Figure 3 – With Mirrored Sub-Assembly
Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies

In
You can create a mirrored copy of a sub-assembly from within an assembly by clicking Mirror
Component from the Component group in the ribbon. This opens the Mirror Component dialog
C
box, in which you:

• Select the sub-assembly to mirror as the Component.
PT
• Select the Mirror plane.

• Type a name for the new mirrored sub-assembly.
Instead of defining a name while using the Create a new model option, you could instead reuse the
original model and elect the symmetry analysis:
r
Fo
• Select the Reuse selected model option for New Component.

• Select Perform symmetry analysis for Symmetry Analysis options.
Dependency Control Options

When creating a mirrored copy of a sub-assembly from within an assembly, you create all mirrored
components as geometry-only models.
You can configure Dependency Control as follows:
• Geometry dependent – Defines the mirrored geometry of each component as dependent or
independent of the original models.
• Placement dependent – Sets placement of the mirrored components dependent or independent
of the original model's placement.

In the Mirror Component dialog box, if you select the Perform symmetry analysis check box, the
system performs an analysis on the geometry of all components in the sub-assembly to check for
potential reuse of symmetric components. By default, the system automatically reuses components
deemed to be symmetric. If you expand the Options area, you can clear the Reuse symmetric
components check box to disable that behavior. Additionally, you can specify whether the system
should consider Quilts, Datums, and Curves in its symmetry analysis, too.
Symmetry analysis cannot be performed on the following model types:
• Skeletons
y
• Non-geometric simplified reps.
nl
• Assemblies with excluded or non-geometric simplified rep components.
Advanced Mirrored Sub-Assembly Actions
O
After defining the mirrored sub-assembly name, geometry dependency, and whether or not you
want a symmetry analysis, you can click Advanced from within the Mirror Component dialog box.
se
This launches the Mirror Subassembly Components dialog box, and enables you to assign mirror
actions for each component of the sub-assembly. You can manually define the following actions
for each component:
U
• Mirror Geometry – The default option for every component in the original assembly is Mirror
Geometry. A mirrored copy of the assembly and every component in the source assembly
is created.
al
You can assign new names to components mirrored with geometry or you can accept the default
“_MIR” suffix added to each file name. You can also specify a prefix as well as a naming
convention template.
rn
• Reuse – This option reuses the selected component and only mirrors its placement. New models
are not created for these components. This is useful for symmetrical models that you can use in
te
both the original and mirrored location.

• Exclude – Use this option to exclude any component from the mirrored sub-assembly.
In
If the system performs a symmetry analysis, it automatically sets the Reuse action for any
component deemed to be symmetric, although you can manually change this action if desired.
C
What happens to the mirrored sub-assembly if the original source sub-assembly is deleted?
PT
• You can open or reference the mirrored assembly. All mirrored geometry is frozen and cannot
be edited. Component placement is also frozen; however, you can edit the placement definition
for each component.
r
Best Practices
Fo
Only mirror a new sub-assembly when you create sub-assemblies that are true mirrors of the
original sub-assembly. The functionality is not intended for creating mirrored sub-assemblies that
you later turn into independent sub-assemblies with little resemblance to the original.

PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies
Component_Operations\Mirror_Subassembly
MIRROR_SUB.ASM
Task 1: Create a mirrored copy of STOPPER_BACK.ASM.
y
nl
O
4. Click Mirror Component from the
Component group.
se
5. In the Mirror Component dialog box, complete
U
the following:
• Select STOPPER_BACK.ASM as the
Component Reference.
al
• Edit the Name field to stopper_front.
• Select ASM_TOP as the Mirror Plane
rn
reference from the model tree.
• Select both the Geometry dependent and
Placement dependent check boxes.
te

check box.
In

C
rPT
Fo

6. Click Advanced.
7. Notice that the symmetry analysis runs.
8. In the Mirror Subassembly Components dialog box, select the Preview check box to
preview the mirrored assembly:
• Notice that the STOPPER_BASE.PRT receives the Mirror Geometry action.
• Accept the default new name suffix “_MIR” for the mirrored copy.
• The STOPPER_PLUG.PRT and STOPPER_SCREW.PRT components have been found
to be symmetric from the analysis, and therefore have been assigned the Reuse action.
y
• Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new assembly.
nl
O
se
U
al
STOPPER_FRONT.ASM and
STOPPER_BASE_MIR.PRT nodes.
rn
Notice the two Mirrored Merge features.
te
Task 2: Edit the geometry of STOPPER_BASE.PRT and observe the results.
1. In the model tree, expand STOPPER_BACK.

In
ASM.
2. Expand STOPPER_BASE.PRT and edit
Round 2.
C
3. Edit the radius dimension from 1 to .25.

r PT
Fo
Because Geometry dependent was used, the corresponding round geometry in

STOPPER_BASE_MIR.PRT also updates.

Task 3: Edit the placement of STOPPER_BACK.ASM and observe the results.
1. Edit STOPPER_BACK.ASM and edit the

assembly offset dimension value from 0 to 5.
y
nl
O
Because Placement dependent was used, the placement of STOPPER_FRONT.ASM
changes with that of STOPPER_BACK.ASM.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 7
y
Using Assembly Features and
nl
Shrinkwrap
O
se
Module Overview
U
In an assembly, you can create assembly datum features such as planes, axes, points, curves, and
coordinate systems. You can also create assembly features that remove material such as holes,
extrudes, and sweeps. In this module, you focus on creating assembly features to remove material
from components of the assembly.
al
Also, in this module you learn about creating and using shrinkwrap features and shrinkwrap models
rn
as a way to automatically create lightweight copies of complex parts and assemblies.
Objectives
te

• Design assembly features.
In
• Control assembly intersections.

• Create assembly cuts.
• Create assembly holes.
C
• Create shrinkwrap features.

• Create shrinkwrap models.
r PT
Fo

Understanding Assembly Features
You can use assembly features to remove material from parts in an assembly without
altering the standalone part.
• Features include holes, extrudes, and sweeps.
• Remove material only.
• Reasons for use:
– Design intent
– Interfering components
y
• Intersected components:
– Selected models
nl
– Default Display Level
O
se
U
al
Figure 1 – Assembly Level Cut Figure 2 – Assembly Level Hole
rn
Understanding Assembly Features

te
Creating features in an assembly is very similar to creating features in a part, except there are some
restrictions and some additional options. In an assembly, you can create assembly datum features
such as planes, axes, points, curves, and coordinate systems. You can also create assembly
In
features that remove material such as holes, extrudes, and sweeps. You cannot create an assembly
feature that adds material, only features that remove material.
There are two main reasons for using assembly features:
C
• Design Intent – If the product you have designed has material removed from it after the
components have been assembled, then you should do the same in Creo Parametric. One
PT
example of this assembly type is a weldment; parts are positioned, welded together, and then
holes or other material removal operations are performed on the assembly.
• Interfering Components – In some cases, the assembly of a component such as a force-fit clip or
self-tapping hole may remove material, but in Creo Parametric, there is an interference between
the components. You can use an assembly feature as a tool to eliminate that interference.
r
Depending on your situation, Creo Parametric’s flexible component functionality may be a

Fo
better option for handling interfering components.
Intersected Components
By default, assembly features remove material from every component intersected by the feature
and are displayed only in the assembly level of the model. The components intersected by the
feature can be manually controlled using Advanced Intersection options within the Intersection tab.
The display level of the feature can be assigned to the Part Level, Top Level, or to a selected
part or assembly.
Performance
Be aware that any assembly feature that has its default edited to the Top Level display level can
cause performance issues when working with large assemblies. In order for Creo Parametric to

have a feature with only the top-level assembly displayed, a duplicate instance is created of every
intersected part and one of the assembly features is disabled.
Because of this, there are two instances of every intersected part in memory, increasing the memory
used by the assembly.
If the display level is edited to Part Level, twin instances are not created and performance is not
affected.
Best Practices
Only use assembly features when they are demanded by the real world assembly process.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Understanding Assembly Feature Intersections
You can control which components an assembly feature intersects and the level at which
the feature is displayed.
• Automatic Update enabled:
– System determines intersected models.
– Feature automatically displayed at the Top
Level.
• Automatic Update disabled:
y
– Specify intersected models.
– Set Display Level.
nl
• Advanced Intersection options available.
O
se
Figure 1 – Intersection Tab
U
Understanding Assembly Feature Intersections
When you create a hole or cut in an assembly, you are able to select the parts from which to
al
remove material as well as the level at which the material removal is displayed. The feature can be
displayed in the top-level assembly, sub-assembly, or part level.
rn
Assembly Feature Intersection Configuration
When you create an assembly level cut or hole, the feature is displayed in all intersected components
te
at the assembly level in which the feature was created. You can further configure the intersected
components and display levels using the Intersection tab or the Intersected Components dialog
box. The Intersection tab can be opened from the feature dashboard. You can open the Intersected
In
Components dialog box by right-clicking the assembly feature and selecting Edit Intersection .
Automatic Update
C
When you create an assembly feature such as a cut or hole, the Automatic Update check box is
selected by default. Automatic Update ensures the following:
PT
• All components added to the assembly before the assembly feature are automatically added to
the list of intersected components.
• The display level of the assembly feature is set to Top Level for all intersected components
and cannot be edited to Part Level.
r
• Components cannot be manually removed from the list of intersected components.

Fo
You can right-click any component in the Intersected Models list and select Information to obtain
information about the assembly feature.
When Automatic Update is disabled, you can right-click a component and select Remove to manually
remove the component from the list of models intersected by the feature. You can right-click and
select Intersection Components Collector to manually add a model to the list of intersected models.
Components assembled after the intersecting feature is created are not intersected unless
they are also reordered before the feature.
Advanced Intersection
When Automatic Update is disabled, you can toggle Advanced Intersection to switch between
basic and advanced intersection modes. In the Intersected Models area, each intersected model
displays along with its defined display level.

When Advanced Intersection is disabled, the only options available in the shortcut menu when you
right-click a component in the list are Remove and Information.
After you enable Advanced Intersection, the following additional options are available in the shortcut
menu when you right-click a component:
• Add Instance – Adds a family table instance of the selected component in the Intersected Models
list to the family table instances list. This option is only available when the display level of the
selected component is set to Top Level.
• Part Level – Makes the new feature visible wherever this version of the part is used, even outside
of the current assembly.
y
In addition, you can define the display level by selecting the top-level assembly or a component's
file name from the drop-down list. Activate the drop-down list by selecting a component in the
nl
Intersected Models list and selecting a file name from the drop-down list in the display column.
You can edit Advanced Intersection mode back to Basic mode only when all intersected
O
components have the same display level and no family table instances are intersected
by the feature.
se
Settings
The settings area enables you to define default settings for the intersected components. Settings
U
include the following:
• Default Display Level – Use this drop-down list to set the display level to be applied to components
as they are added to the Intersected Models list. Available options are Part Level, Top Level, and
al
Sel Level. If you select the Sel Level option, you are prompted to select the file name of the
component where you want the feature displayed.
rn
• Add Instances – Adds a family table instance when inserting an assembly feature in the model.
• Check Geometry Option – Enables you to create a more stable feature when problem geometry
is involved. This option is useful when assembly components have differing levels of accuracy
te
when being combined. When the Check Geometry Option check box is selected, it applies to
the entire feature and not to individual intersected components.
In
• Show Feature Properties In Sub-Models – Sets the default display of the assembly feature as a
property of the individual components in the model tree. This option is only available when
the Default Display Level is set to Part Level.
C
r PT
Fo

Creating an Assembly Cut
You can use assembly cuts to remove material from one or more components at the
assembly level.
• Create the sketch.

• Define the direction.
• Define the intersected models.
• Set the display level.
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Three Part Assembly Before Cut
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Three Part Assembly After Cut Figure 3 – Removing an Intersected Component
rn
Creating an Assembly Cut
You cannot use assembly features to add material to an assembly; however, you can use features
te
such as extrudes and sweeps to remove material from components of an assembly at the assembly
level.
In
You can use assembly cuts to remove material from components at the assembly level. Common
conditions for material removal at the assembly level are as follows:
• Material removed due to assembly procedures such as press or force fit of components.
C
• Tooling assemblies in which components are assembled and machining operations are used to
remove material from the assembled components.
PT
• To maintain tolerances in weldment assemblies, material is often removed after the components
have been welded together.
Sketch, Depth, and Direction

r
Like similar part cuts, an assembly cut has a sketch that defines its shape. It also has a defined
Fo
depth and direction. A sweep feature has trajectories that define its depth and direction.
Intersected Models
By default, assembly cuts remove material from every component in an assembly that is intersected
by the feature. You can add or remove components from the Intersected Models list in the
Intersection tab or Intersected Components dialog box.
Display Level
In the Intersected Models list, you can also configure the display level of each intersected part. By
default, the display level is set to Top Level. The display level can be set to Part Level, Top Level, or
to a specific part or assembly.

PROCEDURE - Creating an Assembly Cut
Assembly_Features\Cut HATCH.ASM
Task 1: Use a revolved feature to remove material from the assembly.

types: .
y
nl
O
4. Click Revolve from the Cut & Surface
group.
se
5. In the model tree, select ASM_FRONT as the
sketch plane.
6. Click Sketch View from the Setup group.
U
7. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.
al
8. Sketch a Geometry Centerline and a section, as shown in the figure.
rn
te
In
9. After completing the sketch, click OK .

C
10. Select Shading from the Display Style

PT
11. Click Complete Feature from the Revolve

dashboard.
r
Fo
Task 2: Verify the display level of the assembly feature.
1. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard

Orientation.
In the assembly, the revolve
feature was applied to the three
HATCH-RING.PRT models.

2. Open one of the HATCH-RING.PRT models
from the model tree.
As expected, the revolve feature is
not displayed at the part level.
3. Click Close from the Quick Access

toolbar.
Task 3: Remove a component from the Intersected Components list.
y
1. Disable Axis Display .
nl
2. In the model tree, right-click Revolve 1 and
select Edit Intersection .
O
3. In the Intersected Components dialog box,
do the following:
se
• Clear the Automatic update check box.
• Select the last HATCH-RING model in the
list and click Remove.
U
• Click OK.
Notice that the assembly cut does not
cut the component removed from the
al
Intersected Components dialog box.
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Exercise 1: Creating an Assembly Extruded Cut
Objectives
• Remove material with an assembly cut.
• Define intersected components of an assembly cut.
• Edit the display level of an assembly cut.
Scenario
y
Upon installation, the clip removes material from the plastic outer housing. Use an assembly cut
nl
to duplicate this condition in Creo Parametric.
O
Assembly_Features\Extrude ASSY_EXTRUDE.ASM
Task 1: Use an assembly cut to remove interference in an assembly.
se
U
al
rn
Notice the interference between
CLIP.PRT and OUTER.PRT.
te
5. Deactivate section A.
In
6. Click Extrude from the Cut & Surface

group.
7. Orient to the CLIP view orientation.
C
8. Select the surface as the sketching plane.

r PT
Fo
9. Orient to the TANG view orientation.

10. Click Project from the Sketching group.
11. Select Loop as the Type.
12. Query-select the surface shown.
13. Click Close.
14. Click OK .

15. Orient to the EXTRUDE view orientation.
16. In the Extrude dashboard, edit the depth to
To Selected and select the surface, as
shown, as the depth reference.
17. Click Complete Feature .
y
nl
Task 2: Verify that the interference has been removed and edit as required.
O
1. Orient to the Default Orientation view.
se
The interference between CLIP.PRT
and OUTER.PRT has been
removed; however, material from
U
CLIP.PRT has also been removed.
The design intent was to remove
material from OUTER.PRT only.
al
rn
te
In
3. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and

select Edit Intersection .
4. In the Intersected Components dialog box,
C
clear the Automatic update check box.

5. Right-click CLIP.PRT from the Model Name
PT
column and select Remove.

6. Click OK.
Material is removed only from
r
OUTER.PRT and the interference

has been eliminated.
Fo

Task 3: Edit the assembly cut so that it appears at the part level of OUTER.PRT.
1. Open OUTER.PRT from the model tree.

• Notice that the assembly cut does not
appear at the part level of the model.
2. Click Close to return to the assembly.
y
nl
3. Edit the definition of Extrude 1.
O
4. In the dashboard, select the Intersection tab.
5. Select the Advanced Intersection check
se
box.
6. Right-click OUTER.PRT from the Intersected
Models list and select Part Level.
U
8. Open OUTER.PRT from the model tree.
al
• Notice that the assembly cut now appears
at the part level.
rn
9. Click Close .

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Assembly Holes
You can use assembly holes when holes intersect components at the assembly level.
• Assembly holes only remove material.

• Material removed from every component by default.
• Add or remove components from the Intersected Models list.
• Configure the display.
– Default is Top Level.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Before Assembly Hole Figure 2 – After Assembly Hole
U
Creating Assembly Holes al
You can use assembly holes to add holes at the assembly level that intersect one or more
components of the assembly. Typically, you use assembly holes during the assembly process
when you must maintain an assembly tolerance or to maintain the position of components prior to
rn
adding the hole.
Intersected Models
te
By default, assembly holes remove material from every component in an assembly that is
intersected by the feature. You can add or remove components from the Intersected Models list in
In
the Intersection tab or in the Intersected Components dialog box.
Display Level
C
In the Intersected Models list, you can also configure the display level of each intersected part. By
default, the display level is set to Top Level. The display level can be set to Part Level, Top Level, or
PT
to a specific part or assembly.

r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly Holes
Assembly_Features\Hole ASSY_HOLE.ASM
Task 1: Begin creating an assembly hole.

types: .
y
nl
Suppressed objects check box and click
O
OK.
4. Click View Manager from the In Graphics
toolbar and select the All tab.
se
5. Double-click the Comb0001 state to activate
the combination view.
U
The self-tapping screw enters
through a hole in the outer part, then
taps into the inner part. This causes
al
an interference condition in the Creo
Parametric assembly.
rn
6. Double-click the Default All state and click
Close from the View Manager.
te
7. Suppress SCREW_SELF-TAP.PRT.
8. Click OK to confirm.
In
C
9. Click Hole from the Cut & Surface group.

10. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and
PT
the front surface.

11. Edit the depth to Through All .
12. Edit the diameter to 9.
r
If the feature was completed as is,

Fo
the hole would intersect both the

inner and outer parts. However, this
would not match our design intent.

Task 2: Determine which model the assembly hole will intersect.
1. Select the Intersection tab from the

dashboard.
2. Clear the Automatic Update check box.
3. Right-click OUTER.PRT from the Intersected
Models list and select Remove.
y
Because the screw is suppressed,
it is automatically removed from the
nl
Intersected Models list. You can
return a part to the list using the Add
Intersected Models button.
O
5. In the model tree, select SCREW_SELF-
TAP.PRT and click Resume from the mini
se
toolbar.
6. Click View Manager and select the All
tab.
U
7. Double-click the Comb0001 state to activate
the combination view.
al
The assembly hole now intersects
the inner part.
rn
8. Open INNER.PRT from the model tree.
As expected, the hole does not
te
appear at the part level.

In
toolbar.
C

r PT
Fo

Exercise 2: Creating Assembly Features
Objectives
• Create an assembly hole.
• Copy and paste an assembly hole.
• Select intersecting components for an assembly feature.
y
Scenario
nl
To ensure a proper fit, you assemble a rack by drilling out pilot holes through interfacing components
during the assembly operation. After you complete the assembly, you machine material from the
top of the rack to ensure a level fit.
O
Assembly_Features\Features RACK.ASM
se
Task 1: Create holes referencing the existing pilot holes.
U
types: .
al
rn
4. Orient to the 3D-1 view orientation.
te
5. Click Hole from the Cut & Surface group.

6. Select datum axis DRILL_OPEN_END, as
In
shown in the figure.

7. Press CTRL and select the placement surface
C
8. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Through

All .
PT
9. Edit the diameter to 6.

r
Fo

In the Intersected Models list, notice
that both the RACK_POST1.PRT
and RACK_CAP.PRT models
intersected by this hole are listed.

12. In the Intersected Models list, right-click the
first instance of RACK_POST1.PRT and
y
select Remove.
nl
13. Right-click the first instance of
RACK_CAP.PRT and select Remove.
14. Click Complete Feature from the
O
dashboard.
In this assembly, you are attempting
se
to duplicate the assembly process
used to assemble this rack. You are
only intersecting the parts in this
corner of the assembly because that
U
is the process used in the machine
shop to assemble this rack. al
rn
• Verify that the pilot hole shown was not
affected by the hole.
te
In
C
Task 2: Use copy and paste to add another hole to the assembly.
PT
1. Enable Axis Display .

3. In the model tree, select Hole 1 if necessary.
4. Press CTRL+C to copy the feature.
r
Fo
5. Press CTRL+V to paste the feature.

6. Click OK in the Intersected Components dialog box.

7. Select datum axis DRILL_CLOSED_END, as
8. Press CTRL and select the placement surface
11. In the Intersected Models list, right-click the
first instance of RACK_CAP.PRT and select
y
Remove.
12. Right-click the first instance of
nl
RACK_SIDERAIL1.PRT and select
Remove.
O
Task 3: Remove material from the top of the rack using an extrude feature.
se
2. Click Extrude from the Cut & Surface
U
group.
3. Right-click in the graphics window and select
Define Internal Sketch.
al
4. Select the top surface of the post, as shown,
and edit the Orientation to Left.
rn
5. Click Sketch from the Sketch dialog box.
te
6. Click References from the Setup group.

7. Select four Sketcher references by selecting
In
surfaces of the RACK_CAP.PRT models, as

shown.
8. Click Close from the References dialog box.
C
PT
9. Select Corner Rectangle from the

Rectangle types drop-down menu in the
r
Sketching group.
Fo
10. Sketch a rectangle using the references.

11. Click OK .

13. Select the Through All depth option.
14. Click Change Depth Direction from the
dashboard.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating a Shrinkwrap Feature
The shrinkwrap feature automatically selects and copies surface data from a part or
assembly into a feature.
• Uses:
– Lightweight version for a packaging model.
– Share geometry with vendors while
eliminating propriety detail.
– Lightweight simplified rep that only
y
includes the shrinkwrap feature.
• Select components to be ignored/considered.
nl
• Various surface subset collection methods. Figure 1 – Detailed Assembly Model
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Auto Collect All Solid Surfaces
al Figure 3 – Viewing the Shrinkwrap Feature's Surfaces
Creating a Shrinkwrap Feature

Shrinkwrap features contain a collection of associatively copied surfaces and datums that represent
rn
the exterior shape of a referenced part or assembly.
Based on a specified collection method, the shrinkwrap feature automatically collects surfaces from
te
the source assembly and copies them associatively into the shrinkwrap feature. Because the
surfaces are copied associatively, the shrinkwrap feature updates when edits are made to the
assembly.
In
Using the References and Options tab, you can refine the automatic collection of surfaces to be
included in the shrinkwrap feature.
Uses of a Shrinkwrap Feature

C
There are three main uses for a shrinkwrap feature, which are as follows:
PT
• To create a lightweight version of a complex part or assembly that you can use as a reference or
packaging model. You can also turn a model containing a shrinkwrap feature into an envelope
model and substitute it in a simplified rep.
• To create an associative model that you can use to share geometry with vendors or customers
r
while eliminating any proprietary detail you do not want to share.

Fo
• To create a lightweight simplified rep by creating a shrinkwrap feature in an assembly and then
excluding everything in the assembly except the shrinkwrap feature.
Subset
You can click Subset in the Shrinkwrap dashboard to open the Shrinkwrap Comps dialog box. In
this dialog box, you can select components to be considered or ignored during the shrinkwrap
creation process.
Surface Subset Collection Methods

In the Shrinkwrap dashboard, you can select from three surface subset collection methods to be
used in creation of the shrinkwrap feature. The three methods are as follows:
• Outer Shell – Collect surfaces that represent the outer shell of the assembly.

• Autocollect all solid surfaces – Collect all solid surfaces in the assembly. The results of this
surface collection method can be converted to a solid shrinkwrap feature.
• Manual collection – You can manually select any surfaces you want included in the shrinkwrap
feature.
References
In the Shrinkwrap dashboard, you can access the References tab to specify geometry to always be
included or excluded from the shrinkwrap feature. You can select from the following:
• Always include surfaces – Select any geometry in the source model that should always be
y
included in the shrinkwrap feature.
• Never include surfaces – Select any geometry in the source model that should never be included
nl
in the shrinkwrap feature.
• Chain – Select curves and surface geometry adjacent to selected solid edges.
O
• Include Datums – Select any datum features that should be included in the shrinkwrap feature.
Options
se
In the Shrinkwrap dashboard, you can access the Options tab where you can control the automatic
selection of geometry in the source model. The following options are only available when using
the Outer Shell collection method:
U
• Subset Options – Subset options configure one of two creation options:
– Shrinkwrap then Exclude – Shrinkwrap the entire source model and then exclude geometry
al
from models that you have selected to never include.
– Exclude then Shrinkwrap – Exclude models that you have selected to never include and
rn
then shrinkwrap the model.
• Quality Level – You can edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap feature creation process to a
value between 1 and 10. High quality levels increase processing time, file size, and the level
te
of detail included in the shrinkwrap feature.

• Attributes – You can select attributes that control the automatic selection of shrinkwrap geometry.
Attributes include the following:
In
– Auto Hole Filling – Fill all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface.
– Include Quilts – Select quilts that should always be included in the shrinkwrap feature.
C
– Ignore Small Surfaces – Exclude surfaces that are smaller than a specified percentage of
the model's overall size.
PT
• Dependent – By default, the shrinkwrap feature is a dependent of the source components. If you
edit the size or position of the original component, the shrinkwrap feature updates accordingly.
When using the Autocollect all solid surfaces collection method, you can select the Solidify resulting
geometry check box to create solid geometry from the collected surfaces.
r
The Fill contours surfaces option enables you to explicitly select surface geometry where you want
Fo
any intersecting hole or cavity to be filled or excluded from the shrinkwrap feature. You can use this
option when using any of the three collection methods. A black curve is placed in the shrinkwrap
feature to represent contours that have been removed.
By default, all inner contours of a selected contour surface are filled. By clearing the check box
next to a selected contour surface, you can manually remove geometry from the fill operation. For
example, if you select a fill contour surface that includes five holes to fill, you can manually select
one or more of the holes to not be filled.
Reference Path
The Assembly Context dashboard icon defines the shrinkwrap feature in the context of the
assembly. The External icon enables you to create the feature without referencing the assembly.

PROCEDURE - Creating a Shrinkwrap Feature
Assembly_Features\Shrinkwrap_Feature SW_FEATURE.ASM
Task 1: Create a new part in the assembly.

y
nl
4. Click Create from the Component group
O
to create a new part in the assembly.
5. Select Part as the Type and Solid as the
Sub-type, if necessary, and click OK from the
se
Create Component dialog box.
6. Click Browse in the Creation Options dialog
box, double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT,
U
and click OK.
Default Constraint.
al
rn
Task 2: Add a shrinkwrap feature using the Outer Shell collection method.
1. Activate PRT0001.PRT.
te
2. Click Shrinkwrap from the Get Data group.

In
3. In the dashboard, click Subset.

4. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component
chooser, select the first instance of
BOLT_5–18.PRT, press SHIFT, right-click
C
CONNECTING_ROD.PRT, and select

Ignore.
PT
5. Click Open.
The selected components are ignored
during the creation of the shrinkwrap
feature.
r
Fo

6. In the dashboard, select the References tab.
• Notice that you can select geometry to
always include or never include. You
can also select curve chains and datum
features to include in the feature. Keep the
default settings.
7. In the dashboard, select the Options tab.
• Select Exclude then Shrinkwrap as the
Surface Copying Option.
y
• Edit the Level to 5 and click OK, if
necessary.
nl
• Select the Auto Hole Filling check box.
• Select the Ignore Small Surfaces check
O
box and edit the Threshold value to 2.
se
Task 3: Open PRT0001.PRT and observe the shrinkwrap feature.
1. Open PRT0001.PRT from the model tree.
U
2. From the In Graphics toolbar, select
Wireframe from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.
al
• Notice that the feature consists of surfaces
copied from geometry in the assembly.
rn
3. In the model tree, right-click the Shrinkwrap
id feature and select Delete .
te
• Click OK.
In

toolbar.
C
Task 4: Add a shrinkwrap feature using Auto collect all solid surfaces.
PT
1. Activate PRT0001.PRT.
2. Click Shrinkwrap .
3. In the dashboard, click Subset.
r
4. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, select the first instance of BOLT_5–18.PRT,
press SHIFT, right-click CONNECTING_ROD.PRT, and select Ignore.
Fo
5. Click Open.

6. In the dashboard, select Autocollect all
solid surfaces from the collection drop-down
list.
7. Click Yes in the Exclude Internal Components
window.
8. Select the Options tab and select the
Solidify resulting geometry check box.
y
nl
Task 5: Create a cross-section to verify that the shrinkwrap feature is solid.
O
se
3. Select Planar from the Section types
drop-down menu from the Model Display
group.
U
• Select datum plane RIGHT.
• Select the Properties tab and edit the
section Name to A.
al
• Click Complete Feature .
rn
4. Click Close .
Cross-section A shows the shrinkwrap
feature is solid.
te
Task 6: Edit the source models and update the shrinkwrap feature.
In
1. Activate CYLINDER.PRT.
2. Expand CYLINDER.PRT and edit the
BOSSES feature.
C
3. Edit the depth from 51 to 71.

PT

r
Fo

6. In the model tree, right-click the Shrinkwrap
id feature and click Update Shrinkwrap.
7. Click Yes in the Warning dialog box.
The length of the bosses in the
shrinkwrap feature have updated
according to the cylinder model change.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating a Shrinkwrap Model
Use the Shrinkwrap feature to automatically create a lightweight copy of a model.
• The model is non-associative.

• Uses:
– Lightweight version for a packaging model.
– Share geometry with vendors while
eliminating propriety detail.
y
• Creation Methods:
– Surface Subset.
nl
– Faceted Solid.
– Merged Solid. Figure 1 – Surface Subset
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Merged Solid
al Figure 3 – Faceted Solid
Creating a Shrinkwrap Model

rn
A shrinkwrap model is an automatically created, non-associative, simplified copy of a selected

part or assembly.
te
To create a shrinkwrap model, open the model you want to shrinkwrap and click File > Save As >
Save a Copy. In the Save a Copy dialog box, select the Shrinkwrap file type.
In
In the Create Shrinkwrap dialog box, you are then presented with various creation methods and
geometry definition options for creating the model.
C
Uses of a Shrinkwrap Model

PT
There are two main uses for a shrinkwrap model:

• To create a simplified model used to share geometry with vendors or customers while eliminating
any proprietary detail you do not want to share.
• To create a lightweight version of a complex part or assembly to be used as a reference or
r
packaging model.
Fo
Creation Methods
You can use the following three creation methods when creating a shrinkwrap model:
• Surface Subset – A collection of surfaces and datum features that represents the external
geometry of a referenced model. The surface subset is the fastest shrinkwrap method and results
in the smallest model size because it is comprised of only surface geometry.
• Faceted Solid – An approximate, faceted solid model that represents all external surfaces with
additional surfaces added to bridge gaps and complete the solid.
• Merged Solid – A very accurate solid representation of a source assembly. Components from the
source assembly are merged together into a single part that represents the solid geometry in
all collected components.

Quality Level
You can edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap model creation process to a value between 1
and 10. High quality levels increase processing time, file size, and the level of detail included in
the shrinkwrap model.
Special Handling
You can adjust the special handling options to control the automatic creation of the shrinkwrap
model geometry.
• Fill holes – If selected, this shrinkwrap attribute fills all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface.
y
• Ignore Skeletons – If selected, geometry from skeleton models are not included in the shrinkwrap
nl
model.
• Ignore quilts – If selected, surface quilts are not included in the shrinkwrap model.
O
• Ignore small surfaces – Only available using the Surface Subset method, this attribute enables
you to exclude surfaces smaller than a percentage of the model's overall size.
• Assign mass properties – Enables you to assign the full assembly's mass property values to the
se
simplified shrinkwrap model.
Miscellaneous Creation Options
U
• Include Datum References – Used to select datum features from the source that you want copied
into the shrinkwrap model.
• Preview options – For a Surface Subset shrinkwrap, you can edit the preview geometry color from
al
real colors to gray-orange colors. Gray identifies the included surfaces while orange identifies
the excluded surfaces.
rn
• Additional surfaces – For a Surface Subset shrinkwrap, you can select geometry to include
with automatically selected surfaces.
• Faceted solid options – For a Faceted Solid, select an Output Format of Part, LW part, STL,
te
or VRML.
• Additional components – For a Merged Solid, select additional models to include in the set of
In
automatically selected models being merged.
Creation Method Comparison Chart

C
Surface Subset Faceted Solid Merged Solid

Source Model Part or Assembly Part or Assembly Assembly Only
PT
Geometry Type Surface Only Tessellated Solid Accurate Solid

Quality Level Higher quality Higher quality Higher quality
increases the number increases the increases the number
r
of surfaces included in accuracy of the of components

the shrinkwrap. representation. included in the merge
Fo
operation.
Colors Source Colors Source Colors Not Source Colors
Retained Retained Retained
Ignore Small Yes No No
Surfaces

PROCEDURE - Creating a Shrinkwrap Model
Assembly_Features\Shrinkwrap_Model SW_MODEL.ASM
Task 1: Save a Surface Subset shrinkwrap model.

2. Click File > Save As > Save a Copy.
y
3. In the Save a Copy dialog box, select
Shrinkwrap from the Type drop-down list
nl
and click OK.
O
se
4. In the Create Shrinkwrap dialog box, do the
following:
U
• Clear the Fill holes check box.
• Select the Assign mass properties check
box.
al
• Select Gray and orange as the Preview
rn
option.
• Click Preview. Notice the excluded
surfaces highlighted in orange.
te
• Edit the Quality Level to 4 and click OK in

the Warning dialog box, if necessary.
In
• Click Preview.
Notice that because the Quality Level
increased, the second preview took
longer to create and fewer surfaces were
C
excluded.
PT
5. Click OK to create a shrinkwrap model named SW_MODEL_SW0001.PRT.

6. Press ENTER to accept the default relative accuracy value.
Task 2: Save a Faceted Solid model.

r
Fo

following:
• Select Faceted Solid as the Creation
method.
• Click Preview.
• Edit the Quality Level to 8.
• Click Preview.
Because the Quality Level increased, the
second preview took longer to create and
contained much more detail.

Task 3: Save a Merged Solid model.

following:
• Select Merged Solid as the Creation
method.
• Click Preview.
y
nl
O
Task 4: Compare the three shrinkwrap models.
se
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar. Select SW_COMPARE.ASM and click Open.
U
2. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.
The Surface Subset model is on the left, the Faceted Solid model is in the middle, and
the Merged Solid model is on the right.
al
rn
te
In
C

r PT
Fo

Summarizing Shrinkwrap Features and Models
The following is a summary of shrinkwrap features and shrinkwrap model functionality.
• General Description • Mass Properties

• Associativity • Functions
• Geometry type • Benefits
y
nl
O
se
Figure – 1 Surface Subset, Faceted Solid, and Merged Solid Shrinkwraps
Summarizing Shrinkwrap Features and Models
U
This reference table summarizes the functionality available in both shrinkwrap features and
shrinkwrap models.
al
Shrinkwrap Comparison Table
rn
Shrinkwrap Feature Shrinkwrap Model
General Automated tool for copying surface Automated method for creating a
Description data from a part or assembly into a simplified copy of a part or assembly
te
feature. using Save A Copy.

The feature can be created internal
In
or external to an assembly.
Associativity Feature can be dependent or No associativity to the source model.
independent of the source model. Shrinkwrap model does not update
C
if the source model changes.

Geometry Type Surface Subset Only Surface Subset, Faceted Solid, or
PT
Merged Solid
Mass Properties Cannot assign mass properties from Can assign mass properties from a
a source model. source model.
r
Function 1 Create a dependent lightweight Create an independent lightweight

Fo
representation of a complex part or representation of a complex part or

assembly. assembly.
Can be converted to an envelope Because it is not associated to the
and substituted in a simplified rep. source model, you should not use it
as an envelope.
Function 2 To share a simplified surface-only To share simplified surface,
model with a vendor or customer tessellated, or accurate solid models
while eliminating any proprietary with a vendor or customer while
details you do not want to share. eliminating any proprietary details
you do not want to share.
Typically, your vendors prefer to
have solid models rather than
surface-only models.

Function 3 Create a lightweight simplified rep Not Applicable
by creating a shrinkwrap feature in
the assembly and then excluding
everything but the shrinkwrap
feature from the Simplified Rep.
Benefits The ability to be dependent or The ability to create surface or solid
independent of the source model. geometry.
Greater control of geometry creation.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 8
y
Replacing Components in an Assembly
nl
O
Module Overview
se
Creo Parametric provides a variety of tools for replacing one component in an assembly with
another. Some tools automatically replace components based on preexisting relationships between
the components. Some tools require you to first create that relationship between the components,
U
before enabling you to replace unrelated components.
In this module, you learn how to replace components in an assembly using all of the tools available
in the Replace dialog box.
al
Objectives
rn
• Replace family table components in an assembly.
te
• Replace reference models in an assembly.

• Replace components using the By Copy option.
In
• Replace unrelated components in an assembly.

• Replace unrelated components using the Reference Pairing table.
• Replace components using an interchange assembly.
C
r PT
Fo

Understanding Component Replace
Creo Parametric provides many options for efficiently replacing one component with another
in an assembly.
• Right-click > Replace:

– Family Table
– Interchange
– Reference Model
– Notebook
y
– By Copy
nl
– Unrelated Component
• Transfers P/C Relationships. Figure 1 – Reference Pairing
O
• Reduces rework.
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Assembly With Original Component Figure 3 – Assembly With Replaced Component
rn
Understanding Component Replace
The Component Replace tool enables you to exchange one component with another. Tools within
te
the Replace dialog box provide multiple methods for replacing selected components and managing
references between them.
In
To open the Replace dialog box, select the component or components you want to replace, then
right-click and select Replace .
The Replace dialog box remains open, enabling you to select and replace multiple components.
C
When you are finished replacing components, click OK to close the dialog box.
PT
Replace and References

Typically, you assemble a component using references between its geometry and other components
in the assembly. If you replace a component in an assembly with a new component, you need
to specify the geometry that the new component should reference for placement. For example,
r
you replace a bolt that was assembled to a hole in a block with another bolt. You must specify in
Fo
Creo Parametric the exact geometry for the new bolt to use as the Coincident reference or Creo
Parametric does not properly position the bolt.
This same rule applies to the assembly that contains the components. If you replace the block with
a new block containing many holes, Creo Parametric does not automatically insert the bolt in
the correct hole.
In the Replace dialog box, you can select a variety of Replace By tools that enable you to replace
components of different types and requirements. Some of the tools automatically replace a
component and all references, while others enable you to identify and pair references between
the old and new component.
Replacing and substituting components are two different actions. Substitution exchanges
one component for another. You perform substitution in the context of a simplified
representation.

Benefits of using Replace By Tools
The Replace By tools enable you to exchange components in an assembly, while transferring the
original component's parent/child relationships to the new component. By transferring relationships
to the new component, you can significantly reduce the amount of rework that may be required in
future assemblies or drawings.
• Family Table – You can automatically replace any component that is part of a family table with
another instance of that family table.
• Interchange – You can automatically replace a member of a functional interchange assembly with
other members of the same interchange assembly. You can use interchange assemblies to
y
replace components in multiple assemblies.
• Module or Module Variant – When using Creo Parametric Options Modeler, you can replace a
nl
module or module variant with other modules or module variants.
• Notebook – You can automatically replace components that are declared to a notebook that
O
contains global datums that define assembly intent.
• By Copy – You can copy a current component and replace it with the new component, while
maintaining all original assembly relationships.
se
• Unrelated Component – You can exchange components that are not related to each other.
The component that you select determines the Replace By tools that appear in the Replace
dialog box. For example, the Family Table tool is not available if you are replacing a
U
component that is not a member of a family table.
Best Practices
al
When replacing components, avoid disrupting any future applications by using the method that best
rn
enables you to transfer references between the new and old model.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Replacing Components using Family Table
You can automatically replace components that are members of a family with other members
of the table.
• Replace By: Family Table

– Choose from family table members.
– Assembly preferences transferred.
y
nl
Figure 1 – Family Table Component List
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Original Instances
al Figure 3 – Replaced Instances
Replacing Components using Family Table

rn
You can automatically replace any component that is part of a family table with another instance of
that family table.
te
In the Replace dialog box, click Family Table, then click Open . In the Family Table dialog box,
select a component to replace the current instance.
In
Assembly References
When you automatically replace a component, the children of the original component may not be
C
able to reference the new component. For example, an instance of a family table may not have the
same number of holes as the original instance. In this situation, after replacing the instance, you
PT
need to edit the assembly definition to account for fewer holes.
Best Practices
Replacing components by family table is a fast and easy way to swap components in and out of an
r
assembly. This is a common method when working with standard hardware libraries that are often
Fo
created with family tables.

PROCEDURE - Replacing Components using Family Table
Component_Operations\Replace_Family-Table
CLAMP_RFT.ASM
Task 1: Replace BOLT_10-15_RFT.PRT with BOLT_10-36_RFT.PRT using Family Table.

2. In the model tree, select the first instance of
y
BOLT_10-15_RFT.PRT.
nl
3. Right-click and select Replace .
4. In the Replace dialog box, select Family
O
Table.
se
5. Click Open from the Replace dialog box.
U
6. Select BOLT_10-36_RFT and then click OK
from the Family Tree dialog box.
al
7. Click OK from the Replace dialog box.
rn
te
In

the three remaining BOLT_10-15_RFT.PRT
components.
C

10. In the Replace dialog box, select Family
PT
Table.
r
Fo

12. Select BOLT_10-36_RFT and then click OK
from the Family Tree dialog box.
13. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.

Replacing Components using Reference Model
You can replace components related by inheritance, merge, or shrinkwrap using the
Reference Model method.
• Replace By: Reference Model

– Inheritance Feature
– Merge Feature
– Shrinkwrap Feature
y
– Assembly references transferred
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Cast Model Figure 2 – Machined Model
Replacing Components using Reference Model

al
You can automatically replace any components related by inheritance, merge, or shrinkwrap
features using the Reference Model method.
rn
In the Replace dialog box, select Reference Model, then click Open . In the Open dialog box,
select a related reference model.
te
Assembly References
In
When you automatically replace a component, the children of the original component may not be
able to reference the new component. After the new component has been placed, you may need to
edit the assembly to account for new or missing assembly references.
C
Best Practices
PT
Replacing components by reference model is a fast and easy way to exchange components in and
out of an assembly. This is a common method when working with standard hardware libraries
created using the Inheritance feature. Also, you can use the Inheritance or Merge feature when
creating various machined versions of a cast model. You can then exchange any model referencing
the cast model in and out of the assembly.
r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Replacing Components using Reference Model
Component_Operations\Replace_Reference-Model
RM_MACH.PRT
Task 1: Replace the cast part with the machined part.
y
2. In the model tree, right-click the External
Merge feature and select Open Base Model
nl
.
O
se
The base model referenced by the External Merge feature is RM_CAST.PRT. Geometry
from the cast part is merged into the machined part where additional features have
U
been applied. Because these models reference each other, they can be replaced in an
assembly using the Reference Model option.
al
rn
4. Select VALVE_RM.ASM and click Open.
5. In the graphics window, select
RM_CAST.PRT.
te

In
7. In the Replace dialog box, ensure Reference

Model is selected.
C

9. Click RM_MACH.PRT and click Open.
PT

The cast model is replaced by the
machined model, yet all related
components remain assembled.
r
Fo

Replacing Components using By Copy
You can replace components by copying a selected component in an assembly.
• Replace By: By Copy

– Edit the new component name.
– Creates a new component based on a copy of the existing model.
– Assembly references transferred.
• Great for evaluating design changes.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Copy to be Replaced
U
Replacing Components using By Copy al
With this method of replacement, you can replace a component with a copy by creating a new
component based on a copy of the existing model.
rn
This method is similar to saving a copy in part mode. However, in this case, you are saving a
copy in the context of an assembly.
Select one or more components to replace. Right-click and select Replace . In the Replace
te
dialog box, select By Copy. Edit the name of the new component in the Name field in the New Copy
section of the dialog box. If you select multiple components, type a suffix to add to the current
In
name of each component.

This new copied model is unrelated to the original model. Changes made to the new
component do not affect the original.
C
Assembly References
PT
Because this component is an exact copy of the original model, all models referencing the original
model now reference the new component.
Best Practices
r
This is a great tool for evaluating design changes to selected components in an assembly.
Fo

PROCEDURE - Replacing Components using By Copy
Component_Operations\Replace_Copy CLAMP_BYCOPY.ASM
Task 1: Replace the clamp base using the By Copy method.

y
nl
4. In the model tree, select CLAMP_BASE_
O
BYCOPY.PRT, right-click and select Replace
.
se
5. In the Replace dialog box, select By Copy.
6. Edit the Name to clamp_base_2.
7. Click OK to complete the replacement.
U
Task 2: Edit the new CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT.al
1. Activate CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT.
rn
CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT node.
3. Edit Sketch 1.
4. Edit the 80 dimension to 120 and the 40
te
dimension to 100.
In

6. Activate CLAMP_BYCOPY.ASM.
C
r PT
7. Click Open , select CLAMP_BASE_

Fo
BYCOPY.PRT, and click Open.

The size of CLAMP_BASE_BYCOPY.
PRT has not changed. Only the new
CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT has increased in
size.

Replacing Unrelated Components
You can replace any component with another using the Unrelated Component tool.
• Replace By: Unrelated

– You must transfer assembly references:
♦ Reference Pairing
♦ Manually
♦ Reference Evaluation
y
♦ Reassemble Figure 1 – Reference Pairing Table
nl
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Assembled Component to Replace Figure 3 – Unrelated Component
al
Replacing Unrelated Components
rn
You can replace unrelated components by using the Unrelated Component method.
In the Replace dialog box, select Unrelated Component. In the Open dialog box, select the new
component to swap into the assembly.
te
You can replace parts with sub-assemblies and sub-assemblies with parts using the
Unrelated Component functionality.
In
Assembly References
C
The components you are swapping have no relationship to each other; you must place the new
component and redefine the placement of any component referencing the component that was
PT
replaced. There are two methods for handling the new assembly references:
• Reference Pairing – You can click Edit Ref Table to create a pairing table. The table contains the
placement references from the component that you are replacing and enables you to pair them
with geometry in the new component. By identifying and pairing the new assembly references
prior to replacing the original model, you avoid assembly regeneration failures. You can pair
r
references manually or automatically using the Evaluation tool.

Fo
You can save the pairing table information with the assembly and use it to return the original
component to the assembly.
• Reassemble – If you do not assign reference tags in the Reference Pairing Table, Creo Parametric
fails the placement of the new, unrelated component. You can then edit the definition of that
component and specify the missing placement references for the new component. Then, you
should use Edit Definition or Edit References to edit the placement of any components
that have references to the replaced model.
Reference Evaluation
In the Reference Pairing Table, you can click Evaluate to automatically pair reference tags in both
models, using a set of evaluation rules. By default, all rules are applied. These evaluation rules
include the following:

y
nl
Figure 4 – Reference Pairing Table
However, Evaluation Rules enables you to configure which rules to apply.
O
• Same ID (and Type) – Is the most powerful evaluation rule. This option pairs all component
references that are of the same feature ID and type. This rule enables the easy replacement of
an unrelated component that was created by copying the original model. This evaluation also
se
automatically pairs datum references that originated in the same template model.
• Component Interfaces – Compares component interfaces from two components and pairs
interfaces with the same name. This option is efficient when the same name is given to similar
interfaces configured in each component.
U
• Same Name (and Type) – Pairs all component references that are of the same name and type.
This option depends on careful planning since you must consistently name geometric features
throughout your projects.
al
• Same History – Searches for copied data-sharing features from the existing component in the
incoming component. Such features are then automatically used as pairs.
rn
• Same Parameters – Searches for all references with the given parameter name, type, and value,
and automatically pairs those that match.
te
Best Practices
In
Replacing components using the Unrelated Component method is useful because it does not require
the swapped components to have a predefined relationship, such as Reference Model, Family
Table, Interchange Assembly and so on. The Reference Pairing tool enables you to swap unrelated
components and avoid rework to downstream assemblies, drawings, and other applications.
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Replacing Unrelated Components
Component_Operations\Replace_Unrelated REPL_UNREL.ASM
Task 1: Replace an unrelated component using the Edit Ref Table.

CLAMP_BASE_UNREL.PRT and select
y
Replace .
nl
3. In the Replace dialog box, select Unrelated
Component.
O
4. Click Open .
5. Select CLAMP_BASE_CIR.PRT and click
Open.
se
6. Click Edit Ref Table.
7. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, do
U
the following:
• Click Evaluate.
• Select each tag and observe the paired
al
geometry highlighted in the display window.
• Click OK.
rn
Because CLAMP_BASE_CIR.PRT
te
was originally a copy of CLAMP_

BASE_UNREL.PRT, Creo Parametric
automatically evaluated and paired their
In
common assembly references.
Task 2: Manually pair references to replace an unrelated component.

C
1. In the model tree, right-click CLAMP_SHAFT_UNREL.PRT and select Replace .

PT
2. In the Replace dialog box, select Unrelated Component.

3. Click Open .
4. Select IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT and click Open.
r
5. In the Replace dialog box, click Edit Ref Table.

Fo
6. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click Evaluate.

7. Notice that only TAG_3 was automatically paired as datum plane RIGHT.
IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT is not a copy of CLAMP_SHAFT_UNREL.PRT. The only
reference that can be automatically paired is datum plane RIGHT.
8. Select TAG_0.
9. Select a surface in IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT
that corresponds to the highlighted TAG_0
reference.

10. Select TAG_1.
reference.
12. Select TAG_2.

y
reference.
nl
14. Click OK.
15. In the Replace dialog box, click OK.
O
If you had not manually paired missing
references, the new unrelated component
would have failed placement, enabling
se
you to redefine the component's
placement. You would also be required
to edit the definition of any components
U
assembled to the replaced part.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Exercise 1: Replacing Unrelated Components using the Reference
Table Method
Objectives
• Replace an unrelated component using a reference table.
Scenario
y
Remove interference in the top-level tool assembly by replacing the circular base in the clamp
nl
sub-assembly with a smaller, rectangular base model. The new base is imported from the Step file
of a vendor's standard part database.
O
Component_Operations\Replace_Reference-Table TOOL_01.ASM
se
Task 1: Identify interference in the assembly.
U
2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.
3. Click Global Interference from the
Inspect Geometry group.
al
Preview.
rn
The interferences between the round
base parts and the main clamp tool
te
are highlighted in red.
5. Click Cancel.
In
Task 2: Activate CLAMP_RT.ASM and select CLAMP_BASE_CIR_RT.PRT to be replaced.
1. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1. Activate

C
the first instance of CLAMP_RT.ASM.

2. In the model tree, expand CLAMP_RT.ASM.
PT
Right-click CLAMP_BASE_CIR_RT.PRT and

select Replace .
This opens the Replace dialog box,
enabling you to select from various
r
replacement methods.
Fo
Task 3: Replace CLAMP_BASE_CIR_RT.PRT with CLAMP_BASE_RT.PRT.
1. In the Replace dialog box, do the following:

• Select Unrelated Component.
• Click Open .
2. In the Open dialog box, select CLAMP_BASE_RT.PRT and click Open.
3. Click Edit Ref Table to open the Reference Pairing Table.
4. Click Evaluate and notice that no references were automatically paired.

Creo Parametric identifies each piece of geometry in CLAMP_BASE_CIR_RT.PRT that
is referenced in the CLAMP_RT.ASM. Because the two models have nothing in common,
Evaluate cannot automatically pair any references. You must now manually select
corresponding geometry in the new model for each reference tag listed.
5. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, select TAG_0.

6. In the graphics window, select the reference in CLAMP_BASE_RT.PRT that corresponds to
the highlighted TAG_0 reference in CLAMP_BASE_CIR_RT.PRT.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn

te
In
C
PT

r
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In

C
r PT
Fo

21. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box,
click OK.
22. In the Replace dialog box, click OK.
23. Activate TOOL_01.ASM.
The Reference Pairing table pairs
references used to assemble components
to the base, and pairs references used
to assemble the sub-assembly to the
top-level tool assembly.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Understanding Interchange Assemblies
Interchange assemblies enable the automatic replacement and substitution of components.
• New > Assembly > Interchange
• Interchange Component Types:
– Functional Component
– Simplify Component
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Substituting Different Carburetor Sizes
se
Understanding Interchange Assemblies
You can use interchange assemblies to manage components that are frequently substituted for one
U
another. In the interchange assembly, you can predefine and save paired references that are used
to assemble the components within design assemblies. Creating an interchange assembly is
useful when you have a number of components that are frequently replaced with one another in
al
many assemblies throughout your enterprise.
There are two types of interchange components that you can add to an interchange assembly:
rn
• Functional interchange components replace functional components in an assembly.
• Simplify interchange components substitute for components in a simplified representation.
te
Interchange Assembly Rules

The following rules apply to interchange assemblies:
In
• The first component in an interchange assembly is, by default, a functional component.

Subsequent components can be functional or simplify components.
• You can assemble simplify components to packaged functional components.
C
• You cannot assemble functional components to packaged functional components.

PT
• You can only reference a functional component when creating or assembling a simplify
component.
• You cannot reference a simplify component when creating or assembling another simplify
component.
• You can use the same component twice in an interchange assembly, once as a functional
r
component and once as a simplify component.

Fo
• You cannot add another instance of a component if the generic instance is already in the
interchange. You cannot add the generic instance of a component if an instance is already in
the interchange.
• Interchange assemblies are identified by the .ASM extension; however, you cannot assemble an
interchange assembly in a regular design assembly.
Best Practices
A component that is replaced or substituted using an interchange assembly becomes a child of
that interchange assembly. Because of this, the interchange assembly is a required reference of
that assembled component.
Maintaining the interchange assembly is logical if you have a group of components that are
frequently replaced or substituted throughout your enterprise. If the component is not replaced or
substituted frequently, an interchange assembly may be unnecessary. It is important to ensure

that maintaining the interchange assembly throughout your product’s lifecycle provides value to
your organization.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Replacing using a Functional Interchange Assembly
You can use functional interchange assemblies to define and save component replacement
references.
• Create Reference Tag Features
– Reference Tag Tool
– Based on Assembly
• Pair the references
– Manually
y
– Using Evaluate Figure 1 – Paired Reference Tag
nl
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Selected Reference Tag
rn
Replacing using a Functional Interchange Assembly
A functional interchange assembly is a special assembly subtype that defines automatic
te
replacement for a set of components.

You can create an interchange assembly by clicking New . Then from the New dialog box, select
In
Assembly as the Type and Interchange as the Sub-type.
Functional Components
C
Any component that you want to automatically replace is added to the interchange assembly as a
functional component.
PT
You can add functional components by clicking Functional or Create from the Component
group in the ribbon.
Reference Tags
r
Fo
Reference tags are features that identify and pair assembly references that are common to each
component in an interchange assembly.
Each reference tag contains a set of references selected from components in the interchange
assembly. These common references are considered equivalent when any of these components
are replaced by one another in a design assembly. Each reference tag feature contains one
common set of assembly references.
To create reference tags, click Reference Tag in the Reference Pairing group in the ribbon,
press CTRL, and select the appropriate reference from each component.
Reference Pairing Table

The Reference Pairing table contains tools to automatically create and pair reference tags. To
open the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click Ref Pairing Table in the Reference Pairing

group in the ribbon. Once the dialog box opens, there are two workflows used to create and pair
reference tags.
Create and Pair Reference Tags Based on an Assembly

Reference tags are automatically created based on how the active component is referenced in a
selected assembly. Use the following workflow:
• Active Component – Select the active component. This is the component you want to replace.
• Create Tags based on assembly – Click Open in the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, and
select the assembly that you want to use to identify the required reference tags.
y
• Create Required Tags – Click Create Required Tags in the Reference Pairing Table dialog box. A
nl
tag is created for each reference used by the active component.
• Pairing – Click the first tag in the list, press CTRL, and select corresponding geometry from each
component in the interchange assembly. Repeat the process for each reference tag in the list.
O
Click OK when all reference tags have been paired.
Create and Pair Reference Tags Based on Evaluation Rules
se
Reference tags for datum type geometry are automatically created and paired based on a set of
rules. Use the following workflow:
U
• Active Component – Select the active component.
• Components to Pair – Activate the Components to Pair field of the dialog box, press CTRL, and
select each component for which you want to create reference tags.
al
• Evaluate – In the Evaluate drop-down list, select Evaluate and Create Tags. This automatically
populates the tag list with every datum feature found in the active model. If the rules can find
rn
equivalent features in the selected to pair components, they are automatically paired. If no pairs
are found, you can manually pair or remove the tags. Click OK when you are finished.
You can toggle the display of these rules on and off by clicking the Evaluation Rules button.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Replacing using a Functional Interchange Assembly
Component_Operations\Interchange_Functional CARB.ASM
Task 1: Create a functional interchange assembly.

2. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.
y
• Select Assembly as the Type and Interchange as the Sub-type.
nl
• Edit the Name to ic_carb and click OK.
3. Click Functional from the Component group.
O
4. In the Open dialog box, select CARB.PRT and click Open.
5. Click Functional .
6. In the Open dialog box, select CARB2.PRT and click Open.
se
U
8. Click Ref Pairing Table from the
Reference Pairing group. al
9. Select CARB.PRT as the Active Component.
rn
click Open .
11. In the File Open dialog box, select
te
CARB.ASM and click Open.

In
12. If required, move the models and resize the Reference Pairing Table dialog box so that
you have access to both.
C
13. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click Create Required Tags and then select
the newly generated tag, TAG_0.
PT
14. In the graphics window, select the reference

in CARB2.PRT that corresponds to the
TAG_0 reference displayed in CARB.PRT.
r

Fo
select TAG_1.
TAG_1 reference.
select TAG_2.
TAG_2 reference.

select TAG_3.
TAG_3 reference.
21. Click OK.
Task 2: Use the interchange assembly to replace CARB.PRT with CARB2.PRT.
y
1. Click Windows from the Quick Access
nl
toolbar and select CARB.ASM to activate it.
2. In the model tree, right-click CARB.PRT and
select Replace .
O
3. In the Replace dialog box, click Open .
se
4. Expand the IC_CARB interface, select
CARB2.PRT and click OK.
U
5. Click OK in the Replace dialog box. al
rn
te

In
C
r PT
Fo

Exercise 2: Creating Interchange Assemblies using Evaluate
Objectives
• Use the Evaluate tool in the Replace dialog box to automatically create and pair reference tags.
• Add a component to an existing interchange assembly.
Scenario
y
Create an interchange assembly using the Evaluate functionality to pair references.
nl
Component_Operations\Interchange_Evaluate TRACK.ASM
O
Task 1: Create an interchange assembly.
se
types: .
U
• Select Assembly as the Type and
Interchange as the Sub-type. al
• Edit the name to interchg_slider and click
OK.
rn
Task 2: Add three slider parts to the interchange assembly as functional components.
te
1. Click Functional from the Component

group.
In
2. In the Open dialog box, select

TRACK_SLIDER.PRT and click Open.
C
PT
TRACK_SLIDER2.PRT and click Open.
r
Fo
TRACK_SLIDER3.PRT and click Open.
8. Using the 3D Dragger, drag the component to
the left into the position shown.

Task 3: Create reference tags using Evaluate in the Reference Pairing table.
1. Click Ref Pairing Table from the

Reference Pairing group.
TRACK_SLIDER.PRT as the Active
Component.
3. Click in the Components to Pair field of the
y
dialog box.
4. Press CTRL, then select TRACK_SLIDER2.
nl
PRT and TRACK_SLIDER3.PRT to pair.
O
5. Select Evaluate and Create Tags from the Evaluate drop-down list.
Creo Parametric evaluates and automatically pairs reference tags for all similar
se
datum references in the three parts. Notice that the table has a group of columns for
each component in the interchange assembly.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Task 4: Replace the slider parts using the interchange functionality.
1. Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select TRACK.ASM to activate it.
r
2. In the model tree, right-click TRACK_SLIDER.PRT and select Replace .

Fo

4. Expand the INTERCHG_SLIDER.ASM node,
select TRACK_SLIDER2.PRT and click OK.

6. Edit the datum point SLIDER_REF_PNT.
7. Edit the dimension to 0.6.
y
9. In the model tree, right-click TRACK_SLIDER2.PRT and select Replace .
nl
O
select TRACK_SLIDER3.PRT, and click OK.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Task 5: Add a new component to the interchange assembly.

C

INTERCHG_SLIDER.ASM to activate
PT
it.
TRACK_SLIDER4.ASM and click Open.
r
4. Using the 3D Dragger, drag the component

Fo
to the position shown.

6. Click Ref Pairing Table .

7. Select TRACK_SLIDER.PRT to be the active
component.

8. Click in the Components to Pair field.
9. Select TRACK_SLIDER4.ASM to pair.
10. Click Evaluate.
Creo Parametric evaluates and
automatically pairs existing
reference tags to references in the
new assembly. To see the new
reference tags, scroll to the far right
of the Reference Pairing Table dialog
y
box.
nl
O
Task 6: Use the interchange assembly to replace TRACK_SLIDER3.PRT
with TRACK_SLIDER4.ASM.
se
1. Click Windows and select TRACK.ASM to activate it.
2. In the model tree, right-click TRACK_SLIDER3.PRT, and select Replace .
U
select TRACK_SLIDER4.ASM, and click OK.
al
rn
te
In
C

PT

r
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 9
y
Understanding the Basics of Simplified
nl
Reps
O
se
Module Overview
U
In this module, you learn how to reduce the level of geometry detail in complex assemblies by using
simplified representations. You also learn how to control which sub-assemblies and components
Creo Parametric opens with the top-level assembly. In addition, you learn how to exclude certain
al
components, as well as substitute complex components with simpler representations.
Objectives
rn
• Retrieve assembly subsets.
te
• Understand standard simplified reps.

• Understand custom simplified reps.
In
• Use lightweight graphics representations.

• Use graphics simplified reps to reduce the memory requirements of an assembly.
• Use geometry simplified reps to reduce the memory requirements of an assembly.
C
• Exclude components from assemblies using simplified reps.

• Define simplified reps using the component chooser.
PT
• Create default envelope simplified reps.

• Create and use simplified reps of part models.
• Open simplified reps directly from the Open dialog box.
r
Fo

Retrieving Assembly Subsets
A subset of assembly components can be retrieved.
• Faster retrieval of large assemblies.
• Retrieval Customization dialog box.
• Apply places a subset in the main graphics window.
• Can save a simplified representation in the main assembly.
y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Retrieval Customization Dialog Box
Retrieving Assembly Subsets

al
When opening an assembly, you can retrieve a subset of assembly components. In the Open
dialog box, select an assembly and click Open Subset. This enables faster and smarter retrieval
rn
of large assemblies.
Retrieval Customization Dialog Box
te
Objects selected in the Retrieval Customization dialog box, shown in Figure 1, are set to Master
Rep, but can be configured as required. The Basic View keeps selection simple and enables you to
In
decide which components to retrieve or not to retrieve.

The Advanced View enables you to customize component retrieval further by selecting from the
following list of retrieval methods:
C
• Automatic Rep
• Master Rep
PT
• Exclude
• Other simplified representation settings
For large assemblies, you may find it beneficial to search for components rather than browse in the
tree structure to select components of interest. You can supply simple text searches in the Search
r
text box. Objects get highlighted as you type matching names. Additionally, you can access the
Fo
Search Tool dialog box or select components directly in the main window.
You can use Model Rules to determine which objects to select. You can evaluate and edit model
rules in the Retrieval Customization dialog box.
The Retrieval Customization dialog box has its own In Graphics toolbar and several available
options, including the following:
• Remove By Size
– Uses a scroll bar to set the size.
– Toggles between remove small components and remove large components.
– Selects a model to set the size.
• Remove Internal Components
• Remove External Components

• Invert Selection
• Include Selected Components
– Select components inside a 2-D rectangle.
– Select components intersected by a 2-D rectangle.
Once you have established the retrieval options for the components, you can click Apply to place a
subset in the main graphics window. Then, you have the option to save a simplified representation
based on the retrieval settings.
This does not replace the Open Automatic option which is still available in the Open
drop-down menu.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Retrieving Assembly Subsets
Advanced_Assembly\Subset NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Retrieve an assembly subset by selection.

2. Select ENGINE.ASM. (Do NOT double-click it.)
y
3. Click Open Subset.
4. Click Advanced View.
nl
5. Expand the CRANK.ASM node.
O
6. Select CRANKSHAFT.PRT and then select
the check box twice.
7. Select PISTON.ASM and then select the
se
check box twice.
8. Select CONNECTING_ROD.PRT and then
select the check box twice.
U
9. Expand the PISTON.ASM node.
Notice that the tree displays as
shown.
al
10. Orient the model in the preview window.
rn
te
In
C
11. Click Open > Yes and press ENTER to

accept the default simplified rep name.
PT

r
Fo
13. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.

• If necessary, select the Simp Rep tab and notice that Rep0001 is created.
14. Click Close.
15. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.
16. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Home tab in the ribbon.
• Notice that only the retrieved subset *.PRT models are erased along with the *.ASM files.
17. Click OK.

Task 2: Retrieve an assembly subset by geometric size.
1. Click Open .
2. Select ENGINE.ASM. (Do NOT double-click it.)
3. Click Open Subset.
4. Click Basic View, if necessary.
5. Click Remove By Size in the Retrieval
y
Customization dialog box.
6. Drag the slider to the right until
nl
CYLINDER.PRT is no longer highlighted in
the Model Tree section.
O
The preview window in the Model
Graphics section may not update
reliably in response to the slider
se
movement.
7. Drag the slider to the left until CYLINDER.PRT

highlights in the Model Tree section
U
al
rn
te
8. Click Remove Large Components .

In
C
PT
9. Right-click and select Retrieve.

r
Fo

10. Click Open.
y
11. Click Close .
nl
12. Click Erase Not Displayed .
• Notice that only the retrieved subset *.PRT models are erased along with the *.ASM files.
O
13. Click OK.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Understanding Standard Simplified Reps
Simplified reps enable you to manage memory usage of large parts and assemblies.
Standard Simplified Reps:
• Default Rep
• Master Rep
• Automatic Rep
• Default Envelope Rep
y
Figure 1 – Simplified Reps Tab
nl
Understanding Standard Simplified Reps
O
For every Creo Parametric part and assembly, you can find a list of standard simplified reps in the
view manager. You can use these standard reps to help manage the amount of system memory
required to open and work with large parts and assemblies.
se
For example, using default envelope or automatic reps increases system performance because
these reps require less memory to open and manipulate than a master rep.
The standard simplified rep types available in Creo Parametric are as follows:
U
• Default Rep – The default rep and the master rep are initially identical, however:
– The default rep type is only available in assemblies.
– You can edit and save a default rep. You can temporarily edit, but not save, other standard
al
representations.
– If you edit and save the default rep, the assembly always opens in the default rep state.
rn
• Master Rep – The master rep is the default representation of a Creo Parametric model. It
contains all geometry and features.
te
• Automatic Rep – The automatic rep uses the minimum required data in session by enabling the
system to determine the minimal level of details to open.
• Default Envelope Rep – The default envelope rep enables you to represent an assembly with an
In
envelope part. A pre-existing envelope can be selected as the default envelope. If no envelope
exists, Creo Parametric enables you to create a default envelope on the fly.
Opening and Activating Simplified Reps
C
You can open an existing simplified representation by clicking the Open Rep button at the bottom of
PT
the Open dialog box. This enables you to open large models without first opening the master rep.
In the view manager, you can toggle between different representations by double-clicking their name.
Simply editing a master rep to a newly defined rep does not reduce the amount of memory
used by the system. Models from the master rep stay in session until you erase them by
r
clicking File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps.
Fo
Important Notes About Simplified Reps

When working with simplified reps, you should keep the following in mind:
• Graphics Display Control – The save_model_display CONFIG.pro option controls the level of
display saved in a model. The default shading_lod option is typically satisfactory for most
designs; however, some organizations may want to investigate the performance and file sizes
provided by the other options.
– shading_lod (the default setting) – Saves all levels of detail according to the setting in the View
Performance dialog box.
– wireframe – Saves only wireframe information for the graphics display of all models.
– shading_high – Saves a high level of shaded detail with the model.
– shading_low – Saves a low level of shaded detail with the model.

Understanding Custom Simplified Reps
You can create custom simplified reps for better performance, visualization, and workability.
Simplified Rep Status Types:
• Exclude
• Master Rep
• Automatic Rep
• User Defined
y
Figure 1 – User Defined Type
nl
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Simplified Content Figure 3 – Reduced Clutter
Understanding Custom Simplified Reps

al
To create a new customized simplified rep, you can apply a status to selected components of an
assembly. You can configure these custom reps to improve performance or to make working with
rn
an assembly easier.
Simplified reps are configured views of a part or assembly. You should never use them to create a
new assembly or part numbers.
te
Customized simplified reps provide the following two primary benefits:

• Increase system performance by managing the number or complexity of components in an
In
assembly. Simplified representations accomplish this by removing unnecessary components or

features from a model, thus reducing the memory required to open and work with the model.
• Customize a model for a specific task. You can use simplified representations to remove
C
components that are unnecessary or not desired while performing specific tasks. For example,
you can use the simplified rep functionality to easily exclude components from view that are
obstructing your view or access to other components.
PT
Simplified Rep Status

Every simplified rep has a default status applied to its top level. For example, a master rep has
the Master Rep status applied to its top level. The automatic rep has the Automatic Rep status
r
applied to its top level.

Fo
You can create custom simplified reps by editing the default status applied to the top level of a rep,
along with the status applied to individual components in the rep.
You can apply various statuses to create custom simplified reps. You can apply a status from the
following list to the top level, default condition, and/or to individual components of an assembly.
• Exclude – Select components to exclude from the assembly without regard for parent-child
relationships. Memory usage is significantly reduced by excluding components from an assembly
and then erasing those components from memory.
• Master Rep – Select components to represent in their default status. All geometry and features
are present.
• Automatic Rep – Select components whose representation is determined by system.
• Default Envelope Rep – Select a sub-assembly to substitute with a simplified envelope part that
represents the assembly.

• User Defined – Select components to substitute with a custom simplified rep of that component.
You cannot substitute standard simplified reps.
Creating and Editing Custom Simplified Reps

Use the following select and set status workflow to either create or edit custom simplified reps:
• Select a component(s) in the model tree or graphics window to which you wish to apply a status.
• Right-click and select Set Representation to to apply a status to the selected component(s). You
can also specify the status for the corresponding component drop-down list. This action marks
the current rep as modified.
y
• Save the modified simplified rep in the view manager. Once saved, you can toggle between
various simplified reps.
nl
To revert to the representation as it was prior to your edits, double-click the modified rep rather
than save it.
O
Simplified Reps Description
The description for each custom simplified rep can be edited to describe the content of the rep.
se
When you cursor over a simplified rep name in the view manager or in the Open Rep tool, the
description is displayed as a tool tip. A description makes it easier for other users of your assembly
to understand what is contained in the simplified rep you created and how it may be useful to them.
U
Use one of the following two methods to open the Description dialog box and edit the description
of a custom simplified rep:
al
• Right-click the representation’s name in the view manager and select Description.
• Select a rep in the view manager and then click Edit > Description from the view manager.
rn
In the Description dialog box, you can edit the default description manually and then close the dialog
box. You can also erase the existing description, insert a description from a text file, and save
the description to a text file.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Using Automatic Representations
With automatic simplified representations, the system decides how to open the minimal
level of details.
• Open any assembly/simplified rep as

Automatic.
• Minimum required data in session.
– System decides how to open minimal level
of details
y
– On-demand/manual upgrade
nl
• Perform geometry-based functions.
• Various pre-Creo Parametric 4.0 simplified
O
reps made obsolete.
– Configurable Figure 1 – Opening an Automatic Rep
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Opening a Simplified Rep as

an Automatic Rep Figure 3 – Viewing Available Simplified Reps
Using Automatic Representations

C
With automatic simplified representations, the system decides how to open the minimal level of
PT
details. This method helps to maintain minimum data size in memory. The system opens the
equivalent of a graphics representation by default, which is the minimum required data set.
However, the automatic representation upgrades the level of detail on demand when needed. You
can also manually upgrade the level of detail as desired by selecting geometry on the desired
component and clicking Retrieve from the mini toolbar.
r
Fo
Automatic representations support the whole geometry focus of Creo Parametric 4.0. With an
automatic representation you can still perform the following geometry-based functions:
• Light surface selection – Within an automatic representation surfaces display as light surfaces.
• Summary and point-to-point distance measurements. The other measurement types do not
work for light surfaces. However, if you select one of the other measurement types, the system
automatically gets an on demand Geometry Rep.
• Cross-sectioning
• Component explode
You can upgrade the automatic representation to a geometry representation from the mini toolbar.
However, if you need to perform a type of operation or measurement that requires the geometry, the
system automatically upgrades the model to the geometry representation on demand.

Opening Legacy Simplified Representations
You can open legacy simplified representations as you would conventionally. Furthermore, you can
open an existing legacy representation as an automatic representation, also. In this case, all models
that were at Master Rep, Geometry Rep, Graphics Rep, and so on, in the assembly are opened as
automatic. This helps to further decrease the memory required of existing simplified representations.
You can either open an existing simplified representation as an automatic representation from
the Open Representation dialog box, or by right-clicking the simplified representation in the view
manager and selecting Activate as Automatic.
Obsolete Simplified Representation Types
y
Automatic representations make the following pre-Creo Parametric 4.0 simplified representations
nl
obsolete:
• Assembly Only
O
• Geometry representations
• Graphics representations
• Symbolic representations
se
• Boundary box representations
• Light graphics representations
U
However, this is configurable, using the hide_pre_creo4_reps config.pro option. The following
values are available:
• Yes – Hides all pre-Creo Parametric 4.0 simplified representations except for the Exclude Rep
al
type. Also, when you click File > Open and select an assembly, the default option is Automatic
Rep, rather than Master Rep.
rn
• No – Maintains all pre-Creo Parametric 4.0 simplified representations.
• Maintain master – The default option, hides all pre-Creo Parametric 4.0 simplified representations
except for the Master Rep and Exclude Rep.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Using Automatic Representations
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Automatic NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Open a model as an automatic representation.

2. Select AUTOMATIC.ASM (Do NOT
y
double-click it).
nl
3. After selecting AUTOMATIC.ASM, click the
Open drop-down menu and select Open
Automatic.
O
se
toolbar.
6. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data
group and click OK.
U
Task 2: Open an existing simplified representation.
al
1. Click Open and select AUTOMATIC.ASM
(Do NOT double-click it).
rn
Representation.
te
3. In the Open Representation dialog box, select

MASTER_ENGINE and click Open.
In
C
4. Click File > Manage Session > Object List.

• Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and
PT
notice that this simplified representation

has Automatic Reps, as well as having
various components excluded.
• Click Close.
r
Fo
5. Click Close , click Erase Not Displayed , and click OK.

Task 3: Open an existing simplified representation as an Automatic Rep.
1. Click Open and select AUTOMATIC.ASM

(Do NOT double-click it).
Representation.
MASTER_ENGINE.
y
• Click the Open drop-down menu and select
nl
Open Automatic.
O
4. In the model tree, notice that the components
excluded from the Master_Engine rep are still
excluded.
se
U
al
rn
• Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and
notice that all the different types of reps
te
have been collapsed into Automatic Reps.

• Click Close.
In
C
rPT
6. In the graphics window, cursor over

Fo
the vertical surface of the FRAME.PRT

component.
7. Notice that the surface is a Light Surface.

8. Select the surface.
9. Notice that there are no feature options
available in the mini toolbar for the selected
surface.
10. Click Retrieve from the mini toolbar.
geometry.
12. Cursor over the vertical surface again.
y
13. Notice that the surface is now a normal
surface instead of a Light Surface.
nl
14. Select the surface again, and notice that the
feature tools are now available in the mini
O
toolbar.
geometry.
se
• In the INFORMATION WINDOW notice that
the FRAME is an On-demand Automatic
U
Rep.
• Click Close.
al
rn
te
In
Task 4: Measure the automatic rep geometry.
1. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.

C
2. Select Distance from the Measure types

drop-down menu in the Measure group.
PT
3. Zoom in on the ribs of the IMPELLER_

HOUSING.PRT, press CTRL, and select the
left face of each rib.
4. Notice that the distance between these
r
surfaces is approximately 10mm.

Fo
5. Expand the measure dialog box.

6. Notice that the references are points on the
light surfaces.

Task 5: Enable an On Demand Geometry Rep to measure a diameter.
1. In the Measure dialog box, click Diameter .

2. In the graphics window, select FLANGE.PRT
to retrieve the additional model data.
3. Select the outer edge to measure the
diameter.
4. Click Close from the Measure dialog box.
y
nl
O
• In the INFORMATION WINDOW notice that
se
the FLANGE is an On-demand Automatic
Rep.
• Click Close.
U
al
rn
te
6. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps.
• Click File > Manage Session > Object List.
In
• Since the geometry is no longer needed, the model reverts back to an Automatic Rep.
• Click Close.
C
Task 6: Activate another automatic simplified representation from the view manager.
PT

toolbar.
2. In the view manager, select the Simp Rep
tab.
r
3. Notice the lack of other simplified rep types

available, for example, the Light Graphics
Fo
Rep, Symbolic Rep, Geometry Rep, and

Graphics Rep.

4. In the view manager, right-click simplified rep
Inside and select Activate as Automatic.
• Click Close.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Excluding Components Using Simplified Reps
You can exclude components from a simplified rep for better assembly performance and
accessibility.
Exclude Components:
• Without regard for parent-child relationships.
• For better performance.
• For better access.
y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Master Rep Figure 2 – With Excluded Components
Excluding Components Using Simplified Reps

al
You can remove components from a simplified rep using the Exclude status. You can exclude
components to reduce memory usage or provide better access when working in an assembly.
rn
Removing components from an assembly using the Exclude status in a simplified rep provides
benefits not found using other methods:
te
• Layers or Hide – You can hide components from display using the Hide or Layer tool; however,
hidden components remain in system memory. This method does not improve system
In
performance of large assemblies.

• Suppress or Delete – You can remove components from regeneration and system memory using
suppress and delete; however, this method requires that you manage parent-child relationships.
C
• Exclude – You can exclude components from regeneration and system memory without regard for
parent-child relationships. Also, you can toggle between saved simplified reps without having to
recreate each representation.
PT
Simply excluding a component does not reduce the amount of memory used by the
system. Models stay in session until you erase them by clicking File > Manage Session
> Erase Not Displayed.
r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Excluding Components Using Simplified Reps
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Exclude EXCLUDE.ASM
Task 1: Exclude components from the assembly to create a simplified rep.

2. In the graphics window, select any section of
the red IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT.
y
3. In the mini toolbar, click the Parents
nl
drop-down list and select BLOWER.ASM.
4. Right-click and select Representation >
O
Exclude to exclude the BLOWER.ASM.
5. In the model tree, press CTRL and select the
eight BOLT_8.PRT models.
se
Exclude.
U
• In the list of simplified reps, notice that the Master Rep is now followed by a plus (+)
symbol, indicating that it has been modified.
al
8. Right-click and select Save.
9. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to no_blower and
rn
click OK.
10. In the View Manager, right-click No_Blower
and select Description.
te
11. Click Erase .

In
12. Click Insert and double-click

NO_BLOWER.TXT.
13. Click OK.
C
14. In the Names list of the View Manager, cursor

over No_Blower.
PT
• Notice the tool tip displaying the description

that was just added.
Task 2: Create a new simplified rep by editing the current simplified rep.
r
1. With the View Manager still open, expand the

Fo
ENGINE.ASM node in the model tree.

2. Press CTRL and select ENGINE_
COVER.PRT, MUFFLER.PRT, and
CARBURETOR.PRT.
Exclude.
The No_Blower simplified rep is now followed by a plus (+) symbol, indicating that it
has been modified.

4. Right-click in the View Manager and select Save.
5. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to No_Blower_2 and
click OK.
6. Click Close.
7. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
The Erase Not Displayed dialog box lists each component excluded from the
simplified rep. To improve system performance, you can erase these components
from system memory.
y
8. Click OK.
nl
Task 3: Edit and then restore the current active simplified rep.
O
1. Select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click, and
select Representation > Exclude.
se
2. Click View Manager .
3. Double-click No_Blower_2(+).
4. Read the Confirmation dialog box and click
U
Yes to restore the modified rep to its previous
condition.
You can temporarily modify and then
al
restore any simplified rep to its saved
condition by double-clicking the modified
rn
rep name.
Temporarily excluding components from
display in this manner is a useful tool for
te
working with assemblies.

In

C
r PT
Fo

Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser
Use the component chooser to preview and select components when defining a simplified
rep.
• Component Chooser Dialog Box
– Structure Tree
– Preview Window
• Default Exclude status
– Component Status derived from Top
y
level
nl
– Select to keep
• Easy to customize
– Change top to Master Rep
O
Figure 1 – Component Chooser
– Select to remove
Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser
se
When you select New or Redefine on the Simp Rep tab of the view manager, the component
chooser opens. Use the dynamic preview and selection tools in the component chooser to create
U
and edit simplified reps.
The Component Chooser Dialog Box

al
The component chooser contains a variety of tools used to configure a simplified rep:
• Model Tree – On the left side of the chooser, you view a tree structure. From the tree, you can
rn
multi-select components and apply statuses to them. As statuses are edited in the structure
tree, the preview window updates accordingly.
Apply statuses to selected models using the following methods:
te
– Click a component status and select a new status from the drop-down list.
– Right-click a component name and select a status from the Representation shortcut menu.
In
– Use the check box next to each component in the tree to easily toggle statuses or reset the
rep. An assembly with components of different statuses is considered mixed and is indicated
by a filled check box.
C
• Model Graphics – On the right side of the chooser, you view the preview window. As edits are
made to the status of models in the tree, the model displayed in the preview window is updated
PT
accordingly. If you select a component in the preview window, that component is also selected
in the structure tree.
• Undo and Redo – The undo and redo buttons enable you to undo and redo statuses applied in the
current session of the component chooser.
• Find – The Find field provides a quick and easy way to search for and select components in the
r
structure tree. For example, if you type bolt, every component starting with the word bolt is
Fo
selected in the structure tree.

• Select – From the Select menu, you can use Advanced Search or the Select in main window
tool to select components in the main window.
• Model Rules – From the Model Rules menu, you can click Evaluate Rules or Edit Rules to view
rules associated with the rep.
• Settings – From the Settings drop-down menu in the model tree section, you can expand
or collapse the model tree. You can also edit the column display in the structure tree and save the
structure tree to a text file.
• Show – The preview window defaults to Show: Active components in the window. You can set
the preview to Show: Inactive or Show: Envelopes. From the Settings drop-down menu in
the model graphics section, you can toggle Auto update preview off for better performance when
working with very large assemblies.

• Layout – Edit the position of the preview window to be below, above, right, or left of the structure
tree.
Derived Status
A Derived status indicates that a component's status is a driven status. The derived status changes
when the driving component’s status is edited. For example, if components of an assembly are set
to Master Rep (Derived) and the status of the assembly is edited to Automatic Rep, all components
in the assembly change to Automatic Rep (Derived).
Default Status
y
When you create a new simplified rep, the default simplified rep rule is Exclude. This simplifies large
nl
assembly management by eliminating unintentional retrieval of a new representation where all
parts are set to Master Rep. You can easily edit the default rule of a new simplified representation
by selecting the top assembly in the component chooser and editing its status to Master Rep,
O
Automatic Rep, or Default Envelope Rep.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component
Chooser
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Chooser
CHOOSER.ASM
Task 1: Create a simplified rep with a default status of Exclude.
y
nl
2. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View
Manager .
O
3. Click New on the Simp Rep tab.
4. Edit the name to inside and press ENTER.
se
The default status at the top level of a new simplified rep is Exclude. Every component
in the rep has an Exclude (Derived) status applied.
U
5. In the component chooser dialog box, do the
following:
• Click Settings and click Expand All .
al
• In the structure tree, click twice for the
check boxes next to CRANKSHAFT.PRT,
rn
PISTON_ASSY.ASM, ENGINE_COVER.
PRT, and IMPELLER.PRT to set their
status to Master Rep.
te
• Click Open to complete the rep.

As you edit the status of components to
In
Master Rep, each displays in the preview

window of the component chooser.
Task 2: Create a simplified rep with a default status of Master Rep.

C
1. In the view manager, click New.

PT
2. Edit the name to outside and press ENTER.

r
Fo

3. In the component chooser, do the following:
• Click Settings and click Expand All .
• In the model tree section of the dialog box,
right-click CHOOSER.ASM and select Set
Representation to > Master. This sets
the default status of the entire assembly to
Master Rep.
• In the Find field of the dialog box, type bolt.
• Right-click any of the highlighted bolt
y
parts and click Set Representation to >
nl
Exclude.
• Right-click CRANKSHAFT.PRT and select
Set Representation to > Exclude.
O
• Set the status of PISTON_ASSY.ASM to
Exclude by clicking the check box next to
its name twice.
se
• Set the status of IMPELLER.PRT to
Exclude using either the right-click or
double-click methods.
U
• Click Open to complete the rep.
The parts in PISTON_ASSY.ASM have
al
their status set to Exclude (Derived),
indicating that they derive their status
from PISTON_ASSY.ASM.
rn
Task 3: Redefine the Outside rep to exclude the carburetor model.

te
1. In the view manager, right-click Outside and select Redefine.

2. In the component chooser, click Select > Select in main window.
In
3. Select CARBURETOR.PRT, as shown in the

figure.
4. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
C
• Notice that CARBURETOR.PRT is now

highlighted in the structure tree.
PT
5. Right-click CARBURETOR.PRT and click Set

Representation to > Exclude.
r
Fo
6. At the top of the structure tree, select the check box next to CHOOSER.ASM.
7. The ATTENTION dialog box confirms whether or not you want to change the status of all
sub-models to Master Rep. Click Cancel.

8. Right-click CHOOSER.ASM and click Set
Representation to > Automatic.
The default status of the rep and all
derived models is now Automatic
Rep.
9. Click Open to complete the rep.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep
Use the Default Envelope status to create a simplified rep that represents an assembly
with a single part.
• Shrinkwrap
• Envelope
• Automated process
y
nl
Figure 1 – Process Diagram
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Complete Assembly Figure 3 – Single Solid Envelope Part
rn
Each assembly contains a standard simplified rep named Default Envelope Rep. You can create a
te
default envelope part that this standard rep uses to represent the entire assembly. There is also a
Default Envelope status that can be applied to any assembly. The Default Envelope status enables
you to create custom reps that use a selected default envelope part.
In
The geometry in the default envelope part is created using an associative shrinkwrap feature. You
control the subset of components that contribute to the shrinkwrap feature, as well as the detail of
geometry collected. When closed volumes of surface geometry are collected, the shrinkwrap feature
C
can be made solid. Then, you can substitute the simplified rep containing envelope geometry
into higher level assemblies.
PT
Bottom-Up or Top-Down Creation

Default envelope simplified reps can be created using either a bottom-up or top-down process:
r
• Bottom-Up – Create the default envelope simplified rep in a sub-assembly before you use it in a
Fo
higher level assembly. In the higher level assembly, you substitute the fully defined sub-assembly
with the default envelope simplified rep.
• Top-Down – If no default envelope simplified rep exists for a selected sub-assembly, you
can easily create a default envelope simplified rep when needed in a higher level assembly.
The default envelope simplified rep of the sub-assembly is created in the sub-assembly and
simultaneously used in the higher level assembly.

You create a default envelope simplified rep by activating an undefined standard Default Envelope
Rep in the view manager or by setting the default status of an assembly to Default Envelope.

If the assembly already contains a default envelope(s), you select the one you wish to use in the
Select envelope dialog box.
Default envelopes can be created in the Envelope dialog box. Open the dialog box by
selecting the View tab and clicking Envelope Manager from the Manage Views types
drop-down menu.
If the assembly does not contain a default envelope, an automated process begins to create the
simplified rep, the default envelope, and the shrinkwrap feature used to define the geometry of the
envelope.
• In the Default envelope dialog box, type the following:
y
– Envelope Name – The name of the envelope.
nl
– Part Name – The name of the part contained in the envelope.
– Common Name – You can type a common name for the part if desired.
O
• Select the template model to be used to create the envelope part.
• Use the shrinkwrap feature to collect geometry that defines geometry of the envelope. At this
stage in the process, you determine the subset of models the shrinkwrap feature will reference
se
when collecting geometry. You can also define the amount of geometry detail to be collected
using settings on the Options tab.
• Close the Simplified Rep component chooser to complete the creation of the rep.
U
Best Practices
Typically, the intent of a simplified rep is to reduce the amount of data in session, yet still provide
al
the detail required for completing tasks using the assembly. Limiting the subset of components
referenced by the shrinkwrap feature is one way to reduce memory requirements of an envelope
rn
part. Also, a solid shrinkwrap feature requires more memory than the default surface shrinkwrap
and should only be used when required.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep
Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Default-Rep ENV_REP.ASM
Task 1: Begin defining the standard Default Envelope Rep.

y
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Envelope components check box and
click OK.
nl
4. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View Manager .
5. Double-click Default Envelope Rep on the Simp Rep tab.
O
6. In the Create Default Envelope dialog box,
do the following:
se
• Edit the Envelope name to solid_outer.
• Edit the Part name to solid_outer_env.
• Click OK.
U
7. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box to complete the creation of the envelope part.
al
8. Click OK in the Info dialog box, if necessary.
rn
Task 2: Create the shrinkwrap feature in the envelope part.
1. In the shrinkwrap creation dashboard, click

te
Subset.
2. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component
In
chooser, do the following:

• Set the derived status of the assembly to
Ignore by selecting the check box next to
ENV_REP.ASM in the structure tree.
C
• Click twice in the check boxes

next to ENG_BLOCK_REAR.PRT,
PT
ENG_BLOCK_FRONT.PRT,
CYLINDER.PRT, and CRANK.ASM
to set their statuses to Consider.
• Click Open to close the Shrinkwrap Comps
r
component chooser.
Fo
3. In the shrinkwrap dashboard, select the

Options tab and select the Solidify resulting
geometry check box.
5. Click Close from the view manager.

6. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden
Line from the Display Style types
drop-down menu to verify that the envelope
model is solid.
8. Edit the selection filter to Part.
9. Cursor over the envelope model and notice
y
that it highlights as a single solid component.
• Notice also the envelope at the bottom of
nl
the model tree.
10. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not
O
Displayed.
11. Click OK.
By default, envelope models are always
se
displayed in the model tree. Envelope
models never appear in BOMs or in the
assembly unless they are substituted into
U
a simplified rep.

al
13. In the File Open dialog box, click In Session
.
rn
• Notice that only the top level assembly and
envelope part are in memory.
te
14. Click Cancel.

In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Part Simplified Reps
You can substitute part simplified reps in assembly level simplified reps.
• Specify attributes.
• Include or Exclude features.
– Available status determined by attributes
specified.
• Create a cut feature to specify a work region.
– Only visible in the simp rep.
y
• Select surfaces to be visible. Figure 1 – Copied Surfaces
nl
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Work Region al Figure 3 – Excluded Features
Creating Part Simplified Reps

Like assemblies, every Creo Parametric part contains a set of standard simplified reps. You can use
rn
geometry, graphics, and symbolic reps of a part to reduce the memory required to open a part.
You can create and use customized part simplified reps to do the following:
te
• Reduce the time required to open complex parts.

• Reduce complexity of a model.
In
• Create work regions or cutouts in the part that can be viewed in assembly simplified reps.
• Create a different representation or display of a component. You can view this simplified rep in
part mode, substitute it into an assembly, or place it in a drawing view.
Like assembly simplified reps, you should never use part simplified reps to create new part numbers.
C
The workflow and options available for creating part simplified reps are much different than those
PT
found in an assembly simplified rep. To create a new part simplified rep, click View Manager
from the In Graphics toolbar. On the Simp Rep tab, click New.
Type a name for the new simplified rep and press ENTER. This opens the EDIT METHOD menu
manager where you can define properties of the new rep, such as the following:
r
• Attributes – Select attributes to control the creation and updating of the simplified rep. Attributes
Fo
are as follows:
– Include Feat – By default, all features are included in the rep unless selected to be excluded.
– Exclude Feat – By default, all features are excluded from the rep unless selected to be included.
– Regenerate – Always recreate the simplified rep by regenerating the master rep.
– Accelerate – Use the accelerator file to speed up retrieval of simplified reps.
– Whole Model – Include all feature information in the simplified rep.
– GeomSnpshot – The representation is a geometry only model; it includes no feature information
and is only available when used with the Accelerate attribute.
• Features – Select features to be excluded or included in the model. The available status, either
Exclude or Include, is dependent on the status applied in the Attribute element.
• Work Region – Create a cut feature to remove material from the model. A work region cut is only
visible in the simplified rep.

• Surfaces – Select surfaces from the model to be visible in the simplified rep. Using this option
ensures that all part features are automatically excluded from display.
Substituting Part Simplified Reps

The User Defined option of an assembly simplified rep enables you to substitute a selected part with
one of its simplified reps. This can be a rep that reduces feature count in a model, only includes
surface selected geometry surfaces, or contains a work region cutout.
Best Practices
y
Part simplified reps are best used for creating work regions to display in assembly simplified reps. In
rare situations, you can use part simplified reps for large complicated models.
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Part Simplified Reps
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Part
ENGINE_BLOCK. PRT
Task 1: Create an exclude simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.
y
nl
3. In the view manager, select the Simp Rep tab and click New.
4. Type no_fins_ribs as the new rep name and press ENTER.
O
5. In the menu manager, click Features.
6. In the model tree, select the groups
FIN_PATTERN and RIBS.
se
7. Click Done and Done/Return from the menu
manager.
U
al
Task 2: Create a work region simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.
rn
1. Double-click Master Rep and click New.
2. Type cutaway as the new rep name and press ENTER.
te
3. In the menu manager, click Work Region and Done.

4. In the model tree, select the
CUTAWAY_SKETCH sketch feature.
In

All .
C
6. Click Change Depth Direction to make

the cut upward.
PT
7. Click Complete Feature and

Done/Return from the menu manager
to complete the rep.
8. Double-click Master Rep.
r
Fo

Task 3: Create a surfaces simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.

2. Type surfs as the new rep name and press
ENTER.
3. In the menu manager, click Surfaces.
4. Press CTRL, and in the graphics window,
select the five model surfaces shown.
y
nl
O
5. Click Complete Feature and
se
Done/Return from the menu manager
to complete the rep.
U
7. Click Close.
al
rn
te
Task 4: Substitute the No_Fins_Ribs simplified part rep into the assembly.
In
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click ENGINE.ASM.
2. In the graphics window, select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click, and select Representation
> User Defined.
C
3. In the Select Rep dialog box, select NO_FINS_RIBS and click OK.
PT

5. In the view manager, right-click Master
Rep(+) and select Save.
6. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit
r
the Simplified rep field to block_no_fins_ribs

Fo
and click OK.

Task 5: Substitute the cutaway simplified part rep into the assembly.
1. In the graphics window, select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click, and select Representation

> User Defined.
2. In the Select Rep dialog box, select CUTAWAY and click OK.

the Simplified rep field to block_cutaway
and click OK.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Opening Simplified Reps
Directly open simplified reps in the Open dialog box.
Opening a simplified rep directly enables you to do the following:

• Open large assemblies without first bringing everything into session.
• Save time by opening only the components you want to open (those predefined in the simplified
rep).
• Define a new simplified rep prior to opening an assembly.
y
• Preview the simplified rep before you open it.
• Read the simplified rep's description in a tool tip.
nl
O
se
U
al
Figure 1 – Open Rep with Preview
rn
Opening Simplified Reps
Typically, you activate simplified reps when you first open the full master rep of an assembly. You
te
can avoid bringing the entire assembly into session by directly opening a simplified rep in the
File Open dialog box.
In
To open a simplified rep directly, select the assembly in the File Open dialog box. Then click Open >
Open Representation.
Preview
C
In the Open Representation dialog box, click Preview Simplified Rep to expand the preview
PT
pane and view a simplified rep before opening it.

When you cursor over the name of a simplified rep in the Open Rep dialog box, you can read that
rep's description in a tool tip.
r
Define a Simplified Rep

Fo
Click Define in the Open Representation dialog box to create a new simplified rep prior to opening
an assembly into session.
Open an External Simplified Rep

Click External Rep in the Open Representation dialog box to open an External simplified rep that is
related to the model.
Auto Evaluate Model Rules

You have the option to evaluate rules when retrieving a simplified representation by selecting the
Evaluate Rules check box in the Open Representation dialog box. When opening a simplified rep
that is defined using rules, retrieving the rep as it was last evaluated can make some retrieval
times faster.

The auto_evaluate_simprep_rules configuration option controls the default behavior during
retrieval and regeneration of rule-based simplified representations. The Evaluate Rules check box
enables you to override the default setting during retrieval.
Other Methods for Opening a Simplified Rep

There are two other ways to directly open a simplified rep:
• The open_simplified_rep_by_default configuration option enables you to open an assembly in
a selected simplified representation. When this option is edited to yes, the Open Representation
dialog box prompts you to select a simplified representation whenever an assembly is retrieved.
This way, you can avoid opening large assemblies in their master representations and conserve
y
system resources.
nl
• If you edit the default rep of an assembly, that representation is opened instead of the master rep
every time the assembly is opened.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Opening Simplified Reps
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Open NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Open a graphics rep directly in the Open dialog box.

2. In the File Open dialog box, select but DO
y
NOT open TLA.ASM.
nl
3. After selecting TLA.ASM, click the Open
drop-down menu and select Open
Representation.
O
Automatic Rep and click Open.
se
toolbar.
U
7. Select the Simp Rep tab and notice that
Automatic Rep is already selected. al
8. Click Close and click Close from the
Quick Access toolbar.
rn
9. Click Erase Not Displayed . If necessary, drag the dialog box wider to view the complete
list of objects.
te
The list of models in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box includes four assembly files
and an automatic rep for each part in the assembly.
In
10. Click OK to erase the listed models from session.
Task 2: Open a user-defined rep directly in the Open dialog box.

C
1. Click Open .
PT
2. In the File Open dialog box, select but DO NOT open TLA.ASM.
3. After selecting TLA.ASM, click the Open drop-down menu and select Open Representation.
4. In the Open Representation dialog box, click
Preview Simplified Rep to expand the
r
preview pane.
Fo
5. Select NO_BLOWER_2.
• Notice that the preview updates.
6. Cursor over the custom rep names and notice
the description for each rep opens in a tool tip.
7. Click Open to open the rep.

• Notice that NO_BLOWER_2 is already
selected.
9. Click Close.
Displayed.
• Notice there are no objects to erase.
Because you directly open this
y
simplified rep in the Open
nl
Representation dialog box, it
opens without bringing excluded
components into session. Since
O
you open the simplified rep in this
manner, you do not have to manually
remove excluded components from
session.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Exercise 1: Using Simplified Reps
Objectives
• Exclude components from an assembly using simplified reps.
• Reduce memory requirements of an assembly using simplified reps.
• Edit simplified reps.
• Create a simplified rep by editing the default status to Exclude.
y
Scenario
nl
Use simplified reps to reduce the memory requirements and remove unnecessary detail from
the DRILL.ASM.
O
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Drill-1 DRILL.ASM
se
Task 1: Create a NO COVERS simplified representation.
U
ENGINE_COVER.PRT and RECOIL.ASM.
3. Expand the CARBURETOR.ASM node.
al
4. Press CTRL and select CARBURETOR_
rn
PLATE.PRT and AIR_FILTER_COVER.PRT.
Exclude.
te
In
C
PT

toolbar.
7. In the view manager, select Master Rep(+)
r
from the list of simplified reps, right-click, and

Fo
select Save.
the Simplified rep field to no_covers and
click OK.
9. Double-click Master Rep and then click
Close from the view manager.

Task 2: Create the POWERTRAIN simplified representation.
1. Reset the model tree by clicking Show

and selecting Collapse All.
2. Double-click DRILL.ASM and click in the
graphics window to de-select all geometry.
3. In the model tree, select MUFFLER.PRT,
press SHIFT, and select HANDLE_SIDE.
ASM.
y
4. Press CTRL and select GEARBOX_CHUCK.
nl
ASM to de-select it.
O
Exclude.
6. In the graphics window, select the
STD_BIT_12MM.PRT drill bit.
se
Exclude.
U
9. In the view manager, select Master Rep(+) from the list of simplified reps, right-click, and
select Save.
al
10. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to powertrain and
click OK.
rn
11. Click Close to close the view manager.
• Notice that several components can be removed from session memory.
te
13. Click OK.

In
Excluded components remain in session memory until they are erased.
14. Click View Manager and double-click Master Rep.

C
• Notice that components are being retrieved from disk into session.
rPT
Fo

Task 3: Experiment with simplified representations.
1. Orient to the 3D_3 view orientation.

2. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar.
3. Click View Manager and double-click Internal.
4. From the view manager, right-click Internal and select Redefine.
5. In the chooser tree, select the CLUTCH.ASM check box to edit its status to Master Rep.
6. Middle-click and spin the model in the preview window.
y
• Notice that CLUTCH.ASM is now visible.
nl
7. Click Open to close the component chooser.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
8. In the view manager, double-click Master

Rep.
In
• Notice that components are being retrieved

from disk into session.
C
PT
Task 4: Assemble the RATCHET.PRT by temporarily editing the Master Rep.

r
2. In the model tree, expand ENGINE.ASM.

Fo
3. Right-click CRANK.ASM and select

Representation > Master.

4. Click View Manager and click Properties.
• Notice that CRANK.ASM is edited to
Master Rep and the entire DRILL.ASM
has a default status of Exclude .
5. In the view manager, click List and Close.
Displayed.
7. Click OK.
y
nl
O
group, select RATCHET.PRT, and click
Open.
se
9. Select the appropriate surfaces to create
Coincident constraints.
U
10. Click Complete Component from the
dashboard.
11. Click View Manager and double-click the
modified Master Rep(+).
al
12. Read the Confirmation dialog box and click
rn
Yes to restore the modified rep to its previous
condition.
• Notice that components are being retrieved
te
from disk into session.

In
C
r PT
Fo

Exercise 2: Using Part Simplified Reps
Objectives
• Create a part simplified rep.
• Add a work region to a part simplified rep.
• Apply Graphics Only status to a sub-assembly.
• Substitute part simplified reps into an assembly.
y
Scenario
nl
Improve assembly performance by substituting a part simplified rep into the drill assembly and
applying Graphics Only status to a sub-assembly. To improve assembly usability, substitute a part
O
simplified rep containing a work region into the assembly.
se
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Drill-2 DRILL.ASM
Task 1: Create a simplified rep of the chuck collar part.
U
CHUCK_COLLAR.PRT, and select
al
Open from the mini toolbar.
rn
toolbar.
te

tab and click New.
5. Type no_teeth as the new rep name and
In
press ENTER.
C
6. In the menu manager, click Features.

7. In the model tree, select the COLLAR_TEETH
PT
group to be excluded.
8. Click Done and Done/Return from the menu
manager.
r
Rep to display the teeth features again.

Fo
10. Click Close from the view manager and click

Close from the Quick Access toolbar.

Task 2: Create a simplified rep using a work region cut away of the recoil cover.

RECOIL_COVER.PRT, and select
Open from the mini toolbar.
4. Type cut_away as the new rep name and
y
press ENTER.
nl
O
5. In the menu manager, click Work Region >
Done.
6. At the bottom of the model tree, select the
se
CUTAWAY_SKETCH sketch feature.
All and click Change Depth Direction
U
to flip the cut downward.
8. Click Change Material Direction .
al
9. Click Complete Feature and click
Done/Return from the menu manager.
rn
Rep.
te
11. Click Close from the view manager and click

Close to return to the assembly.
In
Task 3: Substitute the NO_TEETH simplified part rep into the assembly.

C
CHUCK_COLLAR.PRT, right-click, and

select Representation > User Defined.
PT
2. In the Select Rep dialog box, select

NO_TEETH and click OK.
3. Click View Manager , right-click Master
Rep(+) from the list of simplified reps, and
select Save.
r
Fo

the Simplified rep field to no_collar_teeth
and click OK.
Rep and click Close.

Task 4: Substitute the CUT_AWAY simplified part rep into the assembly.

RECOIL_COVER.PRT, right-click, and
select Representation > User Defined.
3. In the Select Rep dialog box, select
CUT_AWAY and click OK.
y
Rep(+), and select Save.
nl
the Simplified rep field to review_engine and
click OK.
O
se
Task 5: Create a simplified rep to simplify the handle sub-assembly and
increase assembly performance.
U
1. Press CTRL and select HANDLE_MAIN.ASM
and HANDLE_SIDE.ASM in the model tree.
al
Representation > Automatic.
rn
4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box,
te
click OK.
5. In the view manager, click Close.
In
C

r PT
Fo

Module 10
y
Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles,
nl
Layer States, and Combined Views
O
se
Module Overview
U
It is important to be able to easily create and reuse various views of your design assembly. In this
module, you learn how to use the Cross-Section, Display Style, and Combination View tools in Creo
Parametric to create and manage many views of your assemblies.
al
Objectives
rn
• Create planar cross-sections in an assembly.
• Create offset cross-sections in an assembly.
te
• Create and use zone cross-sections in an assembly.

• Create display styles in an assembly.
In
• Create layer states in an assembly.

• Create combination views in an assembly.
C
r PT
Fo

Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections
You can create planar, offset, and zone cross-sections in an assembly.
Assembly Cross-Sections:
• Planar
• Offset
• Zone
y
Figure 1 – Planar Cross-Section
nl
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Offset Cross-Section Figure 3 – Zone
Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections al

You can create a cross-sectional cut through an assembly to view the contents of the assembly at
that section. You can view a cross-section as cross-hatching or a clipped cut in the assembly, or
rn
you can reference it to create a drawing view.
You can separately define and edit the cross-hatching shown in each intersected component of the
assembly.
te
Creating Assembly Cross-Sections

In
You create cross-sections using the Section dashboard. You can access the Section dashboard
from either the Section types drop-down menu in the Model Display group of the View ribbon tab, or
from the Sections tab of the view manager. Several types of cross-sections are available:
C
• Planar – A planar cross-section is defined by a datum plane, coordinate system, or planar surface
intersecting the model.
PT
• X Direction – An X Direction cross-section is defined as a planar cross-section referencing the

X-axis of the default coordinate system.
• Y Direction – A Y Direction cross-section is defined as a planar cross-section referencing the
Y-axis of the default coordinate system.
• Z Direction – A Z Direction cross-section is defined as a planar cross-section referencing the
r
Z-axis of the default coordinate system.

Fo
• Offset – An offset cross-section uses a sketched cut line to intersect the assembly. The cut line
shape is then extruded in one or both directions from the sketch plane.
• Zone – A zone cross-section defines a region within an assembly that can be used to select a
number of intersecting components.
Component Intersection
Using the Models tab in the Section dashboard, you can define how the section intersects the
assembly’s components. Available options are:
• Section Assembly – You can select the entire assembly for intersection.
• Section Part – You can select a single part in the assembly for intersection.
• Include all models – Section all components intersected by the cross-section.

• Include selected models – Section only the selected components that are intersected by the
cross-section.
• Exclude selected models – Section all components intersected by the cross-section, except
those selected.
• Include Quilts – Toggle the inclusion of quilts on and off.
Cross-Section Display Options

You can configure several different cross-section display options in the view manager, including:
• Activate – Specifies the active cross-section, with the default selection being No Cross-Section.
y
When a cross-section is specified as active, the model geometry is clipped at that cross-section.
nl
• Flip the Clipping Direction – Flips the geometry side that is clipped about the active section.
• Show Section – Toggles the cross-hatching display on or off.
• Show Region Boundary – Displays the boundary of the zone.
O
• Zone References – Displays the references of the selected zone.
• Zone Components – Highlights the components of the selected zone.
se
• Zone Only – Displays only the components of the selected zone on the model.
Editing Cross-Sections
U
There are numerous editing operations that you can perform on cross-sections, including the
following: al
• Edit Hatching – Enables you to edit existing hatch patterns or create new patterns.
• Delete – Enables you to delete a cross-section from a model.
rn
• Rename – Enables you to rename the cross-section name.
• Copy – Enables you to copy the selected cross-section to a new cross-section.
• Copy from File – Enables you to copy a cross-section from another model and specify a new
te
reference.
• Description – Enables you to add a text description to a cross-section.
In
C
r PT
Fo

You can create planar cross-sections in an assembly.
• Available types:
– Planar
– X Direction
– Y Direction
– Z Direction
• Cross-section options
y
• Model selection
nl
• Edit cross-section hatching
• Display management
O
Figure 1 – Creating a Cross-Section in
an Assembly Model
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Viewing a Cross-Section in the

2D Section Viewer Figure 3 – Patterning a Cross-Section
te

In
You can create new planar cross-sections in an assembly model. The following planar cross-section
types are available:
• Planar – Enables you to select a planar surface or datum plane through which to create a
C
cross-section.
• X Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the assembly’s
PT
default coordinate system X-axis.

• Y Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the assembly’s
default coordinate system Y-axis.
• Z Direction – Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the assembly’s default
r
coordinate system Z-axis.

Fo
These cross-section types are created using the Section dashboard. You can access the Section
dashboard from either the Section types drop-down menu in the Model Display group of the View
ribbon tab, or from the Sections tab of the view manager.
New cross-sections are given the default names of XSEC0001, XSEC0002, and so on. You can
always rename a cross-section either during or after creation, similar to any feature. You can
also redefine cross-sections or manage their display using either the Sections node in the model
tree or the Sections tab in the view manager.
Cross-Section Options
The following cross-section creation options are available in the Section dashboard:
• Distance from plane – Enables you to type a distance to offset the cross-section from the specified
reference. You can also dynamically drag the cross-section in the graphics window.

• Direction from plane – Enables you to toggle the direction in which the cross-section is offset
from the specified reference.
• Cap section – Enables you to cap the surface of the cross-section.
• Fill surface color – Enables you to fill the capped surface with a specified color. This option is
only available if the cross-section is capped.
• Enable hatching – Enables you to toggle the cross-section’s hatch pattern on or off. The system
automatically varies the hatching of the various components in the assembly.
• 3D Dragger – You can enable the 3D Dragger and use it to translate or rotate the cross-section
about the three axes. This is similar to the 3D Dragger in Assembly mode.
• View 2-D section in separate window – Enables you to display the 2-D cross-section in a separate
y
window. Components display in model color in this dialog box. Interference between components
nl
displays in red by default, although you can change this interference color in the Options tab
in the Section dashboard.
O
Editing Cross-Section Hatching
If the hatch pattern is enabled for a given cross-section, you can edit the hatching either from the
Sections node in the model tree or from the view manager. When you edit the hatch pattern, the
se
Edit Hatching dialog box displays with the following options:
• Pattern – Enables you to edit the hatch pattern used. You can select from a default library of ANSI
U
or ISO hatch patterns, or choose from a user-defined library hatch pattern. You must first select
the component for which the hatch pattern is to be edited.
• Angle – Enables you to specify the angle of the hatch pattern.
al
• Scale – Enables you to size the pattern. You can type a value, or use the two options to either
halve or double the existing hatch spacing.
rn
• Color – Enables you to modify the color that the hatch pattern displays in the graphics window.
Model Selection
te
When creating a cross-section in an assembly model, you can specify which models in the assembly
are sectioned. The following options are available:
In
• Include all models – All models in the assembly are sectioned. This is the default option.
• Include selected models – Enables you to specify only the models to be sectioned in the assembly.
• Exclude selected models – Enables you to specify the models that are not to be sectioned in
C
the assembly.
PT
Cross-Section Display Management

You can manage the display of a given cross-section from the Sections node in the model tree,
from the view manager, or by selecting the cross-section in the graphics window. The following
right-click options are available:
r
Fo
• Show Section – Enables you to enable or disable the cross-section within the graphics window.
This option enables or disables both the section itself and the hatch pattern.
• Activate/Deactivate – Activates or deactivates cut on the geometry based on the cross-section.

PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly Cross-Sections
View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Planar SECTIONS.ASM
Task 1: Create default X, Y, and Z cross-sections

y
3. Select X Direction from the Section types
nl
group.
4. In the dashboard, click Hatch Pattern .
O
dashboard.
se
• Notice that the hatch pattern for the
BODY.PRT is not easily distinguishable.
6. In the model tree, right-click XSEC0001 and
U
select Edit Hatching .
• In the graphics window, select BODY.PRT.
• Edit the Angle to 15 and press ENTER.
al
• Click Halve Hatch Size two times.
rn
• Click Apply and close the Edit Hatching
dialog box.
te
7. In the model tree, select XSEC0001 and click

In
Deactivate from the mini toolbar.

8. Right-click and select Show Section to
toggle it off.
C
9. Click in the background of the graphics

window to de-select all geometry.
r PT
Fo
10. Select Y Direction from the Section types

drop-down menu.
11. In the dashboard, click Flip Clipping
Direction .

12. In the dashboard, click 2D View .
13. In the 2D Section Viewer dialog box, click
Rotate Right if necessary.
14. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and
select the Show Interference check box.
• Notice the interference highlighted in red.
y
Deactivate .
nl
17. Select Z Direction from the Section types
drop-down menu.
O
18. Edit the offset value to 28.
19. In the dashboard, select the Models tab.
se
• Select Exclude selected models.
• Select PLATE.PRT.
20. In the dashboard, click Fill Surface and
U
select the darkest red color.
al
Deactivate .
rn
Task 2: Create and pattern a cross-section based on a selected plane.
te
1. Select Planar from the Section types drop-down menu.

2. Click Find from the Status bar.
In
3. In the Search Tool dialog box, select ARM.PRT from the Look in drop-down list.
• Click Find Now.
• Select Z-AXIS and click Add Item .
C
• Click Close.
PT
4. Edit the offset to 0 and press ENTER.

5. In the dashboard, click Hatch Pattern .
• Click 2D View .
r
6. Zoom in on the keyway detail.

Fo

Deactivate .

9. Select XSEC0004 and click Pattern from
the mini toolbar.
10. Select the top surface of ARM.PRT.
11. In the dashboard, click Flip First Direction
.
• Edit the quantity to 5.
• Edit the spacing to 22.
y
nl
13. In the model tree, expand the Pattern 2 of
XSEC0004 feature.
O
• Select XSEC0004, press CTRL, and select
the remaining four patterned sections.
• Right-click and select Show Section.
se
Task 3:
U
Investigate cross-sections from the view manager.
al
rn
toolbar.
2. In the view manager, select the Sections tab.
te
• Click New and view the available options.

• Right-click XSEC0001 and notice the
available options.
In
• Click Close.
C
PT

r
Fo

Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections
Offset cross-sections enable you to sketch the shape of the cross-section intersecting
your assembly.
Offset Cross-Section Options:

• Define cut line sketch.
• Section direction.
• Models to intersect.
y
• Hatching display.
• Interference display.
nl
O
Figure 1 – Offset Cross-Section
se
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Adjustable Hatching Figure 3 – Cut Line Sketch
Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections

te
An offset cross-section uses a sketched cut line to intersect the assembly. You define the cut line
shape in Sketcher and then extrude it in one or both directions from the sketch plane. You can only
In
sketch the cut line for an offset cross-section using straight lines. If you want the cross-section to be
viewed in a clipped display, the sketch must be an open sketch.
Creating an Offset Cross-Section

C
To create an offset cross-section, select Offset Section from the Section types drop-down menu
PT
in the Model Display group of the View tab. Then type a name and press ENTER. You can also
click New > Offset from the Sections tab of the view manager.
The Section dashboard opens and provides the following options:
• Flip Clipping Direction – Changes the side of the sketch on which the section is created.
r
Fo
• Extend Section First Side – Extends the cross-section to the first side of the sketch plane, or
enables you to select none.
• Extend Section Second Side – Extends the cross-section to the second side of the sketch
plane, or enables you to select none.
• Cap Section – Displays surfaces over openings in the sectioned solid geometry.
• Fill Surface – Enables you to select a color from the palette for the surface of the
cross-section. By default, the colors from the individual components are used.
• Hatch Pattern – Toggles the display of cross-hatching on and off.
The Models tab has several options available for determining which models are intersected by
the section:
• Include all models – Sections all components intersected by the cross-section.

• Include selected models – Sections only the selected components that are intersected by the
cross-section.
• Exclude selected models – Sections all components intersected by the cross-section, except
those selected.
The Options tab enables you to toggle the display of interference and to change the display color of
any interference.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections
View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Offset OFFSET_XSEC.ASM
Task 1: Create an offset section through the assembly.

y
nl
4. Select Offset Section from the Section types drop-down menu from the Model Display
group.
O
5. In the dashboard, select the Properties tab.
• Edit the Name to b.
6. Select ASM_FRONT as the sketch plane.
se
8. Select Loop from the Type dialog box.
U
9. Select the datum curve named SECT_B-B,
as shown. al
10. Click OK .
rn
te
11. Right-click and select Flip clipping direction.

In
12. Click Hatch Pattern from the dashboard.

dashboard.
C
rPT
Fo

Task 2: Edit the hatching of the cross-section.

toolbar.
3. Right-click Section B and select Edit
Hatching.
y
DRILL_CHUCK.ASM node and select
CHUCK.PRT.
nl
5. Select Use hatch from the part from the Edit
Hatching dialog box.
O
6. Edit the Angle to 30.
7. Click Halve Hatch Size .
se
8. Click Apply.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections
Create a zone to organize your large assembly.
Zone Definition Methods:

• Half-Space
• Inside-Outside
• Radial Distance From
• Offset CSYS
y
nl
Figure 1 – Half-Space Orientation
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Activated Zone Figure 3 – Zone Region Boundary
al
Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections
rn
Zones are 3-D cross-sections that define a region in the assembly. Zones are used to identify,
select, and manage components within the assembly. Components are identified and selected
based on their position inside or outside of the defined region of the zone.
te
You can use zones for the following:

In
• Organize an assembly.
• Control view clipping.
• Select components using the Find tool.
C
• Define envelope parts.

To create a zone, select Zone from the Section types drop-down menu from the Model Display
PT
group, or click New on the Sections tab of the view manager.

In the Zone dialog box, you can use any combination of the following zone definition methods:
• Half-Space – The negative or positive side of a selected planar reference.
r
• Inside-Outside – Inside or outside of a selected closed quilt.

Fo
• Radial Distance From – A radial distance from a selected entity.

• Offset CSYS – Inside or outside of a bounding box created by offset distances from a selected
coordinate system.
You can select more than one reference to define an assembly zone. When you select a reference
in the references area of the dialog box, it is highlighted in the graphics window. Two or more
references always have logical AND and OR capabilities.
Best Practices
Everyone's design environment is different; however, you typically only use the Zone tool for
managing very large assemblies. You may not see a benefit using it with small to medium sized
assemblies.

PROCEDURE - Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections
View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Zone ZONES.ASM
Task 1: Create a half-space zone to define a selection of components.

2. Select Zone from the Section types
y
group.
nl
3. Select the front circular face of the
GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT.
O
se
Notice the arrows pointing away from the selected surface, towards the models to be
U
included in the zone.
4. In the Xsec0001 dialog box, click Display > Mark Tree.

al
• Notice that this adds a column to the model tree, identifying the components intersected by
the zone.
rn
5. Click Change Orientation to edit the direction of the zone.
6. Click Display > Mark Tree again.
• In the model tree, notice that the components identified to be included in the zone have
te
changed.
7. Click OK to complete the zone creation.
In

toolbar.
C

10. Right-click section XSEC0001 and select
PT
Rename.
11. Edit the name to Zone1 and press ENTER.
12. Double-click Zone1 to activate it.
13. Double-click No Cross Section to activate it.
r
14. Right-click Zone1 and select Show Region

Fo
Boundary.
15. Observe the components intersected by the
zone.
• Orient to the RIGHT view orientation.
• Orient to the TOP view orientation..
• Orient to the Default Orientation view
orientation..

Task 2: Use the zone to select components to include in a new simplified rep.
1. Right-click Zone1 and select Show Region Boundary to toggle it off.

2. In the view manager, select the Simp Rep tab and click New.
3. Type from_zone1 and press ENTER.
4. In the component chooser, click Select > Advanced Search.
5. In the Search Tool dialog box, do the following:
• Select the Geometry tab.
y
• Ensure that Zone is the selected Rule.
nl
• Ensure that Inside the zone is selected from the Comparison drop-down list.
• Ensure that ZONE1 (ZONES.ASM) is selected from the Value drop-down list.
O
• Click Find Now.
• Press CTRL+A to select all the items in the found column.
• Click Add Column and click Close.
se
6. In the component chooser, right-click
the selected components and click Set
Representation to > Master.
U
7. Click Open to complete the simplified rep.
al
rn
The simplified rep includes all components that are a part of the zone.
te

In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Display Styles
Use display styles to assign display settings to individual components of an assembly.
• Model display settings are independent of the assembly.

• Display options include:
– Wireframe
– Hidden Line
– Shaded
y
– Transparent
• You can also blank, or hide, components individually.
nl
O
se
U
Figure 1 – Original Model Figure 2 – Viewing a Display Style
al
Creating Display Styles
rn
The display of models in a Creo Parametric session are controlled by the four following display
options: Wireframe, Hidden Line, No Hidden, and Shaded. You can also assign display styles to
individual components in an assembly that can be used regardless of those overall session settings.
te
Use the Style tab in the view manager to create display styles for your assembly.
In
You can assign one of the following display styles to components in an assembly:
• Wireframe – Shows front and back lines equally.
• Hidden Line – Shows hidden lines in ghost tones.
C
• No Hidden – Does not show lines behind forward surfaces.

• Shaded – Shows the model as a shaded solid.
PT
• Transparent – Shows the model as a transparent solid.

• Blank – Does not show the model.
You can apply existing display styles to sub-assemblies using the By Display tab. When you select
r
a sub-assembly from the model tree, the available display styles for that sub-assembly display in the
By Display tab, enabling you to specify the desired one.
Fo
You can also modify component display styles without using the view manager. You can select
desired models in the graphics window, model tree, or search tool and click the Model Display
group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style to assign a display style to the
selected models. You can store these temporary edits with a new display style or update them to
an existing one.
After you define the default style, it appears each time the model is opened.
Uses of Display Styles

You use display styles to do the following:
• Increase system performance by either blanking components from display or limiting the number
of components being calculated for hidden line display.

• Create and save display settings used in presentations or other common situations where it is
helpful to change the display of components within an assembly.
You cannot use display styles in drawing view.
Blanked components are not removed from session memory; they are only removed from
display. For this reason, you cannot use display styles to reduce the amount of memory
required to open and work with an assembly. You reduce the required memory using
simplified reps.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Display Styles
View\Display-Style_View-Manager GEARBOX_S2.ASM
Task 1: Create a new display style using the view manager.

y
3. Select the Style tab from the view manager.
nl
4. Click New.
5. Press ENTER to accept the default name
Style0001.
O
• Notice this opens the EDIT dialog box on
the Blank tab.
se
6. In the model tree, select GEARBOX_REAR_
S2.PRT.
7. Click Preview.
U
8. In the model tree, select the four
BOLT_5-18.PRT models.
al
• Notice that the Blank component status is
shown in the Edit column of the model tree.
rn
9. Click Preview.
te
10. In the EDIT dialog box, select the Show tab

and select Transparent.
In

DRILL_CHUCK_S2.ASM node and
then select CHUCK_S2.PRT and
C
GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT.
12. Click Preview.
PT
13. Click OK.
Task 2: Copy and redefine to create a new display style.

r
1. With Style0001 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
Fo
2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0002.

3. Double-click Style0002 to activate it.
4. Click Edit > Redefine from the view manager.
5. In the model tree, select CHUCK_S2.PRT
and PRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT to also be
blanked.
6. Click Preview.
7. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden
Line from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.
8. Click OK.

Task 3: Use the model tree to edit a display style.
1. With Style0002 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0003.
3. Double-click display style Style0003 to activate it.
4. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.
5. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns .
y
6. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, select
nl
Display Styles from the Type drop-down list.
7. In the Display Style list, select STYLE0003
and click Add Column to add the column
O
to the model tree.
8. Click OK.
se
9. In the STYLE0003 column of the
model tree, click to the right of
GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT and select
U
Blank from the drop-down list.
10. To the right of PRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT, select
Undo from the drop-down list.
al
rn
11. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns .
12. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, click Remove Column and OK.
Using the model tree to edit display styles does not provide you with the option to
te
preview or reset any edits that you make.

In

C
r PT
Fo

Exercise 1: Creating Display Styles using the View Tab
Objectives
• Create a temporary display style.
• Create display styles using the View tab.
• Edit display styles.
y
Scenario
nl
Create display styles using the View menu.
O
View\Display-Style_View-Menu GEARBOX_S1.ASM
Task 1: Create a temporary display style.
se
U
DRILL_CHUCK_S1.ASM node.
3. Press CTRL and select CHUCK_S1.PRT,
GEARBOX_FRONT_S1.PRT and
al
GEARBOX_REAR_S1.PRT.
rn
5. Click the Model Display group drop-down
menu and select Component Display Style
> Transparent.
te

In
drop-down menu.
toolbar and select the Style tab.
C
8. Double-click the modified Master Style(+) to

restore the style to its default display.
PT
9. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading

from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.
r
Temporarily editing and then restoring a display style to its default condition when
Fo
finished is a convenient way to work with display styles that you have no need to save.

Task 2: Create a display style using the view manager.
1. On the Style tab, click New and press ENTER

to accept the default display style name.
2. Select CHUCK_S1.PRT to blank it.
3. In the Edit dialog box, select the Show tab.
• Select No Hidden and select the four
BOLT_5-18.PRT components.
• Select Transparent and select
y
GEARBOX_REAR_S1.PRT and
nl
GEARBOX_FRONT_S1.PRT.
• Click OK.
O
se
Task 3: Use the view manager to modify the display style of individual components.
1. On the Style tab, click Properties >>.
U
• Select CHUCK_S1.PRT and click
Transparent .
• Select GEARBOX_FRONT_S1.PRT and
al
click Blank .
rn
• Select GEARBOX_REAR_S1.PRT and
click Wireframe .
2. On the Style tab, click << List.
te
3. Click Edit > Save.

4. Click OK from the Save Display Elements
In
dialog box.
5. On the Style tab, double-click Master Style.
C

r PT
Fo

Exercise 2: Creating and Editing Display Styles
Objectives
• Create a display style using the By Display tab.
• Use the Find tool to apply a display style to selected components.
• Edit the default display style so that the model always opens in that display style.
y
Scenario
nl
Create some display styles in the drill assembly to be used for sales presentations.
O
View\Display-Style_Drill DRILL.ASM
Task 1: Create a display style for DRILL.ASM to be used in a sales presentation.
se
U
toolbar and select the Style tab, if necessary.
3. Click New.
4. Type look_in and press ENTER.
al
5. If required, select the Blank tab from the
rn
EDIT dialog box.
6. In the model tree, select the
SPARK_PLUG.PRT, COIL.PRT, and
te
FUEL_TANK.ASM components to be
blanked.
7. Click Preview to update the assembly's
In
display.
8. In the EDIT dialog box, select the Show tab
and select No Hidden.
C
9. In the model tree, select MUFFLER.PRT and

ENGINE_COVER.PRT.
PT
10. Expand the RECOIL.ASM node and select

RECOIL_COVER.PRT.
11. Click Preview.
r
Fo

12. In the EDIT dialog box, select the By Display
tab.
13. In the model tree, select ENGINE.ASM.
14. Select LOOK_IN from the Select State list.
15. Click Accept and then click Preview.
y
nl
16. In the model tree, select CARBURETOR.
O
ASM.
17. Select WIRE_COVER from the Select State
list.
se
U
al
rn
19. In the model tree, select GEARBOX_CHUCK.
ASM.
te
20. Select LOOK_IN from the Select State list.

In
C
22. In the model tree, select HANDLE_MAIN.

PT
ASM.
23. Select SIMPLE from the Select State list.
25. Click OK and click Close to close the view
r
manager.
Fo

Task 2: Edit the Look_In display style and save it as Default Style.

HANDLE_SIDE.ASM node and select
HANDLE_GRIP.PRT.
2. Select the View tab.
3. Click the Model Display group drop-down
menu and select Component Display Style
> Transparent.
y
4. Click View Manager , right-click
nl
Look_In(+), and select Save.
5. In the Save Display Elements dialog box,
select Default Style from the Style drop-down
O
list and click OK.
6. Click Update Default to confirm that you are
editing the default display style.
se
7. From the view manager, click Edit > Redefine.
8. Click Find from the status bar.
U
9. In the Search tool, do the following:
• Clear the Include submodels check box.
al
• Select the Attributes tab and type BOLT* in the Value field.
• Click Find Now.
rn
• Notice Creo Parametric locates and lists 12 models matching the criteria.
• Press CTRL+A to select all the items in the Found column.
te
• Click Add Item to move the 12 selected bolt models to the selected side of the dialog
box and click Close.
The Find tool is context sensitive because you are using it to apply styles to models
In
you are selecting. The Find tool automatically selects Solid Model as the Look for
and Look by type filter.
C
10. Click Preview.

• Notice that all the bolts have been blanked.
PT
11. Click OK and click Close to close the view

manager.
12. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.
r
toolbar.
Fo
14. Click Erase Not Displayed and click OK

to remove all files from memory.
15. Click Open , select DRILL.ASM, and click
Open.
Notice that the assembly now opens in the default style. To edit the assembly so that it
opens in the master style again, redefine the default style and edit all edited components
back to their default style.

Creating Appearance States
Appearance states enable you to assign and capture multiple appearance combinations of
the same part or assembly.
• Solves the problem of a single appearance
per component.
• Different reasons for different appearances:
– Modeling
– MBD
y
– Engineering
– Marketing
nl
• Created in the view manager.
• Clear assembly appearances from an
O
appearance state.
– Options if appearance is used in multiple
states. Figure 1 – Appearance State on a Model
se
U
al
rn
Figure 3 – Different Appearance State

te
Figure 2 – Appearance State in an Assembly in an Assembly
Creating Appearance States

In
Appearance states enable you to assign and capture multiple appearance combinations of the same
part or assembly. Appearance states solve the problem of having only a single appearance per
component occurrence. You can create a different appearance state for each example scenario:
C
• When modeling a part you may wish to display the model so that references can easily be seen.
• You may want to highlight specific surfaces in an MBD combination state.
PT
• Engineering may want model colors one specific way for purposes of design.
• Marketing may want to display the model in a different state for rendering purposes.
You can create and switch appearance states on the Appearance tab in the view manager. You
can also copy an appearance state. Simply double-click an appearance state to activate it. When
r
you create an appearance state it automatically becomes the active appearance state, any
Fo
appearance you subsequently apply to a model or surface is applied to that appearance state.
Unlike view orientations or explode states, there is no need to re-save the appearance state if a
change is made to it.
The default Creo Parametric start model templates include the following appearance states:
• Default Appearance – The initial appearance state which can be altered.
• Master Appearance – Similar to the Default Appearance, but its appearance state cannot be
altered. If you do alter the Master Appearance, it displays as modified in the view manager. You
can right-click it and select Save to save the modified Master Appearance as a new appearance
state.
If the same appearance is used in more than one appearance state and you edit that
appearance, the system notifies you of this and alerts you that editing it will influence
those other appearance states.

Clearing Assembly Appearances
You can also clear assembly appearances. However, if you clear an assembly appearance in an
appearance state that is used in other appearance states, the system alerts you, and you have
two options:
• Remove all active appearances from the current model – Only removes the appearances from
the active appearance state.
• Remove all active and non-active appearances from the current model – Removes all
appearances from both active and inactive appearance states.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Appearance States
View\Appearance_States BODY.PRT
Task 1: Create appearance states in a part model.

2. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading
y
With Edges from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.
nl
toolbar.
O
4. In the view manager, select the Appearance
tab.
5. Notice the default appearance states.
se
6. Click New from the view manager, edit the
name to MBD, and press ENTER.
U
7. Select the View tab in the ribbon.
8. In the Appearance group, expand
Appearances and select ptc-glass.
al
9. Select the BODY.PRT node in the model tree
and click OK from the Select dialog box.
rn
te
10. Select the inner cylindrical surface.

In
C
PT
11. Press SHIFT and query-select the rear

surface, top surface, and front surface to
r
create the seed and boundary selection of all

Fo
inner surfaces.

Appearances and select ptc-painted-red.
y
nl
Appearance.
O
Appearances and select
ptc-metallic-aluminum.
se
15. Select the BODY.PRT node in the model tree
and click OK from the Select dialog box.
16. Right-click Master Appearance and select
U
Save.
the Appearance to Engineering and click
OK.
al
18. Double-click appearance Mbd.
rn
19. Double-click appearance Engineering.
20. Double-click appearance Default Appearance.
te
21. Click Close.
Task 2: Create appearance states in an assembly.

In
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar

and double-click APPEARANCE.ASM.
C
2. Click View Manager and select the

Appearance tab if necessary.
r PT
Fo
3. Click New, type Render, and press ENTER.

4. In the Model Display group, expand
Appearances and select
ptc-metallic-gold.
5. Press CTRL and select the BODY.PRT and
COVER.PRT components, and click OK from
the Select dialog box.

6. Expand Appearances and select
ptc-painted-green.
7. Press CTRL and select the PLATE.PRT and
SHAFT.PRT components, and click OK.
y
nl
ptc-plastic-red.
9. Select the ARM.PRT component and click
O
OK.
se
U
10. Type bolt in the model tree search and press
ENTER.
11. Click Add .
al
ptc-steel-brushed.
rn
13. Click Clear Search .
te
14. In the view manager, with the Render appearance state still selected, click Edit > Copy.
In
15. In the Copy Render dialog box, edit the name to Render2 and click OK.
16. Double-click Render2 to activate it.
Notice that the Render2 appearance state is identical to the Render appearance state.
C
PT

ptc-painted-green.
18. Press CTRL, select the COVER.PRT and
BODY.PRT components, and click OK.
r
Fo
19. Double-click appearance state Render.

20. Double-click appearance state Render2.
Notice that you can use an existing appearance state as the basis for a new one by
copying it, and then editing either one accordingly.

Task 3: Edit an appearance.
1. Click Edit Model Appearances from the

Appearances types drop-down menu.
2. In the Model Appearance Editor dialog box,
select the ptc-plastic-red color to edit it.
3. Click OK from the Confirm dialog box.
Editing an appearance that is used in
y
other, non active appearance states also
edits it in those appearance states, too.
nl
4. Click the red color square to edit it.
O
5. Edit the R value to 255.
6. Click OK > Close.
se
U
7. In the view manager, double-click appearance
state Render to activate it.
al
8. Notice that the edited ptc-plastic-red color
rn
updated in this appearance state, also.
te
In
Task 4: Clear appearances from appearance states.

C
1. Expand Appearances and select Clear

Assembly Appearances from the
PT
drop-down list.
2. Select Remove all active appearances
from the current model in the Confirm
dialog box and click OK.
r
3. Notice that all appearances are removed from

Fo
this appearance state.

4. In the view manager, double-click appearance
state Render2 to activate it.
5. Notice that none of the appearances were
removed from this appearance state.
If you had selected the Remove all
active and non-active appearances
from the current model option, then
the appearances would have also been
cleared from the Render2 appearance
y
state.
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Layer States in an Assembly
Use layer states to efficiently save and recall combinations of layer statuses in an assembly.
Layer States:
• Save current layer statuses
• Recall defined layer statuses
Manage display of layers for:
y
• Annotations
• Datum Features
nl
• Construction Geometry
O
Figure 1 – Layers Tab of the View Manager
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Layer State Example Figure 3 – Another Layer State Example
rn
Creating Layer States in an Assembly
Layer states are created on the Layers tab of the view manager. Layer states enable you to save
te
and recall a set of defined layer statuses in a model. You can create multiple states to capture
different combinations of layer statuses and quickly toggle between each state as needed.
In
To create a layer state, you first set the status of layers as you want to save them. For example, you
may want to hide all layers containing datum features and then save that status. In the Layers tab of
the view manager, click New to create a layer state that saves the current layer statuses.
C
If a layer state is active and the display of layers is edited, the active layer state is marked with a
plus sign (+), indicating that it is modified. You can do the following:
PT
• Double-click the layer state to reset the model's layers as defined by the unmodified layer state.
• Right-click the layer state and select Activate to reset the model's layers as defined by the
unmodified layer state.
• Right-click the layer state and select Save to save the modified layer state using the model's
r
current layers statuses.

Fo
The hiding an item action places that item on the Hidden Items layer. Therefore, the
statuses of hidden items are also saved in a layer state.
Best Practices
It is a best practice to use simplified reps, instead of layers, to exclude components from display in
an assembly. Layer states are best used to manage the display of the following:
• Annotations – The display of annotations can be controlled using layer states in combination
with combination views to document a model.
• Datum Features – Datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems.
• Construction Geometry – Surfaces, curves, and other features used to create complex model
geometry.

PROCEDURE - Creating Layer States in an Assembly
View\Layer-States_Assembly LAYERS.ASM
Task 1: Create a layer state to hide the assembly's datum features and reference geometry.

types: .
y
2. In the model tree, click Show and select
Layer Tree.
nl
3. In the layer tree, select 01_ALL_DTM_PLN.
• Press SHIFT and select 06__PRT_ALL_
O
SURFS.
• Right-click and select Hide.
se
toolbar and select the Layers tab.
5. In the view manager, click New
U
6. Type datum_refs_hide and press ENTER.
al
rn
Task 2: Create a layer state to hide the assembly's datum features but not surfaces and curves.
te
1. In the layer tree, select 03_ALL_CURVES.

Right-click and select Show.
In
2. Select 03___PRT_ALL_CURVES. Right-click

and select Show.
3. Select 06_ALL_SURFS. Right-click and
C
select Show.
4. Select 06___PRT_ALL_SURFS. Right-click
PT
and select Show.

5. Click View Manager and click New.
r
Fo

6. Click No from the Modified State Save dialog
box.
You click No because you
do not want to modify
DATUM_REFS_HIDE.
7. Type curves_surfs_unhide and press

ENTER.
y
9. Click in the graphics window. Spin, pan,
nl
and zoom the model to see that curves and
surfaces are now unhidden.
10. Orient to the Standard Orientation view.
O
11. In the layer tree, right-click and select Reset Status.
12. Click in the graphics window. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar to update the
se
display.
13. Click View Manager and double-click Datum_Refs_Hide.
U
The layer display statuses change in the layer tree as you edit layer states.
14. Double-click Curves_Surfs_Unhide.

al
15. Double-click Datum_Refs_Hide.
rn
16. Click Close.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Combination Views
Combine and save simplified reps, style states, cross-sections, orientations, and exploded
views as combination views.
Combine the following:
• Simplified Reps
• Display Styles
• Cross-Sections
y
• Orientations
• Exploded Views
nl
• Layer States Figure 1 – Simplified Reps and Styles
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Cross-Section with Display Styles Figure 3 – Exploded View with Display Styles
Creating Combination Views

rn
A combination view enables you to combine and apply multiple view manager states. You can save
combination views to quickly switch between customized combination views.
te
You can create and activate combination views on the All tab of the view manager. The following
display states can be combined and saved within a combination view:
In
• Simplified Reps
• Display Styles
• Cross-Sections
C
• Orientations
PT
• Exploded Views
• Layer States
Tabbed Display of Combination Views

r
When you select Display combined views on the All tab of the view manager, each combination
Fo
view displays in a tabbed window at the bottom of the Creo Parametric graphics window. You can
select each tab to quickly navigate from one combination view to another.
You can hide a tab by de-selecting the Tab Display check box next to a view name in the All tab or
by right-clicking the tab and selecting Hide. Additional right-click options enable you to configure
and edit the tabbed display as follows:
• Redefine – Open the combination view dialog box (the name of the dialog box changes depending
on the view name) to edit the view's definition.
• Remove – Delete the selected combination view and display tab.
• Rename – Rename the combination view and display tab.
• Description – Type or edit the description of the selected combination view.
• Display Customization – Open the view manager to the All tab and edit the tab display.
• View – Set the size of the tab previews to Small, Medium, or Large.

Uses of Combination Views
You typically use combination views to do the following:
• Save the common working configuration. For example, you can use a view including a specific
orientation, cross-section, and simplified rep when designing a component within an assembly.
• Save combinations used to create images for presentations. For example, you can save a view
including specific orientations and styles for reproducible image captures.
Combination views can be placed in drawings for documentation or presentation purposes.
Originals or Copies
y
Each time you create a new combination view, the New Presentation State dialog box opens and
nl
presents you with the following choices:
• Reference Originals – This option uses existing orientations, styles, simplified reps, and so
O
on, to create the combination view.
• Create Copies – Be aware that this option creates a copy of every display state used in the
combination view. It uses the new copies to create the combination view.
se
Using the Create Copies option creates new orientations, styles, simplified reps, and so on,
in your model.
U
Best Practices
Combination views are a useful tool for accessing the specific combination of display views that you
use repeatedly to design or display your product.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Combination Views
View\Combination COMBO.ASM
Task 1: Create a new combination view.

2. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar, select the All tab, and click New.
y
3. Press ENTER to accept the default name Comb0001.
nl
4. Click Reference Originals in the New Presentation State dialog box.
5. In the view manager, click Edit > Redefine to open the COMB0001 dialog box.
O
6. Select 3D_Side from the Orientation
drop-down list.
7. Select Datum_Refs_Hide from the Layers
se
drop-down list.
8. Click Preview.
U
9. Select Cut_Away from the Simplified Rep
drop-down list.
10. Click Preview.
al
rn
11. Select Trans_Rear from the Style drop-down
list.
12. Click Preview.
te
In
13. Select the Show exploded check box.

14. Click Preview.
C
PT
15. Clear the Show exploded check box.

16. Click OK.
r
Fo
Task 2: Save selected states and views to a combination view.
1. In the view manager, double-click the

combination view named Default All.
2. Select the Simp Rep tab and double-click
Rear_Box.
3. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar.

4. Select the Style tab and double-click
Wire_Gears.
5. Select the Sections tab and double-click A.
6. Select the Orient tab and double-click
3D_Front.
7. Click Refit .
8. Right-click the 3D_Front(+) modified view
and select Save.
y
dialog box.
nl
10. Select the All tab and click New.
O
11. Press ENTER to accept the default name Comb0002.
12. Click Reference Originals from the New Presentation State dialog box.
13. On the All tab of the view manager, select the Display combined views check box.
se
• Notice that selecting the Display
combined views check box adds a tabbed
U
display of the combination views at the
bottom of the main graphics window.
15. Select each combination view tab at the
al
bottom of your graphics window and notice
the preview as you cursor over each tab.
rn
16. Right-click the Comb0002 tab and select Hide.

te
17. Right-click the Comb0001 tab and select Display Customization.

18. On the All tab of the view manager, notice the Tab Display check box has been cleared
for Comb0002.
In
If you select Hide, only the tab for that view is hidden. If you select Remove, the view
is deleted.
C

r PT
Fo

Module 11
y
Substituting Components Using User
nl
Defined, Envelopes, and Simplified Reps
O
se
Module Overview
U
In Creo Parametric, you can substitute large complicated components with simplified reps,
envelopes, or models related by family tables or interchange assemblies. These tools enable you to
control and manage the system resources required to work with large assemblies.
al
Objectives
rn
• Create envelope models using a variety of methods.
• Substitute models using By Envelope.
te
• Substitute models using User Defined.

• Substitute models using By Model.
In
C
r PT
Fo

Understanding Envelopes
You can substitute envelopes for more complex components to reduce memory requirements
of an assembly.
Envelope Creation Methods:
• Create Envelope Part
• Select Existing Assembly Component
• Surface Subset Shrinkwrap
• Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap
y
• All Solid Surfaces Subset Shrinkwrap
nl
Figure 1 – Full Assembly
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Envelopes Created using Different Methods
al
Understanding Envelopes
An envelope is a part created to represent a predetermined selection of components in an
rn
assembly. The envelope uses simple geometry to reduce memory usage and looks similar to the
components it represents.
te
Creating Envelopes
You create envelopes within an assembly using the envelope manager. Access the envelope
In
manager by selecting Envelope Manager from the Manage Views types drop-down menu in
the Model Display group or by selecting Envelope as the model type in the Create Component
dialog box.
C
The definition of every envelope part begins in the Envelope Definition dialog box where the
following attributes are defined:
PT
• Name – You can type the envelope name in either the Create Component dialog box or the
Envelope Definition dialog box.
• Components to Substitute – You select parts and sub-assemblies from an assembly to be
substituted by the envelope.
r
• Envelope Geometry – You can use feature creation tools to define geometry in an already created
Fo
envelope. For example, you can add an extrusion to refine the definition of a model created
using the Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap option.
• Envelope Part – Every envelope has a part model associated with it. Click the Envelope Part
button to open the Envelope Method dialog box where you can select from the following five
different methods of creation:
– Create envelope part – A new part is created and geometry is then added using a variety of
geometry creation methods.
– Select existing assembly component – This converts a selected part in the assembly to an
envelope. Because the part is an envelope, it no longer displays in the assembly. Use this
method if you have created or copied a part that you want to turn into an envelope.
– Surface subset shrinkwrap – You create an envelope part using the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap
functionality. This method creates an associative surface representation of the referenced
components.

– Faceted solid shrinkwrap – An envelope part is created using the Facet Solid Shrinkwrap
functionality. This method creates a tessellated solid representation of the referenced
components. This shrinkwrap type cannot be modified and is not associative with geometry
changes in these models.
– All solid surfaces subset shrinkwrap – You create an envelope part using the All Solid Surfaces
Shrinkwrap functionality. This method creates an associative representation by copying all
solid surface geometry from the selected subset of components. Using the All Solid Surfaces
Shrinkwrap functionality, this model can be left as a surface model, converted to solid, and
simplified using the Fill Contours tool.
Always add an _env suffix to an envelope's part file name. This enables you to recognize
y
them as envelope parts in your local file structure or data management tool.
nl
Using Envelopes
O
Although envelopes are stored as part files with a .PRT extension, you can only use them as
envelopes in the assembly in which they were created. To use an envelope part, you must explicitly
include it in a simplified rep by substituting it for the components that it represents. You can
substitute an envelope into a simplified rep using one of the following methods:
se
• Use Envelope – You can right-click an envelope part in the model tree and select Use Envelope.
This substitutes the selected envelope into the assembly and marks the active simplified rep as
U
modified.
• Substitute by Envelope – When creating or editing a simplified rep using the Component Chooser,
you can set the status of components the envelope represents to Substitute by Envelope. Note
al
that this substitution only works for components that the envelope is defined to represent.
• User Defined – You can include an envelope in a simplified rep and then use the User Defined
status to substitute that simplified rep with higher level simplified reps.
rn
Envelope Displays and BOMs

te
Envelope models are only simplified representations of design models. For this reason, envelope
parts:
In
• Do not appear in the Assembly BOM.

• Do not appear in assemblies unless they are substituted into a simplified rep.
• By default, appear in the model tree of an assembly; however, they are identified by both the
C
envelope name and part name. You can change model tree settings to disable envelope display.
PT
Best Practices
If you are responsible for a large assembly, it is a good practice to create a lightweight simplified
rep that can be used by downstream users of your assembly. Envelopes are a valuable tool for
providing those users with the lightweight model, yet also providing them with key geometric and
r
BOM information.
Fo

Creating and Using a Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelope
You can simplify an assembly using an envelope created using the Surface Subset
Shrinkwrap method.
• New envelope part model is created.

• Shrinkwrap feature contains surface geometry.
• Geometry is associative.
• Substitute the envelope for the models its geometry contains.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Detailed Assembly Model Figure 2 – Surface Subset Envelope
U
Creating and Using a Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelope
You can create an envelope part and its geometry automatically using the Surface subset
al
shrinkwrap method. Using this method, a subset of surface geometry is copied from the original
assembly into the envelope part. You can control the level of surface detail copied into the model
rn
using the following options:
te

• Attributes – You can select attributes which control the automatic selection of shrinkwrap
In
geometry. You can select one of the following:

– Auto hole filling – Fill all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface.
– Include quilts – Select quilts that should always be included in the Shrinkwrap feature.
C
– Ignore small surfaces – Exclude surfaces that are smaller than a specified percentage of the
overall model size.
PT
You can only create envelopes using Shrinkwrap methods when the master representation
is active.
Associative Geometry
r
Fo
Geometry that you create using the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap method is associative to the
component geometry that it references. If the referenced components change, geometry in the
envelope updates accordingly.
Using Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelopes

Like any envelope, you can substitute those you create using the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap
method into an assembly's simplified rep.

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using a Surface Subset Shrinkwrap
Envelope
Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Shrinkwrap-Surface
ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM
Task 1: Create an envelope part using the envelope manager.
y
nl
O
click OK.
4. Select Envelope Manager from the Manage Views types drop-down menu in the Model
Display group.
se
5. Click New in the Envelope dialog box.
6. In the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following:
• Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope name ENVLP001 to swsurf_pcb.
U
• In the structure tree, select the ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM check box to include all of its
components.
• Click Envelope Part.
al
rn
te
In
C
rPT
Fo
Including all components of ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM in the envelope definition means that

the entire assembly can be substituted by the envelope.

7. In the Envelope Method dialog box, do the
following:
• Select Surface subset shrinkwrap.
• Edit the Name to swsurf_pcb_env.
• Click OK in the Alert dialog box, if
necessary.
• Select the Auto hole filling check box, if
necessary.
y
• Click OK.
nl
8. Click Open from the Envelope Definition component chooser.
• Notice that you can now see the envelope in the model tree.
O
9. In the Envelope dialog box, select the envelope SWSURF_PCB and click Info.
10. Scroll down in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that it lists all components to be
se
substituted by the envelope.
• Notice also that the envelope is not currently used in any rep.
11. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW.
U
12. Click Close in the Envelope dialog box.
al
Task 2: Use the model tree to substitute the envelope into an assembly.
rn
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar, select HOUSING_BTM2.ASM, and click Open.
te
click OK.
In
4. Expand the ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM node, right-click SWSURF_PCB <SWSURF_PCB_ENV.

PRT>, and select Representation > Use Envelope.
C
6. Select the Simp Rep tab, if necessary.

PT
7. In the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and select Save.
8. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to env_pcb and click OK.
r
11. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.

Fo
There are many components that you can now erase from session memory because
they are substituted by the envelope part.
Task 3: Use the Simplified Rep component chooser to substitute the same
envelope into another assembly.
1. Click Open , select HOUSING_BTM3.ASM, and click Open.

2. Click View Manager and click New on the Simp Rep tab.
3. Type env_pcb in the Name field and press ENTER.

4. In the Edit component chooser, do the following:
• Right-click HOUSING_BTM3.ASM and click Set Representation to > Master.
• Expand the ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM node and select PCB_CNTRL2.PRT.
• Scroll to the bottom of the structure tree, press SHIFT, and select LCC28.PRT.
• Right-click the selected components and select Substitute > Envelope.
• In the Select Envelope dialog box, select SWSURF_PCB(ECAD_CNTRL2) and click OK.
• Click Open to complete the simplified rep.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

In
6. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No

Hidden from the Display Style types
drop-down menu.
C

ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM node.
PT
8. Open SWSURF_PCB <SWSURF_PCB_

ENV.PRT> from the model tree.
The magenta shrinkwrap feature
surfaces of the envelope were
r
substituted for the assembly.

Fo
9. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

Creating and Using a Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope
You can simplify an assembly using an envelope created using the Faceted Shrinkwrap
method.

• Shrinkwrap feature contains solid faceted (tessellated) geometry.
• Geometry is not associative.
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – Detailed Assembly Model Figure 2 – Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope
se
Creating and Using a Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope
U
You can create an envelope part and its geometry automatically using the Faceted solid shrinkwrap
method. Using this method, you can create a solid faceted part based on the geometry of referenced
components. You can control the level of detail referenced and the quality of tessellation used to
al
create faceted geometry using the following options:
rn
• Attributes – You can select attributes which control the automatic selection of shrinkwrap
te
geometry:
– Auto hole filling – Fill all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface.
In
– Include quilts – Select quilts that should always be included in the shrinkwrap feature.
– Ignore small surfaces – Exclude surfaces that are smaller than a specified percentage of the
overall model size.
C
Non-Associative Geometry
PT
Geometry created using the Faceted Shrinkwrap method is not associative to the component
geometry that it references. If the referenced components change, geometry in the envelope
does not update.
Using Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelopes

r
Fo
Like any envelope, you can substitute those that you create using the Faceted Shrinkwrap method
into an assembly's simplified rep.

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using a Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope
Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Shrinkwrap-Faceted
ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM
Task 1: Create an envelope part using the Component Create dialog box.
y
nl
click OK.
4. Click Create from the Component group.
O
5. In the Create Component dialog box, click Envelope.
6. Type swfac_pcb and click OK.
se
• In the structure tree, select the ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM check box to include all of its
components.
U
• Click Envelope Part. al
rn
te
In
C
rPT
Fo

following:
• Select Faceted solid shrinkwrap.
• Edit the Name to swfac_pcb_env.
• Click OK from the Alert dialog box, if
necessary.
• Select the Auto hole filling check box, if
necessary.
• Click OK.

• Notice that you can now see the envelope in the model tree.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar, select HOUSING_FR2.ASM, and click Open.
y
nl
click OK.
4. Expand the ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM node, right-click SWFAC_PCB <SWFAC_PCB_ENV.PRT>,
and select Representation > Use Envelope.
O
6. On the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and select Save.
se
7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to env_pcb and click OK.
U
10. Click OK from the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
al
they were substituted by the envelope part.
rn
Task 3: Use the Simplified Rep component chooser to substitute the same
envelope into another assembly.
te
1. Click Open , select HOUSING_FR3.ASM, and click Open.

In
2. Click View Manager and click New on the Simp Rep tab.
3. Type env_pcb as the Name and press ENTER.
C
r PT
Fo

• Right-click HOUSING_FR3.ASM and click Set Representation to > Master.
• Expand the ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM node and select PCB_OPTIC2.PRT.
• Scroll to the bottom of the structure tree, press SHIFT, and select LENS_ASSY.PRT.
• Right-click the selected components and click Substitute > Envelope.
• In the Select Envelope dialog box, select SWFAC_PCB(ECAD_OPTIC2) and click OK.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te

In

ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM node.
7. Open SWFAC_PCB <SWFAC_PCB_ENV.
PRT> from the model tree.
C
PT

drop-down menu.
• Notice that the faceted envelope part is
r
solid.
Fo

Displayed.
There are many components
that you can now erase from
session memory because they were
substituted by the envelope part.

Creating and Using an All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap Envelope
You can simplify an assembly using an envelope created using the all solid surfaces
shrinkwrap method.

• Shrinkwrap feature contains all solid surfaces of the defined component subset.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Detailed Assembly Model Figure 2 – All Solid Shrinkwrap Envelope
U
Creating Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelopes al
You can create an envelope part and its geometry automatically using the All solid surfaces
shrinkwrap method. Using this method, all solid surfaces of a defined component subset are
rn
copied into the envelope. The resulting shrinkwrap feature can be simplified and made solid using
available options.
• Subset – The Subset button in the shrinkwrap dashboard opens the Shrinkwrap Comps
te
component chooser. From the component chooser, you can select the components you want
included in the creation of the shrinkwrap feature by setting their status to either Ignore or
Consider. This option enables you to reduce the number of components included in the creation
In
of the shrinkwrap feature.

• Options – You can use the Options tab to further control the shrinkwrap feature as follows:
– Fill contours surfaces – Use the Fill contours surfaces option to select planar surfaces
C
intersected by holes or pockets that you want filled during the creation of the shrinkwrap feature.
This an excellent method for removing unnecessary geometry copied from complex parts.
PT
– Solidify resulting geometry – This option turns closed surface volumes copied from the
referenced subset of components into solid geometry.
– Leave as quilt if solidification fails – If the Solidify resulting geometry option is selected and
Creo Parametric cannot create a solid feature, this option determines how Creo Parametric
r
behaves. If selected, the failed geometry remains, but only as surface geometry. If not
Fo
selected, the shrinkwrap feature fails and no geometry from the failed surface remains.
You can only create envelopes using shrinkwrap methods when the master representation
is active.
Associative Geometry
Geometry that you create using the All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap method is associative to the
component geometry that it references. If the referenced components change, geometry in the
envelope updates accordingly.
Using Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelopes

Like any envelope, you can substitute those you create using the All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap
method into an assembly's simplified rep using the By Envelope method.

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using an All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap
Envelope
Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Shrinkwrap_All-Solid
CAMERA1.ASM
y
nl
Display group.
O
4. Within the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following:
• Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope name ENVLP001 to solid_cam.
se
• In the structure tree, select the CAMERA1.ASM check box to include all of its components.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
rPT
Including all components of CAMERA1.ASM in the envelope definition means that the
Fo
entire assembly can be substituted by the envelope.

following:
• Select All solid surfaces subset
shrinkwrap.
• Edit the Name to solid_cam_env.
• Click OK.

6. If the template part MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT is not already displayed in the Copy From field
of the Creation Options dialog box, click Browse and double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT
in the Choose template dialog box.
8. If necessary, click OK in the Info dialog box.
9. In the shrinkwrap dashboard, click Subset.
10. Within the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, do the following:
• In the structure tree, right-click CAMERA1.ASM and select Ignore.
y
• Expand the HOUSING_BTM.ASM and HOUSING_FRONT.ASM nodes.
nl
• Click the check boxes next to HOUSING_BTM.PRT, HOUSING_TOP.PRT, and
HOUSING_FRONT.PRT two times each to set their status to Consider.
• Click Open.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
11. In the dashboard, select the Options tab

and select the Solidify resulting geometry
PT
check box.
Fill contours surfaces.
13. Select the surface on HOUSING_FRONT.
r
PRT, as shown.
Fo

14. Spin the model to the position shown.
15. Press CTRL and select the surface on the
back of HOUSING_BTM.PRT, as shown.
17. Click Open from the Envelope Definition
component chooser.
toolbar.
y
nl
O
select SECURITYCAM1.ASM, and click
se
Open.
U
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select
the Envelope components check box and
click OK.
al
CAMERA1.ASM node, right-click
rn
SOLID_CAM <SOLID_CAM_ENV.PRT>, and
select Representation > Use Envelope.
te

In
7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to env_solid_cam
and click OK.
C

PT

r
11. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down
menu.
Fo
• Notice that the faceted envelope part is solid.

The blue curves on the front and back of the envelope part represent where surface
contours were selected to be filled during the shrinkwrap feature creation.

Creating and Using a Create Features Envelope
You can simplify an assembly using an envelope defined by features created in the context
of an assembly.

• Create geometry using conventional Part
mode features.
• Substitute the envelope for the models its
geometry contains.
y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Envelope Created using an Extrude feature Figure 3 – Finished Envelope
Creating and Using a Create Features Envelope

al
To create an envelope using this method, select Create envelope part in the Envelope Method
dialog box. Then, select Create features in the Creation Options dialog box.
rn
With the envelope part activated in the assembly, you can add features to the envelope part in the
same way that you would add them to a standard part.
te
Using an Envelope Created Using the Copying an Existing Method

In
Like any envelope, you can substitute those created using the Create Envelope Part, Create
Features method into an assembly's simplified rep.
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using a Create Features Envelope
Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Create-Features
ECAD_CNTRL.ASM
y
Display group.
nl
O
• Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope name ENVLP001 to pcb1_btm.
• In the structure tree, select the ECAD_CNTRL.ASM check box to include all of its
se
components.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
5. In the Envelope Method dialog box, do the following:

r
• Select Create envelope part.

Fo
• Edit the Name to pcb1_btm_env and click OK.

6. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Create features and click OK.
7. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.

8. Select the top surface of the extruded
PCB_CNTRL.PRT.
9. In the References dialog box, click Close.
10. In the Missing References dialog box, click
Yes.

12. Select Loop in the Type dialog box.
13. Select the top surface of the extruded
PCB_CNTRL.PRT.
14. In the menu manager, click Next until the
entire outer loop highlights and click Accept.
• Notice this creates sketch entities along
the outer edges of the part.
y
15. Click OK .
nl
16. In the dashboard, edit the depth to To
Selected .
O
17. Select the top surface of TO5.PRT.
se
18. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.
19. Click Done from the Close group.
U
You can add additional features to the envelope at any time. Open the envelope part
al
PCB1_BTM_ENV.PRT and add features, just as you would in any part model.
rn
te

select HOUSING_BTM.ASM, and click Open.
In

C
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select

the Envelope components check box and
PT
click OK.
4. Expand the ECAD_CNTRL.ASM
node, right-click PCB1_BTM
<PCB1_BTM_ENV.PRT>, and select
Representation > Use Envelope.
r
Fo

7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to simple_pcb1 and
click OK.
9. Click File > Manage Session > Erase not displayed.

Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from an Existing Part
You can simplify an assembly using an envelope created by copying an existing part.

• Geometry from an existing model is copied into the envelope part model.
• Assemble using constraints.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Detailed Assembly Model Figure 2 – Envelope Copied From Existing Part
Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from an Existing Part
U
You can quickly create an envelope part by copying an existing model. You can then define the
envelope geometry by editing dimensions and inserting or deleting features that were copied to the
envelope part.
al
To create an envelope using this method, select Create envelope part in the Envelope Method
rn
dialog box. Then, select Copy from existing in the Creation Options dialog box. You can then
browse to select the model you want to copy.
te
Non-Associative Copy
The copied envelope part is not associative to the existing model from which it was copied. A
In
change to the original model does not update the envelope part.
Using an Envelope Created Using the Copying an Existing Method

C
Like any envelope, you can substitute those that you create using the Copying an Existing method
into an assembly’s simplified rep.
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from an
Existing Part
Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Copy ECAD_OPTIC.ASM
Task 1: Create an envelope part using the Component Create dialog box.
y
nl
3. In the Create Component dialog box, select Envelope, type pcb2 in the Name field, and
click OK.
O
• In the structure tree, select the check box next to ECAD_OPTIC.ASM to include all of
its components.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
5. In the Envelope Method dialog box, select Create envelope part, edit the name to
pcb2_env, and click OK.
r
6. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy from existing and then click Browse.
Fo
7. In the Choose template dialog box, select PCB_OPTIC.PRT and click Open.
9. Enable Csys Display .

10. In both models, select datum coordinate
system ECAD_DEFAULT as component and
assembly references, as shown.
dashboard.
component chooser.
13. Disable Csys Display .
y
nl
toolbar.
Task 2: Edit the envelope part.
O
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and click In Session in the File Open
dialog box.
se
2. Select PCB2_ENV.PRT and click Open.
This is the envelope part you just created by copying the design model
U
PCB_OPTIC.PRT.
3. Edit Protrusion id 39.

al
4. Edit the 1.575 dimension to 6.575, press ENTER, and click twice in the graphics window
to update the geometry.
rn
6. In the model tree, select datum plane FRONT
as the sketch plane.
te
7. Sketch and dimension a circle, as shown.

In
8. Click OK .
9. In the dashboard, click Remove Material .

C
10. Edit the depth to 19.5 and click Complete

PT
Feature .
r
Fo

1. Click Open , select HOUSING_FRONT.ASM, and click Open.

click OK.
4. In the model tree, expand the ECAD_OPTIC.ASM node, right-click PCB2 <PCB2_ENV.PRT>,
and select Representation > Use Envelope.
y
nl
7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to simple_pcb and
O
click OK.
se
Displayed.
There are many components
U
substituted by the envelope part.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Substituting Components using User Defined
You can substitute a component with any of its custom simplified reps using the User
Defined option.
• Substitute a component of an assembly.

• User Defined option:
– In the structure tree
– In the model tree
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Assembly Figure 2 – Substituted Simplified Reps
U
Substituting Components using User Defined
You can automatically substitute a component of an assembly with any of the component's custom
al
simplified reps using the User Defined option.
The component chooser opens when you create a new simplified rep or redefine an existing rep in
rn
the view manager. In the component chooser, use the following steps to substitute a component
using the User Defined option:
te
• In the structure tree, right-click the component you want to substitute and select Set
Representation to > User Defined.
• Select the rep you want to use in the Select Rep dialog box and click OK.
In
You can also select the Status field next to a component and select User Defined from
the drop-down list.
C
From the model tree, use the following steps to substitute a component using one of its simplified
reps:
PT
• In the model tree, right-click the component you want to substitute and select Representation
> User Defined.
• Select the rep you want to use in the Select Rep dialog box and click OK.
r
You can only substitute custom simplified reps and the Default Rep in a simplified rep. You
cannot substitute the standard Symbolic, Geometry, and Graphics reps.
Fo

PROCEDURE - Substituting Components Using User Defined
Advanced_Assembly\Substitute_User-Defined CAMERA1.ASM
Task 1: Create a simplified rep that substitutes sub-assemblies with simplified reps.

y
3. Select the Simp Rep tab, if necessary, and click New.
nl
4. Type simple_camera as the Name and press ENTER.
O
• Right-click CAMERA1.ASM and select Set Representation to > Master.
• Right-click HOUSING_ BTM.ASM and select Set Representation to > User Defined.
• Select SIMPLE_PCB from the SELECT REP dialog box and click OK.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Task 2: Use the model tree to substitute another sub-assembly.

r

Fo
HOUSING_FRONT.ASM and select

Representation > User Defined.

2. In the SELECT REP dialog box, select
SIMPLE_PCB1 and click OK.
A simplified rep containing a faceted
solid is substituted into the assembly.
3. In the view manager, double-click
y
Simple_Camera(+) then click Yes to reset
the modified simplified rep.
nl
HOUSING_FRONT.ASM and select
O
Representation > User Defined.
se
5. In the SELECT REP dialog box, select
SIMPLE_PCB2 and click OK.
6. In the view manager, right-click
U
Simple_Camera(+) and select Save.
dialog box.
al
rn
te
Many of the components are removed from session memory when you select
to substitute simple objects for the two detailed PCB assemblies. This increases
system performance.
In

C
r PT
Fo

Substituting by Interchange and Family Table
You can substitute components related by a family table or interchange assembly in a
simplified rep.
• Uses the Chooser

• Family Table
– Select other instances.
• Select other components in the interchange
assembly.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Substitute by Interchange Figure 3 – Substitute by Family Table
rn
Substituting by Interchange and Family Table
You can substitute components into a simplified rep using the Interchange and Family Table options.
te
These options enable you to automatically substitute any components related by family table or
interchange assembly.
In
The component chooser opens when you create a new simplified rep or redefine an existing rep in
the view manager. In the component chooser, use the following steps to substitute a component by
Interchange or Family Table:
C
• In the component chooser, right-click the component you want to substitute. Select Substitute and
then select either Interchange or Family Table.
PT
• In the Family Tree dialog box, select the interchange component or family table instance that
you want to substitute and click OK.
You can also select the Status field next to a component, and then select Substitute by
Interchange or Substitute by Family Table from the drop-down list.
r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Substituting by Interchange and Family Table
Advanced_Assembly\Substitute_Interchange_Family-Table
SECURITYCAM1.ASM
Task 1: Substitute the camera assembly with a simplified part model.
y
2. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View
Manager .
nl
tab, if necessary, and click New.
O
4. Type solid_camera as the Name and press
ENTER.
se
• Right-click SECURITYCAM1.ASM and select Set Representation to > Master.
• Right-click CAMERA1.ASM and select Substitute > Interchange.
U
• In the Family Tree dialog box, expand CAMERA1_INTCHG.ASM, select
CAMERA_LIGHT.PRT, and click OK.
al
In this simplified rep, CAMERA1.ASM has been substituted by a single solid part
model.
rn
te
In
C
rPT
Fo

Task 2: Verify that the sub-assembly was substituted with the solid part.

2. Double-click cross-section A.
y
nl
Task 3: Substitute a simplified thumb nut to reduce detail in the rep.
1. Double-click cross-section No Cross Section
O
from the view manager.
2. Spin and zoom the model so that
se
you can see the slotted geometry of
THUMB_NUT_M6X1.PRT.
3. Select the Simp Rep tab, right-click
Solid_Camera and select Redefine.
U
• In the structure tree, expand the ARM1.ASM node.
al
• Right-click THUMB_NUT_M6X1.PRT and select Substitute > Family Table.
• In the Family Tree dialog box, select THUMB_NUT_M6X1_SIMPLE and click OK.
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

6. Spin and zoom the model to verify the slotted
THUMB_NUT_M6X1.PRT was substituted.
Displayed.
In the Erase Not Displayed dialog
box, notice all of the components
y
substituted by the single parts.
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Exercise 1: Substituting Components Using Envelopes and Simplified
Reps
Objectives
• Create an envelope using the Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap method.
• Create an envelope using the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap method.
• Create an envelope using the All Solid Shrinkwrap method.
y
• Substitute components using the Use Envelope command.
nl
• Select components using the Search tool in the Simplified Rep component chooser.
• Substitute components using the User Defined status.
O
Scenario
Simplify the drill assembly so that it can be opened easily, yet still be used for interference checks.
se
Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Simplified-Rep DRILL.ASM
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Task 1: Create a faceted shrinkwrap envelope and substitute it for the muffler part.

click OK.
Display group.
y
nl
• Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope name ENVLP001 to muffler.
• Right-click MUFFLER.PRT and select Include.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

following:
r
• Select Faceted solid shrinkwrap.

Fo
• Edit the Name to muffler_env.

• Click OK in the Alert dialog box, if
necessary.
• Ensure that the Auto hole filling check
box is selected.
• Click OK.
component chooser.

By adding the _env suffix to the end of every envelope part name, you are able to easily
identify these parts as envelopes in your local file structure or data management software.
10. Open MUFFLER <MUFFLER_ENV.PRT>

• Observe the tessellated solid envelope
representing MUFFLER.PRT.
11. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar
to return to the assembly.
y
nl
12. At the bottom of the model tree, right-click MUFFLER <MUFFLER_ENV.PRT> and select
O
Representation > Use Envelope.
• Notice that the tessellated envelope is highlighted in the assembly when you select the
envelope in the model tree.
se
14. Select the Simp Rep tab if necessary, right-click the modified Master Rep(+), and select
Save.
U
15. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to drill_light and
click OK. al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Task 2: Create a surface subset shrinkwrap envelope and substitute it for the engine assembly.
1. Open ENGINE.ASM from the model tree.

2. Click Open from the Open Representation dialog box to open the Master Rep.
3. Select Envelope Manager from the Manage Views types drop-down menu.
4. Click New from the Envelope dialog box.
• Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope name ENVLP001 to
y
engine_assy.
nl
• Right-click ENGINE.ASM and select Include.
O
In the Envelope Definition component chooser, you select components that the envelope
will be substituting for, not components that will be included in the shrinkwrap definition.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

r
following:
Fo
• Select Surface subset shrinkwrap..

• Edit the Name to engine_assy_env.
• Ensure that the Auto hole filling check
box is selected.
• Click OK.
component chooser.

9. Open ENGINE_ASSY <ENGINE_ASSY_
ENV.PRT> from the model tree.
drop-down menu.
Observe the surface subset
shrinkwrap envelope representing
ENGINE.ASM.
y
nl
12. Click Close to return to ENGINE.ASM.
O
13. Click Close to return to DRILL.ASM.
14. In the model tree, expand the ENGINE.ASM node, right-click ENGINE_ASSY
<ENGINE_ASSY_ENV.PRT>, and select Representation > Use Envelope.
se
16. Right-click the modified Drill_Light(+) and select Save.
U
17. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog box.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Task 3: Create an all solid surfaces shrinkwrap envelope and substitute it
for the carburetor assembly.
1. Open CARBURETOR.ASM from the model tree.

2. Click Open in the Open Representation dialog box to open the Master Rep.
y
• Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope name ENVLP001 to carb_assy.
nl
• Right-click CARBURETOR.ASM and select Include.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
PT

following:
• Select All solid surfaces subset
shrinkwrap.
r
• Edit the Name to carb_assy_env.

Fo
• Click OK.
7. Click Browse and double-click
MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT in the Choose
template dialog box.

11. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, do the following:
• In the structure tree, right-click CARBURETOR.ASM and select Ignore.
• Right-click AIR_FILTER_COVER.PRT and select Consider.
• Click Open.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
12. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and select the Solidify resulting geometry check
box.
In
13. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

C

16. Open CARB_ASSY <CARB_ASSY_ENV.
PT
PRT> from the model tree.

drop-down menu.
r
Observe the all solid surfaces

Fo

CARBURETOR.ASM.

19. Click Close to return to CARBURETOR.
ASM.

21. In the model tree, expand the CARBURETOR.ASM node, right-click CARB_ASSY
<CARB_ASSY_ENV.PRT>, and select Representation > Use Envelope.
Task 4: Create an all solid surfaces shrinkwrap envelope and substitute it
y
for the handle main assembly.
nl
1. Open HANDLE_MAIN.ASM from the model tree.
2. Click Open in the Open Representation dialog box to open the Master Rep.
O
se
• Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope name ENVLP001 to
handle_main_assy.
U
• Right-click HANDLE_MAIN.ASM and select Include.
• Click Envelope Part. al
rn
te
In
C
rPT
Fo

following:
• Edit the Name to handle_main_assy_env.
• Click OK.

10. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, do the following:
• In the structure tree, right-click HANDLE_MAIN.ASM and select Ignore.
• Select HANDLE_MAIN.PRT.
• Press SHIFT, right-click HANDLE_PLATE.PRT, and select Consider.
• Click Open.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
11. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and select the Solidify resulting geometry check
In
box.
C

PT
15. Open HANDLE_MAIN_ASSY

<HANDLE_MAIN_ASSY_ENV.PRT>
r

Fo
drop-down menu.
Observe the active solid
HANDLE_MAIN.ASM.
18. Click Close to return to HANDLE_MAIN.ASM.

20. In the model tree, expand the HANDLE_MAIN.ASM node, right-click HANDLE_MAIN_ASSY
<HANDLE_MAIN_ASSY_ENV.PRT>, and select Representation > Use Envelope.
Task 5: Substitute the gearbox chuck assembly with one of its existing simplified reps.
y
1. In the model tree, right-click GEARBOX_CHUCK.ASM and select Representation > User
nl
Defined.
2. In the Select Rep dialog box, select OUTSIDES and click OK.
O
se
Task 6: Find and exclude all remaining bolt models.
U
1. In the view manager, right-click Drill_Light and select Redefine.
• Type bolt in the Find field.
al
• Right-click the selected models and click Set Representation to > Exclude.
rn
• Click Open.
te
In
C
rPT
Fo

Displayed.
5. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog
box.
Notice how many components are removed from the session memory. Opening and
y
working with the Drill_Light simplified rep requires significantly fewer system resources
nl
than the master rep.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 12
y
Understanding Advanced Simplified
nl
Rep Functionality
O
se
Module Overview
U
Once you have learned the basics of simplified representations, you can utilize advanced
functionality to define simplified reps by rules based on model size, location or proximity to other
components. You can also manage on-demand simplified rep options and create external reps.
al
Objectives
rn
• Search for components in simplified reps.
• Create simplified reps based on model size.
te
• Create simplified reps using zones.

• Create simplified reps based on distance.
In
• Create simplified reps using exterior components.

• Define simplified reps using rules.
• Utilize on-demand simplified reps.
C
• Create external simplified reps.

r PT
Fo

Searching for Components for Simplified Reps
You can use the Search tool to automate the selection of components referenced in a
simplified rep.
• Search Tool Uses:
– One time search
– Saved search
– Compound searches
• Search against:
y
– Attributes
nl
– History Figure 1 – Save Rule as Layer
– Status
– Geometry
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Search Attributes
al Figure 3 – Search Geometry
Searching for Components for Simplified Reps

rn
When creating simplified reps on a large assembly, the selection of components for a particular
rep can often be the most tedious task. You can use the Search tool to automate this task in the
te
following two ways:

• One time Search – Use the Search tool to select components and exclude or edit their
representation.
In
• Saved Search – A search is saved as a layer with an embedded rule. Once the search is
saved to a layer containing the search rule, components are added/removed automatically from
the layer based on the rule. You can then select all the components on the layer and exclude
C
or edit their representation.

You can also build a compound search. Selecting Build Query from the Options drop-down list
PT
enables you to add multiple queries to the search. This enables you to narrow down the search
results by combining multiple searches together with AND/OR operators.
Search Criteria
r
With the Search tool, you can search using various criteria, including the following. Note that
depending on the search type, you may need to edit the settings to look for components or solid
Fo
models accordingly.
• Attributes
– Name – Search for components by name. You can use wildcards such as asterisk (*) to select
multiple similarly named components. For example, you can search for BOLT* or *BOLT to
locate all components with names starting or ending with the text BOLT.
– Type – Search for components by type. For example, you can search for an assembly to locate
sub-assemblies, or you could search for Bulk Items, Parts, or Skeletons.
– Expression – Search for components by matching a parameter expression. For example, if all
components have a parameter for material, you can select all components that have ALUM as
the value for the material parameter.
– Size – Search for solid models by size. The system can locate components based on their
absolute or relative physical size.

• History
– ID – Search for a component with a particular component ID number.
– Number – Search for components with a specified component number or range.
• Status
– Regeneration – Search for components that are frozen, child of frozen, failed, packaged,
suppressed, and so on.
– Layer – Search for components on a particular name layer.
– Display – Search for solid models that are on a particular simplified rep, style state, or are
currently hidden.
y
– Parent/Child – Search for solid models that are parents or children of a selected component.
Options are available to limit the scope and extent of the parent/child relationship.
nl
– Copied Refs – Search for components that have copied references that are edited to a
selected status.
O
• Geometry
– Zone – Search for components or solid models that are inside or outside a defined zone.
– Distance – Search for components or solid models within a distance from a reference.
se
– Exterior Comps – Search for components or solid models that are on the exterior of an
assembly.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Searching for Components for Simplified Reps
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Search
DRILL_SEARCH.ASM
Task 1: Search for all bolts in the assembly.
y
nl
3. Select Component from the Look for drop-down list.
4. On the Attributes tab, ensure that Name is the selected rule.
O
5. Ensure that the Comparison criteria is equal
to has been selected from the drop-down list.
6. In the Value field, type BOLT*.
se
7. Click Find Now.
• Notice that Creo Parametric finds and lists
32 models meeting this criteria.
U
8. Press CTRL+A to select all found items.
al
Bolts with varying lengths and diameters of 4 mm, 5 mm, and 6 mm have been found.
rn
Task 2: Build a query to find bolts of specific sizes.

te
1. In the Search Tool dialog box, click New Search.

2. Click Options and select Build Query, if necessary.
In
3. In the Value field, type BOLT_4* and click Add New.

4. In the Value field, type BOLT_6* and click Add New.
An OR operator is placed between the two rules in the query.
C
PT
5. Click Find Now.

6. Press CTRL+A to select all listed items and
click Add Item .
7. Click Close.
r
Fourteen bolts with 4 mm or 6 mm

Fo
diameters are found.
Task 3: Create a simplified rep by excluding components from the query.
1. With the bolts still selected, right-click and select Representation > Exclude.
3. Right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save.
4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to no_bolt_4_6 and
click OK.

Task 4: Save queried components to a layer.
1. Double-click Master Rep to activate it.

2. Click Find .
3. In the Value field, type BOLT_5* and click
Find Now.
4. Press CTRL+A to select the 18 items found.
y
nl
5. In the Search Tool dialog box, click Options > Save Query.
O
6. In the Save Rules dialog box, type no_bolt_5 and click OK.
7. Click Close in the Search Tool dialog box and click Close from the view manager.
8. In the model tree, click Show and select Layer Tree.
se
9. Expand the NO_BOLT_5 layer to see the bolts that have been added to it by the query.
10. Right-click the layer and select Select Items.
U
11. In the graphics window, right-click and select Representation > Exclude.
al
14. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to no_bolt_5 and
rn
click OK.
15. Double-click Master Rep and click Close.
te

In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Simplified Reps by Size
You can use the Search tool to select components to be referenced in a simplified rep
based on size.
Bounding Box Size Type:
• Relative (0-1)
• Absolute (value)
Comparison:
y
• Equal to (=) , Not equal to (≠), Greater than
(>), Less than (<)
nl
• Greater than or equal to (≥), Less than or
equal to (≤)
O
Include All Models Figure 1 – Bounding Box
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Relative Size Figure 3 – Absolute Size
rn
Creating Simplified Reps by Size
You can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their size. Once you search for and
te
select Solid Models using the Search tool, you can exclude these models or edit their representation.
For example, you can select all components above or below a particular size and then exclude
them all at once in a simplified rep.
In
Model Size
To determine a model’s size, the system uses the same calculation as the Model Size functionality
C
in the Investigate group on the Model ribbon tab. This analysis places the smallest rectangular
bounding box that completely encompasses the model. Note that all model geometry is considered,
PT
whether it is solid or non-solid. The system then measures the length of the 3-D diagonal across the
bounding box. The length of this diagonal, in current model units, is used as the size of the model.
Size Type
r
When searching by size, there are two size types, Relative and Absolute. The Relative option
searches for models using a percentage scale. For example, a relative value of 0.15 can locate all
Fo
models that are 15% of the overall assembly size. The Absolute option searches for models using a
value. For example, typing a value of 150 can locate all models that are 150 model units.
For each size search, you can specify one of the following comparisons:
• Equal to
• Not equal to
• Greater than
• Less than
• Greater than or equal to
• Less than or equal to
You can also build a compound size search. For example, if you need to select all models that are
greater than 100 and less than 150, you can perform an initial search for models greater than

100, and then use the Build Query option to search within the results for models less than 150.
Additionally, you can toggle the compound operator to either AND or OR.
Include All Models

You can also use the Include All Models option to search within sub-assemblies.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps by Size
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Size DRILL_SIZE.ASM
Task 1: Search for components of a relative size.

y
3. Select Solid Model from the Look for drop-down list, if necessary.
nl
4. Select the Attributes tab and select Size as the Rule.
5. Ensure that Relative is selected from the Type drop-down list.
O
6. Select is less than from the Comparison drop-down list.
7. In the Value field, type 0.15 and ensure that the Include All Models check box is cleared.
8. Click Find Now.
se
• Notice that Creo Parametric finds and lists
53 solid models meeting this criteria.
U
9. Press CTRL+A to highlight all found items.
The solid models found are mostly
bolts and other small components.
al
10. Click Add Item and click Close.
rn
Task 2: Create a simplified rep by excluding the found components.
1. With the found models still selected, right-click

te
and select Representation > Exclude.

In
toolbar.
C
PT
4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified rep field to no_less_15_percent
and click OK.
5. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep. Leave the view manager open.
r
Fo

Task 3: Create a simplified rep by excluding components from the query.
1. Click Find .
2. If necessary, click Options and select Build Query.
This is not necessary if the Query Builder field is already open.
3. Select is greater than from the Comparison drop-down list.
y
4. Ensure that the Value field is still 0.15 and click Add New.
5. Select is less than from the Comparison drop-down list.
nl
6. In the Value field, type 0.50 and click Add New.
7. Click Find Now.
O
• Notice 80 items have been found.
8. Click on the or operator and select and.
se
9. Click Find Now.
• Notice 19 items have now been found.
10. Press CTRL+A, click Add Item , and then click Close.
U
Exclude.
al
rn
13. Edit the Simplified rep field to
no_15–50_percent and click OK.
te
In
Task 4: Save queried components to a layer.
1. Click the Investigate group drop-down menu and select Model Size .
C
2. Select DRILL_SIZE.ASM from the model tree.

• Notice the overall size is approximately 700 mm.
PT
3. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.
4. Click Find .
5. Select Absolute from the Type drop-down list.
r
6. Ensure is greater than is selected from the Comparison drop-down list.

Fo
7. In the Value field, type 120 and click Find Now.

8. Press CTRL+A to select the 21 found items.

10. Right-click, and select Representation >
Exclude.
12. Edit the Simplified rep field to no_larger_120
and click OK.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Simplified Reps using Zones
You can use zones to select components to be referenced in a simplified rep.
Searching by Zone:
• Inside Zones
• Outside Zones
Zone Types:
y
• Half-Space
• Inside-Outside
nl
• Radial Distance
• Offset Csys Figure 1 – Half-Space Zone
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Radial Distance Zone Figure 3 – Offset Csys Zone
rn
Creating Simplified Reps using Zones
You can search for components or solid models inside or outside a defined zone. Once selected,
te
you can exclude them or edit their representation with a simplified rep.
When searching for solid models, a component is selected if any solid geometry is within or is
crossing the zone boundary. When searching for components, a component is selected if any solid
In
or non-solid geometry (datum feature, for example) is within or crossing the zone boundary.
Zone Types
C
Zones are created and managed as a type of cross-section within the view manager. You can
create the following four types of zones:
PT
• Half-Space – You define this type of zone by selecting a datum plane or planar surface as a
reference. You can then flip the direction of the zone to be on either side of the reference. An
example of this type of zone is shown in Figure 1. The zone direction is illustrated by the arrows.
r
• Inside-Outside – You define this type of zone by selecting an enclosed surface quilt as a reference.
You can then flip the direction of the zone to be on the inside or outside of the quilt (not shown).
Fo
• Radial Distance From – You define this type of zone by selecting a vertex or datum point or
coordinate system as a reference. You then specify a distance value to define a spherical zone.
An example of this type of zone is shown in Figure 2.
• Offset Csys – You define this type of zone by selecting a coordinate system as a reference. You
then define a rectangular zone by typing positive or negative (+/-) values for the X, Y, and Z
directions. An example of this type of zone is shown in Figure 3.
You can also build compound zones by defining multiple zones and then linking them with AND/OR
statements. For example, you can create a zone by selecting two parallel planes as half-space
references.
You can then define the zone to include all components on the positive side of the first plane AND
all the components on the negative side of the second plane, thereby selecting all components
between the planes.

PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps using Zones
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Zone DRILL_ZONE.ASM
Task 1: Search for components in a Radial Distance From zone.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

y
nl
4. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar and select the Sections tab.
5. Click New > Zone, type zone1, and press ENTER.
O
6. Select Radial Distance From from the
drop-down list.
se
7. Select Point from the From drop-down list.
8. Type 90 as the Radius and press ENTER.
9. Select datum point APNT0 from the model.
U
10. Click OK and click Close from the view
manager.
al
geometry.
rn
Radial Distance zones cannot display a clipped cut if they are set to active.
te

In
13. In the Look for drop-down list, select Solid Model, if necessary.
14. Select the Geometry tab and ensure Zone is the selected Rule.
15. Ensure that Inside the zone is selected from the Comparison drop-down list.
C
16. Ensure that Zone1 is selected from the Value drop-down list, and select the Show Selected
Zones check box.
PT
17. Click Find Now.

18. Press CTRL+A to select the 14 items.
20. With the found models still selected, right-click, and select Representation > Exclude.
r
Fo
21. Click View Manager and select the Simp

Rep tab.
23. Edit the Simplified rep field to exclude_zone1
and click OK.
24. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep and leave the view manager open.
Task 2: Search for components in an Offset Csys zone.
1. Select the Sections tab and click New > Zone.

2. Type zone2 and press ENTER.

3. Select Offset CSYS from the drop-down
list.
4. Select CSYS from the model tree.
5. Edit the offset values as follows:
• X1: –35 Y1: –50 Z1: 55
• X2: 35 Y2: 25 Z2: 200
6. With your cursor in the Z2 field, press ENTER.
y
7. If required, click Change Orientation to
ensure that the zone is labeled as Inside.
nl
8. Click Preview.
9. Click OK and click Close from the view
O
manager.
geometry.
se
11. Click Find .
12. Select Zone2 from the Value drop-down list and select the Show Selected Zones check box.
U
13. Click Find Now.
14. Press CTRL+A to select the 15 items.
al
16. With the found models still selected, right-click, and select Representation > Exclude.
rn
18. Select the Simp Rep tab, right-click Master
te

19. Edit the Simplified rep field to exclude_zone2
In
and click OK.

C

r PT
Fo

Creating Simplified Reps by Distance
You can select components that are a specified distance from a selected reference to be
included in a simplified rep.
Comparison:
• Less than
• Greater than
Value
y
Reference:
nl
• Point/Vtx
• Csys
O
• And so on
se
Figure 1 – Search by Distance
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Radial Distance

te
Creating Simplified Reps by Distance

You can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their distance from a reference.
In
When searching for solid models, a component is selected if any solid geometry is within or is
crossing the distance value.
C
When searching for components, a component is selected if any solid or non-solid geometry (datum
feature, for example) is within or crossing the distance value.
PT
Once you search for and select components or solid models using the Search tool, you can exclude
these models or edit their representation. For example, you can select all components within
a particular radius and then exclude them all at once in a simplified rep. This type of Search is
defined by selecting a vertex or datum point or coordinate system as a reference. Then, you specify
r
a distance value to define a spherical radius.

Fo
You can also select all components within or outside of the sphere.

PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps by Distance
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Distance
DRILL_DIST.ASM
Task 1: Search for components in a Radial Distance From zone.
y
types: .
nl
3. In the Look for drop-down list, select Solid
Model, if necessary.
O
4. Select the Geometry tab if necessary and
select Distance as the Rule.
se
5. Select Point from the Type drop-down list.
6. Pre-select the reference datum point APNT0
from the model, and then select it.
U
7. Ensure that is less than is selected from the
Comparison drop-down list.
8. Edit the Value field to 75 and press ENTER.
al
9. Click Find Now.
rn
10. Press CTRL+A to select the six items in the
list.
te
Task 2: Create a simplified rep by setting the status of found models to master.
In
1. With the found models still selected,

right-click, and select Representation >
Master.
C

toolbar and select the Simp Rep tab.
PT

4. Edit the Simplified rep field to
include_dist_handle and click OK.
r

Fo

Creating Simplified Reps using Exterior Components
You can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their location relative to the
exterior of an assembly.
• Comparison values:
– is equal to
♦ Finds exterior components
– is not equal to
y
♦ Finds interior components
• Adjusting the Quality Level modifies the
nl
number of components found. Figure 1 – Complete Assembly
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Quality Level of 2 Figure 3 – Quality Level of 4
Creating Simplified Reps using Exterior Components

al
You can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their assembled location relative to
rn
the outside (or exterior) of an assembly.
When searching for solid models, only solid geometry is considered in the calculation. When
searching for components, both solid and non-solid geometry (datum features, for example) are
te
considered in the calculation.

Once you search for and select components or solid models using the Search tool, you can exclude
In
these models or edit their representation. For example, you can select all components on the
exterior of an assembly and then exclude them all at once in a simplified rep. This type of search
is defined by selecting a comparison type and a quality level.
C
• Comparison – The comparison determines whether the search locates the exterior components
and then selects them, or selects components that are not the exterior components. Using this
PT
option effectively enables you to select exterior or interior components.

• Quality Level – There is a 1–10 quality level setting that determines how thoroughly the system
searches for exterior components.
In the figures, you can see the complete assembly and two representations simplified by adjusting
r
the quality level. The representation containing the fewest components was created using
Fo
a quality level of 4. The representation containing more components illustrates the exterior
components excluded using a quality level of 2.

PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps using Exterior Components
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Exterior DRILL_EXT.ASM
Task 1: Search for exterior components of the assembly.

y
3. From the Look for drop-down list, select Solid Model, if necessary.
nl
4. Select the Geometry tab if necessary and ensure Exterior Comps is the selected Rule.
5. Ensure that is equal to is selected from the Comparison drop-down list.
O
6. Select 4 from the Value [Quality Level] drop-down list.
7. Click OK from the Exterior Comps dialog box.
8. Click Find Now.
se
9. Press CTRL+A to select the 45 items in the
list.
U
al
Task 2: Create a simplified rep by excluding the exterior models.
rn
te
toolbar.
3. Select the Simp Rep tab if necessary,
In
right-click Master Rep(+), and select Save.
4. Edit the Simplified rep field to no_exterior and click OK.

C

PT
Task 3: Search for components not on the exterior of the assembly.
1. Click Find .
2. Ensure that Solid Model is selected from the Look for drop-down list.
r
3. Ensure that Exterior Comps is selected as the Rule.

Fo
4. Select is not equal to from the Comparison

drop-down list.
5. With the Quality Level still at 4, click Find
Now.
6. Press CTRL+A to select the 25 items in the
list.

Task 4: Create a simplified rep by excluding the interior models.

y
4. Edit the Simplified rep field to no_interior and click OK.
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Defining Simplified Reps Using Rules
You can use rules to automatically search for, select, and perform an action on components
in a simplified rep.
Model Rules:
• Evaluate Rules
• Edit Rules
Rule Condition:
y
• Rule Editor
nl
• Similar to Search tool
Rule Action:
O
• Exclude Figure 1 – Rule Conditions
• Master Rep
• Automatic Rep
se
• Default Envelope
U
al
rn
Figure 2 – Original Assembly Figure 3 – Simp Rep with Evaluated Rules
Defining Simplified Reps Using Rules

te
Within a simplified rep, you can configure rule actions that automatically search for, select, and
perform an action on components. If components are added or removed from the assembly, you can
In
return to the rule actions and update the rule. You can also create multiple rules within a simplified
rep. If rules attempt an action on the same component, the latest rule in the list overrides an earlier
rule. You can also reorder the rules within the Rule Actions list.
C
Within the simplified rep component chooser, you can create or edit rule conditions by clicking
Model Rules > Edit Rules. To evaluate rules that already exist in the simplified rep, click Model
PT
Rules > Evaluate Rules.

Each rule action consists of a rep action and a condition. When creating a condition, the Rule Editor
dialog box appears. The Rule Editor dialog box is nearly identical to the Search tool, except that
the resulting search rule is executed inside the simplified rep. Like the Search tool, you can also
build a compound rule. Selecting Build Query from the Options drop-down list enables you to add
r
multiple queries to the search. This enables you to narrow down the search results by combining
Fo
multiple searches together with AND/OR operators.
Conditions
To define the condition, the rule editor enables you to search using various criteria, including the
following. Note that depending on the search type, you may need to edit the settings to search
for components or solid models accordingly.
• Attributes:
– Name – Search for components by name. You can use wildcards such as asterisk (*) to select
multiple similarly named components. For example, you can search for BOLT* or *BOLT to
locate all components with names starting or ending with the text BOLT.
– Type – Search for components by type. For example, you can search for an assembly to locate
sub-assemblies, or you can search for bulk items, parts, or skeletons.

– Expression – Search for components by matching a parameter expression. For example, if all
components have a parameter for material, you can select all components that have ALUM as
the value for the material parameter.
– Size – Search for solid models by size. The system can locate components based on their
absolute or relative physical size.
• History:
– ID – Search for a component with a particular component ID number.
– Number – Search for components with a specified component number or range.
• Status:
y
– Regeneration – Search for components that are frozen, child of frozen, failed, packaged,
suppressed, and so on.
nl
– Layer – Search for components on a particular name layer.
– Display – Search for solid models that are on a particular simplified rep, style state, or are
O
currently hidden.
– Parent/Child – Search for solid models that are parents or children of a selected component.
Options are available to limit the scope and extent of the parent/child relation.
se
– Copied Refs – Search for components that have copied references that are edited to a
selected status.
• Geometry:
U
– Zone – Search for components or solid models that are inside or outside a defined zone.
– Distance – Select items based on their distance from another item.
– Exterior Comps – Search for components or solid models that are on the exterior of an
al
assembly.
rn
Rep Actions
After you define the condition (search rule), you can select a rep action to be performed
te
automatically on the results of the search. Common rep actions include the following:
• Exclude – The components selected by the rule are edited to Exclude in the simplified rep.
In
• Master Rep – The components selected by the rule are edited to Master Rep in the simplified rep.
• Automatic Rep – The components selected by the rule are edited to Automatic Rep in the
simplified rep.
C
• Default Envelope – The components selected by the rule are edited to Default Envelope in the
simplified rep.
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Defining Simplified Reps Using Rules
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Rules DRILL_RULE.ASM
Task 1: Create a simplified rep using rules.

y
3. In the view manager, select the Simp Rep tab, if necessary, and click New.
nl
4. Type no-bolts_no-ext and press ENTER.
5. Click Model Rules > Edit Rules from the Edit component chooser.
O
6. In the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT dialog box, do the following:
• Click Add Condition .
• Right-click Select condition and select New.
se
• Edit the rule name Cond0001 to bolts and press ENTER.
7. In the Rule Editor dialog box, do the following:
U
• Ensure that Solid Model is selected from
the Look for drop-down list.
• Select the Attributes tab, if necessary, and
al
ensure that Name is the selected Rule.
• Ensure that is equal to is selected from the
rn
Comparison drop-down list.
• In the Value field, type BOLT*.
• Click OK.
te
8. In the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT dialog box, do the following:

In
• Click Add Condition .

• Right-click Select condition and select New.
• Edit the rule name Cond0001 to exterior and press ENTER.
C
9. In the Rule Editor dialog box, do the following:

• Select the Geometry tab and select Exterior Comps as the Rule.
PT
• Ensure that is equal to is selected from the Comparison drop-down list.

• Select 4 from the Value [Quality Level] drop-down list.
• Click OK from the Exterior Comps dialog box.
• Click Preview Results and click OK from the Confirm Evaluation dialog box.
r
Fo
• Press CTRL+A to select the 53 items in the list and click OK.
• Click OK from the Confirm Evaluation dialog box.
The Confirm Evaluation dialog box warns you that, because you are working in a
simplified rep with excluded components, you may need to bring additional models into
session to perform the evaluation.

10. In the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT dialog box,
ensure that the Rep Action for both rules is
set to Exclude and then click OK.
y
• Right-click DRILL_RULE.ASM and click Set Representation to > Master.
• Click Model Rules > Evaluate Rules.
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
Task 2: Assemble a bolt in the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT simplified rep.

In
1. In the ribbon, click Assemble from the

Component group. Select BOLT_2_5-12.PRT
and click Open.
C
2. Assemble the bolt to the hole, as shown in

the figure.
PT

r
toolbar. On the Simp Rep tab, click Edit >

Fo
Evaluate Model Rules

5. Click Close.
Because the rules are re-evaluated, the
BOLT_2_5-12.PRT is excluded from the
simplified rep, along with all the other
bolt models.

Using On-Demand Simplified Reps
On-demand functionality enables you to work with a minimum amount of model data and
automatically retrieve and remove additional design data as required.
On-Demand Retrieval Settings:
• Prompt – Specify the On-Demand rep type.
• Never prompt – Auto On-Demand rep retrieval.
(the default)
• Disable
y
Other On-Demand Settings:
nl
• Activation
• Regeneration
O
• Selection
• Editing
• Cleanup
se
Figure 1 – On-Demand Settings
Using On-Demand Simplified Reps
U
Typically, when an assembly component is excluded from a simplified representation, it cannot be
seen or selected. When the same component is edited to a geometry rep, its geometry is available
to be selected for assembly or measurements, but the component's features are not available for
al
selection or modification. Furthermore, if the same component is edited to a graphics rep, the
component is visible but geometry and features are not available for selection.
rn
On-demand functionality can manage the representation levels of components automatically, thereby
improving system performance. On-demand functionality enables you to work with a minimum
amount of model data and automatically retrieve and remove additional design data as required.
te
You can control on-demand settings in the following ways:

• Specify whether and when to retrieve components not completely included in a simplified
In
representation.
• Retrieve master or geometry representations of components currently in a non-editable rep
such as a graphics rep.
C
• Define the conditions under which the on-demand simplified representations update dynamically.
• Enable or disable dynamic updating.
PT
• Retrieve and erase components that you need to reference temporarily while you are working.
On-Demand Retrieval Settings

There are three modes of operation for on-demand retrieval:
r
• Prompt – A confirmation is required before on-demand retrieval. You can specify the On-demand
Fo
rep type that is retrieved.

• Never prompt (the default) – The system retrieves On-Demand reps automatically without
confirmation.
• Disable – On-demand retrieval is disabled.
You can also retrieve back up references. You can select the Retrieve referenced models for backed
up references check box to retrieve the original model of any backed-up references. Upon retrieval,
the backed-up references are updated to reflect edits in the original models.
Other On-Demand Settings

There are several additional settings for on-demand reps, which are organized into the following
categories:
• Activation:

– On-demand activation – Retrieves the master representation for activating a component.
• Regeneration:
– On-demand regeneration – Retrieves parent components in a higher representation level
upon model regeneration.
– Automatic or Master – Enables automatic selection of the representation type to retrieve, or
you can retrieve all models in their master representation.
• Selection:
– On-demand selection – Retrieves components in a higher representation level for selecting
internal items.
y
– Automatic or Master – Enables automatic selection of the representation type to retrieve, or
you can retrieve all models in their master representation.
nl
• Editing:
– On-demand editing – Retrieves simplified components and their parents in a higher
O
representation level for editing purposes.
– Automatic, Master, or Master with ancestors – Enables automatic selection of the
representation type to retrieve, retrieve all models in their master representation, or retrieve all
se
models in their master representation with its direct ancestors.
• Cleanup:
– On-demand cleanup – Removes unmodified simplified representations retrieved on-demand.
U
– Restore Representation or Restore Representation and Erase – Retains the On-Demand Reps
in session even when no longer used, or erases all the unused On-Demand Reps from session.
al
Memory Management
In some cases components that are retrieved using on-demand reps may remain in memory. To
rn
erase on-demand components that are not currently in use, click File > Manage Session > Erase
Unused Model Reps.
te
When you modify values of components in a graphics representation, the edits do not take
effect until the model is regenerated. To avoid losing changes, regenerate the assembly
before you remove the retrieved components from memory.
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Using On-Demand Simplified Reps
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_On-Demand
DRILL_ON-DEMAND.ASM
Task 1: Reference models opened using on-demand.
y
toolbar.
nl
tab, if necessary, and double-click the Light
O
rep.
4. Click Close.
se
5. In the model tree, expand the ENGINE.ASM, GEARBOX_CHUCK.ASM and
DRILL_CHUCK.ASM nodes.
U
8. Click OK to erase the listed components from memory.
al
group, select SPARK_PLUG.PRT and click
rn
Open.
10. In the graphics window, click CYLINDER.PRT.
te
11. Select the flat and cylindrical assembly

reference surfaces to complete the
Coincident constraints.
In

dashboard.
C
Task 2: Edit the on-demand settings.

PT
1. Click File > Options.

2. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Assembly category and click On
Demand Settings from the Component retrieval settings group.
r
3. In the On-Demand Settings dialog box, select Prompt as the On-demand setting.
Fo
• Select the Cleanup category, and select Restore Representation and Erase.
• Read the Confirmation dialog box and click Yes.
• Click OK.
4. Click OK from the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.
5. Click Assemble , select STD_BIT_25MM.PRT and click Open.

6. In the graphics window, click CHUCK.PRT, the part to which the drill bit is to be assembled.

7. Assemble the bit using two Coincident
constraints, as shown.
The Restore Representation and
Erase cleanup setting automatically
erased the On-Demand Automatic
Rep from session memory.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating External Simplified Reps
You can use external simplified representations to store representations of assemblies
without modifying the original assembly.
External Simplified Reps:

• Separate *.ASM file.
• All components are the same as those in
the reference assembly.
• Can retrieve in the Open Rep dialog box.
y
• Contain only the models used in the
nl
external simplified rep.
O
se
Figure 1 – Copy As External
U
al
rn
te
In
Figure 2 – Open External Rep

C
Creating External Simplified Reps

PT
External simplified representations are stored as special assembly type files with a standard
*.ASM extension. Because it is a separate assembly file, you can even manage it using a data
management system such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill PDMLink.
Think of an external simplified rep as a placeholder for a simplified view of a design assembly. You
can create multiple external simplified representations to correspond to different assembly areas and
r
levels of detail. Low-level components without top-level and intermediate-level assemblies can be
Fo
included, so multiple users can work simultaneously. The use of external simplified representations
minimizes the risk of accidental modifications to top-level assemblies.
All the components in an external simplified representation are the same as those in the reference
assembly. Therefore, it is not necessary to propagate modifications made to the external simplified
representation or reference assembly. All modifications to external simplified representations are
automatically reflected in the reference assembly.
• External simplified representations are stored in a separate assembly (.ASM) file with an external
simplified representation subtype.
• The creation, redefinition, or removal of an external simplified representation does not change the
reference assembly.
• It is not necessary for the reference assembly to be in session when working with external
simplified representations.

• You can include components from any level of the reference assembly in the external simplified
representation.
• You can exclude the reference assembly and intermediate sub-assemblies even if low-level
components are included.
• When a model contains substituted components, the top-level assembly is always included in the
external simplified representation.
• The location of components included in external simplified representations is fully associated with
corresponding components of the reference assembly.
• You can specify whether components included in external simplified representations can be
modified or used for reference purposes only.
y
• You can create references within external simplified representations. Creo Parametric treats such
nl
references as if they were created in the reference assembly.
• You can perform component and feature operations on the top level of an external simplified
representation model.
O
There are three ways to create an external simplified rep:
• You can click File > New. In the New dialog box, you can select the External simplified
se
representation Sub-type, and then specify the reference assembly model.
• From the view manager, select a simplified representation and click Edit > Copy As External.
• You can also click File > Save As > Save a Copy to save a copy of your assembly by specifying
U
External Simplified Representation as the Type of file to be saved.
Opening an External Simplified Rep

al
You can open an external simplified rep by selecting its file name in the File Open dialog box.
Specify Assembly (*.asm) as the Type and External simplified representation as the Sub-type to
rn
filter out all other assembly types.. Also, you can open an external simplified rep that is related to a
model by clicking External Rep in the Open Representation dialog box.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating External Simplified Reps
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_External
DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM
Task 1: Create an external simplified rep using the Copy As External feature.
y
toolbar and select the Simp Rep tab.
nl
3. Double-click the Engine rep.
4. Right-click Engine from the Names list and
O
select Copy As External.
5. Type engine_ext and click OK to open the
external rep.
se
6. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK.
U
8. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK.
al
10. In the File Open dialog box, select, but do not open, DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM.
rn
11. Select Open Representation from the Open drop-down list.
12. In the Open Representation dialog box, click External Rep.
13. Select ENGINE_EXT.ASM and click Open.
te
14. In the model tree, expand the DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM node.

• Notice only the components from the Engine rep are included.
In
The model tree only shows components included in the external simplified rep. The
C
view manager of an external rep only lists two simplified rep types, Definition Rep and
Default Rep.
PT
16. Click Close .

17. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK.
r
Only components of the external rep are brought into session.

Fo
Task 2: Create a new external simplified rep.

2. In the New dialog box, select Assembly as the Type and External Simp.Rep. as the
Sub-type.
3. Edit the name to eng_carb_ext and click OK.
4. Select DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM and click Open.

• Right-click DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM and click Set Representation to > Exclude.
• Expand the DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM node.
• Select ENGINE.ASM, press CTRL, right-click CARBURETOR.ASM, and click Set
Representation to > Master.
• Click Open to complete the external simplified rep.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 13
y
Creating and Using Assembly Structure
nl
and Skeletons
O
se
Module Overview
U
Creating an assembly structure and using skeletons enables you to plan and design stages of
assemblies. In this module, you learn how to create an assembly structure in the model tree that
you can use to plan the assembly.
al
You also learn how to use skeletons for space claims, interfaces, component placement, and motion.
Finally, you learn how to create components from shared skeleton references.
rn
Objectives
te

• Create an assembly structure.
In
• Create skeletons for space claims, interfaces, and placement.

• Copy models into skeletons.
• Create multiple skeletons with connections.
C
• Share skeleton geometry.

• Create a motion skeleton and a corresponding sketch.
PT
• Create bodies and assign connections for a motion skeleton.

• Create solid models from a motion skeleton.
r
Fo

Understanding Skeletons
You can use a skeleton to create the framework of your design.
Purpose:
• Design Framework
• Common Reference
• Propagate Change
Skeleton Properties:
y
• First Component
nl
• No Mass Props
• Blue Color
O
Figure 1 – Skeleton
Contents:
• Datum Features
se
• Sketches
• Surfaces
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Final Design

In
Understanding Skeletons
Skeletons are powerful tools that you can use to create the 3-D layout or framework of an assembly
C
design. Skeletons can serve as a common reference source for geometry and assembling
components. Any edits to the skeleton automatically update components assembled to the skeleton
PT
and components that utilize shared geometry.

Skeletons are commonly used to do the following:
• Create space claims for components.
r
• Create interfaces and placement references between components.

Fo
• Provide motion between components – either by modifying skeleton dimensions or through

the use of mechanism connections.
Skeletons are components that are given special properties. When created, a skeleton automatically
becomes the first component of the assembly so that each subsequent component can reference it.
Skeletons do not affect the mass properties of the assembly, regardless of the geometry created in
them. In addition, skeletons are easily recognized in the assembly due to the blue color they are
assigned by default to help distinguish them from other components.
Skeletons typically contain a variety of datum features such as datum planes, axes, points, and
coordinate systems. Skeletons also commonly contain sketches and surfaces to represent
geometry that will be created in components. Although not as common, a skeleton can contain solid
geometry; however, you can only share the surfaces of the solids.

Benefits of a Skeleton
An example of the advantages of using a skeleton
when assembling components can be seen in the
figure with the following scenario:
In this non-skeleton design scenario:
• Component A is assembled first.
• Component B is then assembled to A.
• Component C is then assembled by referencing
y
components A and B.
• Component D is then assembled by referencing
nl
No Skeleton
components B and C.
This scenario can cause the following problems:
O
• Components A and B cannot be deleted since the other components reference it.
• If major changes are necessary for multiple components (for example: overall length change),
se
each component has to be modified separately, possibly causing a regeneration failure of
the next downstream component.
In this skeleton-based design scenario:
U
• Components A, B, C, and D are each assembled to
the skeleton and not to each other. al
• Components A, B, C, and D each contain shared
geometry reference from the skeleton.
rn
With Skeleton
This skeleton-based design scenario has the following advantages:
te
• Components A, B, C, and D can each be deleted separately since they are assembled to
the skeleton independently.
In
• If major changes are necessary for multiple components (for example: overall length change),
the skeleton can be modified, propagating edits to each one of the components that share
skeleton geometry.
C
rPT
Fo

Creating an Assembly Structure
You can begin your design with a populated assembly structure.
Purpose:
• Up Front Planning
• Top-Down Design
Component Types:
• Skeletons
y
• Unplaced
nl
• Included
• Packaged
• Bulk Items Figure 1 – Assembly Structure
O
Creating an Assembly Structure
se
In the design process, you can create the structure of an assembly first, without defining any
component geometry or specific placement constraints. Creating an assembly structure helps
you plan your project by enabling you to delegate tasks to team members. You can also assign
non-geometric information up front in the form of parameters such as part number, cost, supplier,
U
and material.
Component Types
al
New components for assembly structures are typically created from model templates. You can
create model templates for standard and sheetmetal parts, as well as assemblies. You should also
rn
use these templates when creating skeletons.
You can create the following types of components in an assembly structure:
te
• Skeletons – You can create one or more skeletons per assembly. The first skeleton is assembled
by the system using a default constraint. Subsequent skeletons are assembled like typical
components. You can assemble them by default or by using constraints or connections. You can
In
have multiple skeletons at the top level or a single top-level skeleton and multiple skeletons
at the sub-assembly level.
• Parts – You can create standard or sheetmetal parts. You can assemble them by default if
C
suitable geometry does not exist, or you can assemble them using constraints or connections to
the skeleton or other components.
PT
• Sub-assemblies – You can create sub-assemblies, as desired, to organize the assembly.

• Unplaced Components – You can create a new component or sub-assembly and then select the
Unplaced option. The Leave component unplaced option leaves the new component listed in
the model tree, but it is physically unplaced and not visible in the model. You can redefine the
component to locate it with constraints or connections at any time. Unplaced components are
r
shown in gray with a dashed rectangle in the model tree.

Fo
• Included Components – You can include existing components or sub-assemblies in your assembly
structure. This is useful for standard components or hardware that has been previously modeled.
You can redefine the component to locate it with constraints or connections at any time.
• Packaged Components – If you know an approximate location for new or existing parts or
assemblies, you can assemble them, drag them to a location, and then complete the component
with zero or partial constraints. This is particularly useful for situations when a component will be
mated to a plane, but the exact location is not known yet. You can redefine the component to
locate it with additional constraints or connections at any time. Packaged components appear
with a small hollow rectangle next to the component icon in the model tree. Children of packaged
components appear with a double rectangle icon.
• Bulk Items – You can also add bulk items to an assembly structure to represent components that
do not require design geometry. Typical bulk items include lubricants, adhesives, paint, and
so on. Bulk items are components that appear in the model tree and the Bill of Materials, but

do not contain any modeled geometry. However, you can add parameters to bulk items, such
as a description, type, or quantity.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
rPT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly Structure
Advanced_Assembly\Structure AC40.ASM
Task 1: Create an assembly structure in the empty assembly.

types: .
y
3. Select Skeleton Model as the Type and
nl
Standard as the Sub-type, if necessary.
4. Edit the name to main_skel and click OK.
O
5. Click Browse and double-click
MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT in the Choose
template dialog box.
se
Watch the structure you are creating develop in the model tree as you work through
U
this procedure.
7. Click Create .
al
8. Select Part as the Type, edit the name to frame, and click OK.
9. Ensure that the Leave component unplaced check box is cleared and click OK.
rn
11. Click Complete Component from the dashboard.
te
12. Click Create .

In
13. Select Subassembly as the Type and Standard as the Sub-type, if necessary.
14. Edit the name to engine and click OK.
15. Click Browse and double-click MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM in the Choose template dialog box.
C

PT

19. Activate ENGINE.ASM.
20. Click Create .
r
Fo
21. Select Part as the Type, edit the name to block, and click OK.
22. Click Browse and double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT in the Choose template dialog box.
26. Click Create .

27. Edit the name to crank and click OK.
28. Expand the ENGINE.ASM node.
29. Select the Leave component unplaced
check box and click OK.

Unplaced components are identified with a special gray icon.
30. Click Create .

31. Edit the name to piston and click OK.
33. Click Create .
y
34. Edit the name to rod and click OK.
nl
36. Activate AC40.ASM.
O
37. Select Include from the Assemble types
drop-down menu in the Component group.
38. Select BOLT.PRT and click Open.
se
39. Select BOLT_8 as the instance and click
Open.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating Skeletons for Space Claims
You can use skeletons to define and share common design references.
Purpose:
• Claim 3-D Space for Components
• Common Reference
• Propagate Change
Contents:
y
• Surfaces
nl
• Datum Features Figure 1 – Space Claim
O
se
U
al Figure 2 – Completed Design
Creating Skeletons for Space Claims

You can use skeletons to allocate or claim 3-D space before modeling or assembling the
rn
components. A skeleton can provide a common reference for geometry to be shared to multiple
components. You can then modify the space claim features in a skeleton, propagating change to
one or multiple components.
te
Space claim skeletons are comprised of the following:

In
• Surfaces – Typically, surfaces and datum planes are used for space claim references in a skeleton.
You can create open or enclosed surfaces to define the occupied volume for components or
sub-assemblies. The surface can be as simple or as complex as required to convey the design
intent. You can also use the external shrinkwrap functionality to create an engulfing surface over
C
an existing part or sub-assembly to represent a component that is to be placed in the assembly.

• Datum Features – A series of offset datum planes can also be useful to claim space for
PT
components. Offset planes are easily adjustable in size, and you can use them alone or in
conjunction with surfaces in the skeleton.
In the figures, a skeleton model contains surfaces used to claim space for the interior
engine components, such as the piston, connecting rod, and crankshaft. An offset datum
r
plane is used to help claim space for the overall engine block height.
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Skeletons for Space Claims
Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Space-Claims AC40.ASM
Task 1: Add surface geometry to the skeleton model.

types: .
y
2. Open MAIN_SKEL.PRT from the model tree.
nl
3. Click Plane from the Datum group.
4. Select datum plane TOP and drag the handle
upwards to an offset of 54.
O
5. Select the Properties tab, edit the datum's
name to height, and click OK.
se
6. With the datum plane HEIGHT still selected,
click Extrude from the Shapes group.
U
7. Sketch a 21 diameter circle centered on the
sketch references.
8. Click OK .
al
rn
te
9. In the dashboard, click Surface .

10. Edit the depth to To Selected and select
datum plane TOP.
In

dashboard.
C
PT
12. In the model tree, select datum plane FRONT

r
and click Extrude .

Fo
13. Sketch a 28 diameter circle centered on the

sketch references.
14. Click OK .

15. In the dashboard, click Surface .
16. Edit the depth to Symmetric and edit it
to 32.
18. Disable Plane Display .
19. Edit Extrude 2.
Notice the features of the new
y
extrude feature.
nl
O
Task 2: Merge the surface geometry.
se
window to de-select all geometry and
features.
U
Extrude 1 and Extrude 2.
3. Click Merge from the Editing group.
4. In the graphics window, click the direction
al
arrows so that the merge preview appears,
as shown in the figure.
rn
te

features.
In

C
r PT
Fo

Creating Skeletons for Placement References
You can use skeletons to define placement references.
Purpose:
• Define component interfaces
• Define placement references
• Propagate change
Contents:
y
• Sketches
nl
• Surfaces
• Datum features Figure 1 – Placement References
O
se
Figure 2 – Component Interfaces
U Figure 3 – Models Assembled to a Skeleton

al
Creating Skeletons for Placement References
rn
You can use skeletons to define the interfaces between adjacent or mating components, and also to
provide common references for assembling components.
te
Skeleton features created to represent interfaces can provide the shape and/or location of the
interfaces between components. You can copy the interfaces to multiple components to provide
In
a common reference for creating solid geometry. You can modify the interface features in the
skeleton, propagating changes to one or multiple components.
You can also use skeletons to define component placement. Therefore, you can modify the
C
placement of single or multiple components with edits to the skeleton. Component placement
examples include the following:
PT
• An axis in the skeleton to provide a partial reference for assembling a component.

• A coordinate system to provide a complete reference for assembling a component.
• A series of sketched lines representing an adjustable mechanical linkage. Once the components
are assembled to the skeleton, you can edit lengths and/or angles of the skeleton sketches to
r
update the model locations and/or size.

Fo
Typically, sketches, surfaces, and various datum features are used for interface and placement
references in a skeleton. These features can be as simple or as complex as required to convey
the design intent.
In Figure 2, a skeleton model contains a sketched line, surfaces, and axes to represent the
length and hole interfaces of the component. You can use these references to create, not
only the connecting rod shown in the figure, but also other components that assemble to it.
In Figure 3, datum planes and axes are created to define common axis interfaces. These
axes can be referenced by the engine block, piston, and crankshaft to create geometry. In
addition, the bolts can also use the axes to define their placement.

PROCEDURE - Creating Skeletons for Placement References
Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Placement AC40.ASM
Task 1: Create axes for use as assembly placement references.

types: .
y
2. Open MAIN_SKEL.PRT from the model tree.
nl
3. Click Axis from the Datum group.
4. Select a surface of Extrude 1, as shown.
O
5. In the Datum Axis dialog box, select the
Properties tab, edit the Name to cyl, and
click OK.
se
window to de-select the axis CYL.
U
7. Click Axis and select the surface of
Extrude 2, as shown.
al
Properties tab, edit the Name to crank, and
rn
click OK.
te
In
Task 2: Create datum planes for use as assembly placement references.

C
1. Enable Plane Display .

PT
2. Select datum plane RIGHT and click Plane from the Datum group.
3. Drag the handle to an offset of 20, as shown.
4. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select the
r
Display tab.
Fo
• Select the Adjust outline check box and

select Reference from the drop-down list.
5. Select the upper cylindrical surface of
Extrude 2 as the reference.
6. On the Properties tab, edit the Name to
offset and click OK.

Task 3: Create an axis and reference the datum plane OFFSET.
1. With datum plane OFFSET already selected,

click Axis .
2. Click Plane .
3. Select datum plane FRONT and drag the
handle to a forward offset of 10, as shown.
4. Click OK in the Datum Plane dialog box.
y
nl
Display tab.
• Select the Adjust outline check box and
O
select Reference from the drop-down list.
6. Select the upper cylindrical surface of
Extrude 2 as the reference.
se
7. Select the Properties tab, edit the Name to
hole1, and click OK.
U
features.
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Copying a Model to a Skeleton
You can create a skeleton by copying another model.
Convert Standard Part to Skeleton:

• Create Standard Part
• Create Assembly
– Create Skeleton Component
– Copy From Existing
y
– Browse to Standard Part
nl
• Becomes a Skeleton
– Placed in Assembly
O
– Skeleton Color Figure 1 – Copy from Existing
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Standard Part Figure 3 – Copied to Skeleton
rn
Copying a Model to a Skeleton
te
You can convert a standard part model to create a skeleton. Example scenarios of when you
can use this technique include the following:
• A standard part model is used as a makeshift skeleton for an assembly and you wish to convert it
In
to an actual skeleton.
• A skeleton is created for another design and can be reused for the current design.
• You are working with other team members who have modeled skeletons for their portions of the
C
assembly and you wish to create a top-level assembly with multiple skeletons.
• Rapidly creating and assembling multiple skeletons in the current assembly.
PT
To copy an existing model to a skeleton, you create a component in the context of the assembly and
select Skeleton as the component type. Then, you select Copy from existing and browse to the
existing model. The model is copied into the current assembly and assumes skeleton properties,
such as the default blue skeleton color.
r
Fo

Creating Multiple Skeletons
You can add multiple skeletons to your assembly.
Create Multiple Skeletons:

• multiple_skeletons_allowed
Assemble Skeletons:
• By Default
y
• Constraints
• Connections
nl
Techniques:
O
• Independent skeletons Figure 1 – 3-D Skeleton Models
• Hierarchy of skeletons
• Represent one or many components
se
Creating Multiple Skeletons
U
In the design process, you can create the structure of an assembly first, without defining any
component geometry or specific placement constraints to locate components. Creating an assembly
structure helps you plan your project by enabling delegation of tasks to team members. You can
also assign non-geometric information up front in the form of parameters such as part number,
al
cost, supplier, and material.
You can assemble the first skeleton using the system default constraint. You can assemble
rn
subsequent skeletons like typical components. You can assemble them by default or by using
constraints or connections. You can create multiple skeletons at the top level and at the
sub-assembly levels.
te
There are several different techniques that you can use when working with multiple skeletons,
including the following:
In
• Create the multiple skeletons independent of each other so that you can modify each skeleton
without affecting the other skeletons.
C
• Use multiple skeletons in a hierarchy. With this technique, you create a main skeleton and then
share references to several other skeletons. The additional skeletons can be at the top level also
or in a sub-assembly. Modifying the main skeleton then propagates change to multiple other
PT
skeletons, causing several components to update at once.

When creating multiple skeletons, consider whether each skeleton represents one or many
components. A skeleton can also represent an entire sub-assembly.
The figure shown illustrates multiple independent skeletons in use. You use the MAIN
r
skeleton to share references to the FRAME and also the BLOCK in ENGINE.ASM. The
Fo
CRANK, PISTON, and ROD skeletons are additional skeletons assembled to the MAIN
skeleton using connections to provide mechanism movement.

PROCEDURE - Creating Multiple Skeletons
Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Multiple AC40.ASM
Task 1: Create and assemble the crank skeleton.

y
3. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Configuration Editor category.
nl
4. Click Add.
5. In the Option name field of the Add Option dialog box, type multiple_skeletons_allowed.
O
6. Edit the Option value to yes, if necessary, and click OK.
The multiple_skeletons_allowed configuration file option determines whether
multiple skeletons can be created as replacement parts.
se
7. Click OK and click No to confirm that the configuration edits made are applied to the current
session only.
U
If the Yes option is selected, the settings are saved to a configuration file and loaded
during the next session. al
8. Hide both FRAME.PRT and ENGINE.ASM.
9. Select MAIN_SKEL.PRT from the model tree.
rn
10. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style >
Transparent.
te

12. Select Skeleton Model as the Type, edit the Name to crank_skel, and click OK.
In
13. Click Browse, select CRANK_GEOM.PRT in the Choose template dialog box, and click
Open.
14. Ensure that the Leave component unplaced check box is cleared.
C

PT
16. In the dashboard, select Pin from the User Defined drop-down list.
17. Select the CRANK datum axes in both models to define axis alignment.
18. Select the FRONT datum planes in both models to define translation.
r
19. Click Complete Component from the dashboard.

Fo

Task 2: Create and assemble the piston skeleton.
1. Click Create .
2. Edit the Name to piston_skel and click OK.
3. Click Browse, select PISTON_GEOM.PRT in the Choose template dialog box, and click
Open.
5. In the dashboard, select Slider from the User Defined drop-down list.
y
6. Select the CYL datum axes in both models to
nl
define axis alignment.
7. Select the FRONT datum planes in both
O
models to define rotation.
8. Press CTRL+ALT and right-click to drag the
skeleton into the approximate position shown
se
in the figure.
U
Task 3: Create and assemble the connecting rod skeleton.
1. Click Create .
al
2. Edit the Name to rod_skel and click OK.
3. Click Browse, select ROD_GEOM.PRT in the Choose template dialog box, and click Open.
rn
te
5. In the dashboard, select Pin from the User

Defined drop-down list.
6. Select the PIN_1 axes in both models to
In

C
7. Select the FRONT datum plane in the

ROD_SKEL.PRT and CRANK_SKEL.PRT
models to define translation.
PT
8. Right-click and select Add Set.

r
Fo
9. In the dashboard, edit the connection to

Cylinder .
11. Select the PIN_2 axes in both
ROD_SKEL.PRT and PISTON_SKEL.PRT to

14. Click Drag Components from the Component group.
15. Select the cylindrical shaft surface of CRANK_SKEL and drag it through its motion.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Sharing Skeleton Geometry
You can copy references from a skeleton into other models.
Publish Geometry Feature:
• Identify and Collect
Copy Geometry Feature:
• Publish Geometry
• Surface Sets
y
• Chains Figure 1 – Copy Geometry
nl
• References
• Geometry Update Options
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Geometry Copied from Skeleton
Sharing Skeleton Geometry

rn
Once skeletons have been created, you can share geometry with the solid components. You can
use the shared geometry as references to build solid features. It is through the use of shared
te
geometry that the skeleton can propagate edits to the component features. Note that this step is not
required for components that are only being assembled to the skeleton.
In
There are two main data sharing features, Publish Geometry and Copy Geometry. To create these
features, you activate the component, then create the data sharing feature in the context of the
assembly.
C
Publish Geometry Feature

PT
The Publish Geometry feature enables you to identify and collect a selection of references from your
skeleton and apply the references to a feature. With the Publish Geometry feature, you can select
surface sets, chains (edges or sketches), and references (datum features).
For example, in a skeleton model you typically have a series of references destined for component
r
A and other references destined for component B. Some of these references can be common,
while others may not be. You can create one Publish Geometry feature called FOR_PART_A and
Fo
another called FOR_PART_B. Each Publish Geometry feature contains the selection of references
for the respective target component. Be aware that the Publish Geometry feature does not share
any geometry outside of the skeleton. It simply enables you to organize the selections before
copying. This is particularly useful when working on a team where others may need to reference a
skeleton you have created.
The Publish Geometry feature is entirely optional. Its use depends on the requirements
and complexity of the design.
Copy Geom Feature

The Copy Geometry feature enables you to share references outside of a skeleton by copying
them into a target component. This target component can be another skeleton or a solid part.
Once copied, you can reference the copied geometry to create features in the target component.

The features in the target component that reference the copied geometry update when you make
changes to the skeleton. You can select the following to copy:
• Publish Geometry Feature (containing a selection of its own)
• Surface Sets (individual, selection sets, or quilts)
• Chains (sketches, datum curves, edges)
• References (datum planes, axes, points or coordinate systems)
Keep in mind the following Copy Geometry feature behaviors:
• You have control over the update behavior of a Copy Geometry feature with the following options
in the Options tab of the Copy Geometry dashboard:
y
– Automatic Update – The Copy Geometry feature is updated automatically when the source
nl
model is modified and in session.
– Manual Update – The Copy Geometry feature is not updated when the source geometry is
O
modified. You can update the feature at any time, and optionally elect to be notified when the
feature is outdated.
– No Dependency – There is no dependency between the Copy Geometry feature and the
se
source model.
You can make the resulting copied geometry dependent or independent of the skeleton model.
• You can select from only one model when creating a Copy Geometry feature. If you need to copy
U
references from multiple skeletons, you can create multiple Copy Geometry features.
• Copy Geometry features do not enable you to copy solid features. This is why solids are not
typically used to create a skeleton. However, you are able to copy the outer surfaces of a solid
feature.
al
• You can create the Copy Geometry feature with the Assembly Context option or the External
rn
option.
– The Assembly Context option relies on how the target component is assembled when
creating the copied geometry, thus creating a dependency between the target part and its
te
parent assembly.
– The External option avoids this dependency by enabling you to select the model to copy
In
from, and to locate the copied geometry in the target component by a default constraint or
by selecting coordinate systems.
The figure shown illustrates a selection of surfaces and datum features being copied from
C
the skeleton using a Copy Geometry feature. The resulting Copy Geometry feature is also
shown along with the model tree.
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Sharing Skeleton Geometry
Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Sharing
BLOCK.PRT
Task 1: Copy references from MAIN_SKEL.PRT to the BLOCK.PRT.
y
2. Click Copy Geometry from the Get Data group.
nl
3. In the dashboard, de-select Published Geometry Only and then click Open .
4. Select MAIN_SKEL.PRT and click Open.
O
5. In the Placement dialog box, select Coord
Sys and select PRT_CSYS_DEF from the
model tree of each model.
se
7. In the dashboard, select the References tab
U
and click in the Surface Sets collector to
activate it.
8. In the docked accessory window, query-select
al
the entire surface quilt of MAIN_SKEL.PRT.
9. Resize the accessory window as required.
rn
10. Click in the Chain collector to activate it.

te
11. Select the curve feature shown in the figure.

12. Click in the References collector to activate
it.
In
13. Press CTRL and select datum plane OFFSET

and the axes HOLE1 and HOLE2 from the
Model Tree(2).
C

dashboard.
PT
Task 2: Copy references from CRANK_SKEL.PRT to the CRANK.PRT.

r
Fo
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar, select CRANK.PRT, and click Open.
2. Click Copy Geometry .
3. In the dashboard, de-select Published Geometry Only and then click Open .
4. Select CRANK_SKEL.PRT and click Open.
5. In the Placement dialog box, select Coord Sys and select PRT_CSYS_DEF from the model
tree of each model.

7. In the dashboard, select the References tab
and click in the Surface Sets collector to
activate it.
8. Query-select the entire surface quilt of
CRANK_SKEL.PRT.
y
9. Click in the Chain collector to activate it and
nl
select the outer curve feature shown in the
figure.
O
10. Click in the References collector to activate
it.
11. Press CTRL and select axes CRANK and
se
PIN_1 from the Model Tree(2).
U
13. Click Close .
Geometry copied from a skeleton into the
design model is associative by default.
If the skeleton changes, the referencing
al
design model updates accordingly, as
well as all geometry referencing the
rn
copied geometry.
te

In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating and Placing Models using Skeleton References
You can create solid models and place components by referencing a skeleton.
Create Solid Geometry

• Utilize Copy Geometry
• Surfaces/Planes/Axes
Redefine Unplaced Components
y
• New Solid Geometry
• Copy Geometry
nl
Figure 1 – Using Skeleton to Create Model Geometry
Changes Propagate
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Using Skeleton to Create Boss and Holes Figure 3 – Constraining the Unplaced Bolts
Creating and Placing Models using Skeleton References

al
Once you have used a Copy Geometry feature to share references, you can begin to create solid
rn
geometry utilizing the copied references. You can either open the component in its own window
or activate the component and model in the context of the assembly. You can use the copied
surfaces, planes, axes, and so on by referencing them when creating sketches, solid features, and
te
other datum features in the model.

Once enough references exist, you can redefine unplaced components. You can select either the
In
new solid geometry or copied geometry to define placement using constraints or connections.
Once you have referenced the copied geometry in the creation of model features, edits to the
skeleton propagate to the model.
C
In the figures shown, the space claim surfaces from the skeleton are being used to create
solid tube shapes for the beginning of the engine block model. Holes are also created using
PT
the copied axes. Finally, the unplaced bolts from the original assembly structure are now
placed, referencing both solid geometry and the copied axes.
r
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating and Placing Models Using Skeleton
References
Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Placing-Models NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Reference copied features to create features in the block part.
y
2. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Configuration Editor category.
nl
3. Click Add.
4. In the Option name field, type multiple_skeletons_allowed, edit the Option value to yes,
and click OK.
O
The multiple_skeletons_allowed configuration file option determines whether
multiple skeletons can be created.
se
5. Click OK and click No to confirm that the configuration edits made are applied to the current
session only.
U
If the Yes option is selected, the settings are saved to a configuration file and loaded
during the next session. al
6. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click AC40.ASM.
rn
8. In the model tree, expand the ENGINE.ASM node and open BLOCK.PRT.
te
10. Click the Appearances drop-down menu from the Appearance group.
11. Select Clear All Appearances from the Clear Appearance types drop-down menu.
In
12. Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box.

13. Select the Model tab.
14. Select the Extern Copy Geom feature from
C
the model tree.

PT
15. Click Thicken from the Editing group.

16. Edit the thickness to 2 and press ENTER.
dashboard.
r
Fo
18. Select datum plane TOP and click Extrude from the mini toolbar.
20. Click Loop in the Type dialog box.

21. Select the datum curve on the right side of
the model.
22. Click OK .
23. Edit the depth to 4 and press ENTER.
y
nl
26. Click Hole from the Engineering group
and select axis HOLE1.
O
27. Press CTRL and select the hole's placement
surface, as shown in the figure.
28. Edit the diameter to 3 and select Through
se
All as the depth.
U
al
30. With the hole still selected, press CTRL+C
and then CTRL+V.
rn
31. Select axis HOLE2, press CTRL, and select
the hole's placement surface, as shown in
te
the figure.
In
33. Hide the Extern Copy Geom feature.

toolbar.
C
PT
Task 2: Reference copied geometry to create features in the crank part.
1. Open CRANK.PRT from the model tree.

r

Fo
3. Select Clear All Appearances from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu.
4. Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box.
5. Select the Model tab.
6. Select the Extern Copy Geom feature from the model tree and then click Solidify from
the Editing group.

8. Click Extrude and select the rear cylinder
surface.
9. Click Project and select Loop.
10. Select the datum curve and click OK .
11. Flip the feature direction towards you and
drag the depth to 6.
y
13. Click Extrude and select the rear surface.
nl
14. In the graphics window, press ALT and select datum axis PIN_1.
15. Right-click and select Add references.
O
16. Sketch a circle with a diameter of 5 centered on PIN_1.
17. Click OK .
se
18. Edit the depth to 6 and click Complete
Feature .
19. Hide the Extern Copy Geom feature.
U
20. Click Close . al
21. Edit the definition of CRANK.PRT.
rn
You could use placement constraints at this time to properly place the component.
te
Task 3: Clean up the display and assemble bolts.

In
1. Hide MAIN_SKEL.PRT and CRANK_SKEL.PRT.

2. Select BLOCK.PRT.
C
3. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style >
Transparent.
PT
4. Edit the definition of BOLT_8.PRT.

5. Click Show In Assembly Window from
the dashboard.
r
6. Constrain the bolt as shown in the figure and

Fo
then click Complete Component .

8. Select BOLT_8.PRT, press CTRL+C and
then CTRL+V.
9. Constrain the bolt into the last hole as
shown in the figure and then click Complete
Component .
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Creating a Motion Skeleton
You can use a motion skeleton to create a mechanism framework of your design.
• Two types:
– Motion Skeleton (.ASM)
– Body Skeleton (.PRT)
• Body Skeletons assembled into Motion
Skeleton.
y
• One Body Skeleton per component.
nl
Figure 1 - Creating and Sketching a Motion Skeleton
O
se
U
al
rn
Figure 3 - Creating Solid Models and
Figure 2 - Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton Sketching Geometry
te
Creating a Motion Skeleton

A motion skeleton is a completely different skeleton type that enables you to define mechanisms
In
quickly. A motion skeleton consists of the following skeleton types:

• Motion Skeleton – A special assembly skeleton type in which body skeletons are created.
• Body Skeleton – A special part skeleton type. Multiple body skeletons are created within a motion
C
skeleton. One body skeleton is created for each mechanism body, including the ground body.
Once created, the motion skeleton is actually an assembly of body skeletons. Each body skeleton
PT
is automatically assembled with mechanism connections. You can use the motion skeleton to
control multiple components by sharing geometry, similar to the way in which you use a standard
skeleton. However, in the case of the motion skeleton, the geometry is automatically shared with
the end components.
r
The following are the overall steps used to create a motion skeleton:
Fo
• Create the motion skeleton (assembly skeleton).

• Create a sketch to represent the mechanism movement and bodies.
• Create the body skeleton (part skeleton).
• Define the body to body connections for each body skeleton.
• Create the solid models, attaching them to a respective body skeleton.
• Create the solid geometry in the solid models.

Sketching a Motion Skeleton
You can create a sketch to define the motion of your skeleton.
Created in Motion Skeleton

Sketch to Represent:
• Ground Body
• Mechanism Bodies
• Joint Connections
y
Sketching Techniques:
nl
• All-In-One Sketch
• Overlapping Entities
O
se
Figure 1 – Motion Skeleton Sketch
Sketching a Motion Skeleton
U
After creating the motion skeleton assembly, you create a sketch. The sketch must represent the
following: al
• The Ground Body – This is a non-moving component.
• Any Mechanism Bodies – Any moving part in the mechanism.
rn
• Joint Connections, which are as follows:
– Pin joints can be defined at entity intersections or at circle centers.
– Slider joints can be defined from overlapping lines.
te
– Bearing joints can be defined where a line meets a non-endpoint location of another line.
– A Slot connection can be defined where a line endpoint lies on an arc or circle.
In
– Ball and Cylinder joints can be selected at locations where a Pin joint is found.
When you sketch a motion skeleton, you use different techniques than a typical feature sketch.
Sketching a motion skeleton is similar to sketching a series of curves for a typical skeleton. For
C
example, for a motion skeleton, you can define the mechanism in a single sketch. The sketch itself
does not have to move like the mechanism would if you were to drag the sketched entities. The
PT
motion is computed after the selection of bodies and connections. Also, in a sketch for a motion
skeleton, it is typical to overlap entities or create duplicate coincident entities for use in multiple
bodies.
In Figure 1, a sketch is defined to represent a simple motor: a ground, a crankshaft, a
r
connecting rod, and a piston are all represented.

Fo

PROCEDURE - Sketching a Motion Skeleton
Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Sketch MOTOR.ASM
Task 1: Create the motion skeleton.

y
3. Select Skeleton Model as the Type and Motion as the Sub-type.
nl
4. Edit the Name to motion_skel and click OK.
5. Click Browse from the Creation Options dialog box.
O
6. Select MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM and click Open.
se
The motion skeleton is an assembly.
U
Task 2: Sketch the geometry representing the various components of the motion skeleton.
1. Activate MOTION_SKEL.ASM.
2. In the graphics window, select the
al
ASM_FRONT datum plane and click Sketch
rn
te
4. Select Line Chain from the Line types

drop-down menu from the Sketching group.
5. Sketch a vertical line on the vertical reference
In
and edit its length to 100.

C
PT
6. Sketch the following additional entities to

represent the crank:
• Sketch a circle at the origin and edit its
diameter to 30.
r
• Sketch a line at a 45° angle and dimension

Fo
it as shown in the figure.

• Sketch a smaller circle and edit its diameter
to 5.

7. Sketch the following additional entities to represent the piston:
• Sketch a circle approximately midway along the vertical line representing the ground. Make
the diameter equal to the smaller, previously sketched circle.
Do not snap the circle to the midpoint of the vertical line.
• Sketch a short vertical line with a midpoint at the center of the previously sketched circle.
• Sketch a Center Rectangle that is centered on the vertical ground line. Locate the top and
bottom edges of the rectangle on the previously sketched short vertical line.
y
• Edit the dimensions to 35 and 20, as shown in the figure.
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
8. Sketch the following additional entities to
represent the connecting rod:
te
• Sketch a line between the circle at the

center of the piston and the end of the
crank.
In
• Dimension the length of the line and edit its

length to 50, as shown in the figure.
• Sketch one additional circle at each end
C
of the line. Both new circles should be on

top of the circles already placed at those
PT
locations and they should have the same

diameter.
9. Click OK .
r

Fo

Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton
You can create body skeletons from the motion skeleton sketch.
• Created in the Motion Skeleton.

• Select entities in the Motion Skeleton to be
assigned.
y
nl
Figure 1 – Motion Skeleton
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Body Definition Figure 3 – Selecting Body Curves
rn
Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton
Once the sketch for the motion skeleton is defined, you can create the body skeletons. A body
te
skeleton is a special type of part skeleton, which the system creates after you select references
from the motion skeleton sketch. The system also automatically copies any selected chains from
In
the sketch into the body skeleton.

In Figure 1, the model tree shows the motion skeleton assembly containing four body
skeleton part models. The selections used to create the ROD_SKEL.PRT are also shown
in Figure 3.
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton
Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Bodies MOTOR.ASM
Task 1: Create the ground body skeleton.

2. Activate MOTION_SKEL.ASM.
y
nl
4. Select Body as the Sub-type.
5. Edit the Name to ground_skel and click OK.
6. Select Empty as the Creation Method and
O
click OK from the Creation Options dialog
box.
se
7. Query-select the single green line shown in
the figure.
8. Click OK from the BODY DEFINITION dialog
box.
U
9. In the model tree, expand the MOTION_SKEL.ASM node.
al
• Notice GROUND_SKEL.PRT is created.
rn
Task 2: Create the crank body skeleton.
1. Click Create .
te

3. Edit the Name to crank_skel and click OK.
In
4. Click OK from the Creation Options dialog

box.
C
5. Select the large circle shown.

6. Press CTRL and query-select the small green
PT
circle and angled line, as shown in the figure.

7. Click OK.
r
Task 3: Create the rod body skeleton.

Fo
1. Click Create .
3. Edit the Name to rod_skel and click OK.
box.
5. Query-select the angled green line shown.
6. Press CTRL and select the small green
circles at the ends of the selected line.
7. Click OK.

Task 4: Create the piston body skeleton.
1. Click Create .
3. Edit the Name to piston_skel and click OK.
box.
5. Select the green rectangular section, as
y
shown.
nl
6. Press CTRL and select both the small green
circle and green vertical line at the center of
the selected rectangle.
O
7. Click OK.
When you select curves from the sketch (those added to the Chains field of the
se
BODY_DEFINITION dialog box), you are selecting curves to be copied into the individual
body skeleton that you are creating.
U
This completes the procedure. al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Assigning Connections for a Motion Skeleton
You can assign mechanism connections to each body skeleton.
Update Connection List:

• Remove Unwanted
• Select Type
Copy Geometry Created:
y
• Selected Curves
• Datum features automatically created
nl
• Drag Mechanism Assy
O
se
Figure 1 – Skeleton
U
al
rn
te
Figure 2 – Testing Mechanism Motion

In
Assigning Connections for a Motion Skeleton

C
Once the body skeletons are created, you can assign the connections for each body skeleton. You
can update the connection list within the dialog box used to create each body skeleton. You can
remove the unwanted connections after highlighting each on the model. For some connection types,
PT
a drop-down list is available to select the desired connection type. For example, you can enable a
2-D sketch to have 3-D motion by changing all the pin connections to ball joints.
Copy Geometry Creation

r
Once the body definition is completed with a defined connections list, the system creates a Copy
Fo
Geometry feature to support the connection types in the body skeleton part containing the selected
curve chains and the automatically created datum features.
Datum features are automatically created in a group following the motion skeleton sketch. The type
of datum feature created depends on the type of connection. For example, pin joints require axes
while ball joints require points. The system includes these datum features in the Copy Geometry
feature along with the curve chains.
Component Placement Dialog Box

You can also use the Invoke component placement dialog option to access the dashboard for
each body skeleton definition. This enables you to manually control the types of connections
being created.

The Motion
After all the body skeletons have been defined, you can drag the mechanism or start Mechanism
mode to assign motors and perform mechanism analyses.
In Figure 1, the dialog box shows a body definition with the selected chains and the initial
list of possible connections.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Assigning Connections for a Motion Skeleton
Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Connections
MOTOR.ASM
Task 1: Assign connections for the crank skeleton.
y
nl
O
GROUND_SKEL.PRT is not identified in the model tree with a packaged symbol next to
it. This means it is fully constrained and does not need to have connections assigned to it.
se
6. Edit the definition of CRANK_SKEL.PRT.
7. In the BODY DEFINITION dialog box,
U
click Update to view a list of the possible
connections available for the body.
8. Right-click the Pin connection that references
al
F5(SKETCH_1) and select Remove.
• Keep the remaining Pin connection that
rn
references End:Curve:F5.
9. Click OK from the BODY DEFINITION dialog
box.
te
Task 2: Assign connections for the rod skeleton.

In

2. Edit the definition of ROD_SKEL.PRT.
C
3. In the BODY DEFINITION dialog box, click Update.

4. Press CTRL and select the Slot and Bearing
PT
connections, right-click and select Remove.

5. Remove all of the remaining connections
except the Pin connection at the center of the
circle and at the end of the angled line. This
r
connection references F5(SKETCH_1).

Fo
6. Click OK.

Task 3: Assign connections for the piston skeleton.
1. Edit the definition of PISTON_SKEL.PRT.

2. In the BODY DEFINITION dialog box, click
Update.
3. Ensure the slider connection is maintained,
shown by a line through the piston body.
y
4. Keep the Pin connection that is at the center
nl
of the circle (shown in the model as a highlight
at the center of the circle, and at the end of
the connecting line).
O
5. Remove all remaining connections (except
the two you have been instructed to keep).
se
6. Select the Pin Connection row and select Cylinder from the Connection drop-down list.
U
7. Click OK.
8. Enable Axis Display .
al
9. Examine the model tree and expand the group MOTION_AXES node.
An axis was created at every assigned connection.
rn
Task 4: Edit the motion skeleton.

te
1. Edit Sketch 1.
2. Edit the 45° angle to 90, press ENTER.
In
4. Click Drag Components from the

C
Component group.
5. In the Drag dialog box, expand the
PT
Snapshots section and click Take Snapshot

.
6. Select and drag the skeleton by selecting the
small circle, as shown in the figure.
r
7. Double-click Snapshot1 in the Snapshots list

Fo
and then click Close.

Creating Solid Models from a Motion Skeleton
You can create solid models, referencing bodies of the motion skeleton.
• Create a new component.

• Attach component to body.
– Assigns 3-D model to body skeleton
• Geometry from body skeleton merged into 3-D
model.
y
• Create features in 3-D model using references.
Figure 1 – Merged Body Skeleton Geometry
nl
in 3-D Model
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Referencing Merge to Create 3-D Geometry
al Figure 3 – Viewing 3-D Geometry in Motion Skeleton
Creating Solid Models from a Motion Skeleton

rn
Once all the body skeletons have been created and the mechanism motion tested, you can create
solid part models from the motion skeleton assembly.
First, you create a standard solid part in the context of the assembly. However, you do not place
te
the component manually. Instead, you select the Attach component to body option and select
a particular body skeleton. This action does two things; it assembles the component to the
In
body skeleton part and simultaneously copies all of the references from the skeleton part to the
component using a merge feature.
You can then activate or open the component and begin to create solid geometry with the copied
C
references. You can utilize the copied surfaces, planes, axes, and so on by referencing them
when creating sketches, solid features, and other datum features in the model. Once you have
referenced the copied geometry in the creation of model features, edits to the motion skeleton
PT
sketch can propagate through to the model.

As shown in the figures, the copied curves from the motion skeleton sketch, as well as
the copied axes from the connections, are being used to create a solid model for the
connecting rod of the motor. Holes are also created using the copied axes. Now that
r
solid features are created, you can return to the assembly and drag the mechanism with
Fo
the solid models attached.

PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Models from a Motion Skeleton
Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Solid-Models
MOTOR.ASM
Task 1: Create a component by referencing the motion skeleton.
y
nl
3. Select Part as the Type and Solid as the Sub-type.
4. Edit the Name to rod and click OK.
O
5. Select Copy from existing and click Browse.
6. Select MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT and click Open in the Choose template dialog box.
se
7. Select the Attach component to body check box.
8. In the model tree, expand the MOTION_SKEL.ASM node and select ROD_SKEL.PRT.
U
10. Open ROD.PRT from the model tree.
The External Merge feature in
the model tree copies reference
al
geometry from the motion skeleton
into this part.
rn
te

In
12. Select datum plane FRONT as the sketch

plane.
13. In the graphics window, press ALT and select
C
datum axis AA_6.

14. Press ALT+CTRL and select datum axis
PT
AA_3 and the small circular curves.

15. Right-click and select Add references.
16. Using the referenced axes, create a
slot-shaped sketch, as shown in the figure.
r
Fo
17. Click OK .
18. Edit the depth to Symmetric from the

dashboard.
19. Edit the depth value to 8.

Task 2: Drag the solid model using the motion skeleton.

toolbar.
2. Press Ctrl+D to orient to the Standard
Orientation.
4. Click Drag Components from the
y
Component group.
nl
5. Select an edge on ROD.PRT and drag the
model using the motion skeleton.
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 14
y
Utilizing Design Exploration
nl
O
Module Overview
se
In this module, you learn about the Design Exploration extension in PTC Creo Parametric. For
example, you will enter a Design Exploration session, create a hierarchy of checkpoints, and save
the session.
U
Objectives
al
• Describe how a Design Exploration session can be used to evaluate design changes in a safe
environment.
rn
• Create and activate checkpoints while exploring part and assembly designs.
• Create a branching hierarchy of Design Exploration checkpoints.
te
• Save and open Design Exploration sessions.

• Describe available Design Exploration options.
In
• Utilize Update Control to manage copy geometry features.

C
r PT
Fo

Understanding Design Exploration
Use a Design Exploration session to evaluate design changes in a safe environment.
• Manual change process:
– Challenging
– Time consuming
• Design Exploration session:
– Checkpoint Tree
– Toolbar
y
• Benefits:
nl
– Safe
– Quick
O
• Model Types:
– Parts
– Assemblies
se
Figure 1 – Design Exploration Session
Understanding Design Exploration
U
The Design Exploration extension (DEX) for PTC Creo Parametric enables you to explore design
changes on part and assembly models.
Changing a product design and exploring new ideas can be a challenge, especially when developing
al
complex systems with many interdependent components. Typically, this process involves the
manual backup of models to temporary folders, repeatedly closing and cleaning the session, and
rn
manually reviewing multiple iterations before making a decision. Design Exploration assists with
the process of creating, changing, and evaluating new designs with a specifically designed, safe
and efficient environment. When the design is finalized, you can store the exploration session to
illustrate how a particular design was decided upon.
te
Once a Design Exploration session is started:

In
• You enter an environment where you can explore design changes using a hierarchy of
checkpoints.
• The Checkpoint Tree and the Design Exploration toolbar become available next to the model tree.
• You can safely make and store design changes, or revert to the original model state at any time.
C
A Design Exploration session has the following benefits:

PT
• Provides a safe environment for “what-if” scenarios:

– Eliminates multiple manual backups.
– Organizes and manages design changes.
– Generates a separate encrypted file that is not automatically controlled by a PDM system,
r
but can be checked in and tracked.

Fo
• Reduces iterations and errors:

– Explore significant changes and multiple design directions before committing to models.
– Apply significant changes to model when ready.
• Save time by quickly exploring multiple design alternatives.
• Eliminate accidental data loss due to overwriting of design models.
You can utilize a Design Exploration session with the following modeling environments:
• Solid or Sheetmetal Part
• Assembly and Mechanism
• Options Modeler, Interchange
• Cabling and Piping
• Mold and Welding

• Process
Drawings are not directly supported by Design Exploration at this time. If drawings of the
models exist, they can be regenerated normally once the Design Exploration session is
complete. If drawings are in session they remain open, however they cannot be activated
until the Design Exploration session is complete.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
rPT
Fo

Exploring Part and Assembly Designs
You can create and activate checkpoints while exploring designs.
• Design Exploration process

– Open a model
– Start DEX session
– Make changes
– Create / Activate Checkpoints
y
– Accept / Cancel changes
nl
• Checkpoints
– System and user created
– Store incremental changes Figure 1 – Exploring Part Changes
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Checkpoint Tree for Each Session Figure 3 – Exploring Assembly Changes
rn
Exploring Part and Assembly Designs

te
Use the following process when exploring model designs:

• Open a model In Session.
In
• Click File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > Start. The current modeling session
is paused.
• The system automatically creates a snapshot of the entire session content into an initial
C
Checkpoint called “Pre-modified”. If models were modified before starting the session, an "Entry
Checkpoint" is also created.
PT
• Make any number of changes to the model, without risking the original models.
• Create Checkpoints at any time to capture changes made since the previous Checkpoint.
• At any point you can instantly switch between Checkpoints. The system replaces In Session
model iterations as captured in the activated Checkpoint, without losing any information.
r
• Once changes are complete and a decision is made, you can:

Fo
– Save the Design Exploration session to a file.

– Accept the current model state and resume the modeling session.
– Cancel the changes and return to the original model.
• Keep the following in mind about checkpoints:
– At least one system created Checkpoint is created upon entering the DEX session.
– Each Checkpoint stores only the incremental model changes relatively to the previous
Checkpoint.
– You can provide a Checkpoint name, add comments, and also define keywords to be used for
a later search.

PROCEDURE - Exploring Part and Assembly Designs
Design_Exploration\Explore ARM.PRT
Task 1: Utilize a Design Exploration session on a part model.

2. Click File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > Start.
y
• Click OK.
nl
• In the model tree, click RECT.
4. Select the Options tab from the dashboard.
O
• Select Through All from the Side 1 and Side 2 Depth types drop-down menus.
5. Select the Properties tab.
se
• Type CUTOUT in the Name field and press ENTER.
U
7. Click Add New Checkpoint from the Checkpoint Tree toolbar.
• Type Rectangle in the Name field.
• Click OK.
al
rn
te
8. Edit the definition of CUTOUT.

• In the model tree, click SLANT.
In

9. Click Add New Checkpoint .
C
• Type Slanted in the Name field.

• Click OK.
rPT
Fo

• In the model tree, click CURV.
• Type Curved in the Name field.
• Click OK.

12. Right-click each checkpoint in the Checkpoint
Tree and select Activate for the following:
• Pre-modified
• Rectangle
• Slanted
• Curved
13. Click Accept from the Checkpoint Tree toolbar.

• Clear the Save the Design Exploration session check box.
y
• Click OK.
nl
• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.
• Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.
O
Task 2: Utilize a Design Exploration session on an assembly model.
se
• Double-click VALVE.ASM.
2. In the model tree, select Tree Filters from the Settings types drop-down menu.
U
• Select the Suppressed objects check box.
• Click OK.
al
3. Suppress ARM.PRT.
• Click OK.
rn
• Click OK.
te
5. Activate BODY.PRT.
6. Edit one of the three flanges on the Valve
body.
In
• Edit the 3 EXTRUDES quantity to 5 and

press ENTER.
C
PT
7. Double-click Add checkpoint in the

r
Checkpoint Tree.
Fo
• Type Five Flanges in the Name field.

• Click OK.
8. Query-select the hole shown on the Valve
and edit it.
• Edit the 3 HOLES quantity to 4 and press
ENTER.
• Press CTRL+A to activate the assembly.

9. Double-click Add checkpoint in the
Checkpoint Tree.
• Type Four Bolts in the Name field.
• Click OK.
10. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1 of
BOLT_HEX.PRT.
• Right-click the top BOLT_HEX.PRT within
the Pattern 1 feature and select Replace
.
y
11. Select Unrelated Component in the Replace
nl
By category.
• Click Open .
O
• Double-click BOLT_CROSS.PRT.
12. Click Edit Ref Table in the Replace dialog
box.
se
• Click Evaluate in the Reference Pairing
Table dialog box.
• Click OK > OK.
U
13. Double-click Add checkpoint from the
Checkpoint Tree.
• Type Bolt Cross in the Name field.
al
• Click OK.
rn
• Pre-modified
te
• Entry checkpoint
• Five Flanges
In
• Four Bolts
• Bolt Cross
C
15. Click Accept .

• Clear the Save the Design Exploration
PT
session check box.

• Click OK.
16. In the model tree, select ARM.PRT and click
Resume from the mini toolbar.
r
Fo

Creating Design Exploration Branches
You can create a branching hierarchy of checkpoints.
• Create a branch.
– Activate a Checkpoint with successors.
– Add New Checkpoint.
• Each new Checkpoint becomes active.
Figure 1 – Part Model Branches
y
nl
O
se
U
Figure 2 – Assembly Model Checkpoint Tree
al Figure 3 – Assembly Model Branch
Creating Design Exploration Branches

rn
You can create branches of checkpoints in the Checkpoint Tree to form a Design Exploration
hierarchy. Branching enables you to create and investigate any number of design path decisions.
te
• Creating Branches:
– Activate a checkpoint node that has successors. (In other words, activate a node that is not the
In
last node in the Checkpoint Tree). Then click Add New Checkpoint .
– Keep in mind that each time a new checkpoint is created, the new checkpoint is then
automatically active. If a number of branches at the same level are desired, you need to
C
re-activate the upper level branch before creating the next new branch.
– If you want to create a branch on the last node in the tree, you can create a temporary last
PT
checkpoint, create the branch, and then delete the temporary node.
• Deleting Branches:
– If some checkpoints along the branch are no longer needed, you can delete them without
losing downstream information.
r
– Any sub-nodes from the deleted checkpoint are merged into its successor. You can also
Fo
delete an entire branch.

PROCEDURE - Creating Design Exploration Branches
Design_Exploration\Branch ARM.PRT
Task 1: Create Design Exploration branches in a part.

y
nl
• Click OK.
• Notice the suppressed CUTOUT feature in the model tree.
O
• Click OK.
4. Double-click the central feature of the model.
se
• Edit the 6 width dimension to 10 and press
ENTER.
U
al
• Type Thick in the Name field.
• Click OK.
rn
• Edit the 10 width dimension back to 6 and
te
press ENTER.
• Edit the 76 length dimension to 96 and
press ENTER.
In

C
• Type Long in the Name field.

• Click OK.
PT

press ENTER.
r
Fo

• Type Short in the Name field.
• Click OK.
10. Select the Thick checkpoint and click
Activate .
• In the model tree, select the CUTOUT
feature and click Resume from the mini
toolbar.
• Type Thick Slanted in the Name field.
• Click OK.

Activate .
• Select the CUTOUT feature and click
Resume .
• In the model tree, select the CURV sketch.
y
• Type Thick Curved in the Name field.
nl
• Click OK.
15. Select the Long checkpoint and click
O
Activate .
• In the model tree, select CUTOUT and click
Resume .
se
• Type Long Slanted in the Name field.
U
• Click OK.
17. Select the Long checkpoint and click
Activate .
al
• In the model tree, select CUTOUT and click
rn
Resume .
• Select the CURV sketch.
te

In
• Type Long Curved in the Name field.

• Click OK.
C

PT
• Pre-modified
• Thick
– Thick Slanted
– Thick Curved
r
• Long
Fo
– Long Slanted
– Long Curved
• Short

21. With the Short checkpoint still selected, click Delete from the Checkpoint Tree toolbar.
• Read the prompt and click OK.
22. Select Thick Curved and click Activate .
• Click OK.
• Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar.
y
• Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.
nl
Task 2: Create Design Exploration branches in an assembly.
O
• Double-click VALVE.ASM.
se
• Click OK.
U
3. Suppress ARM.PRT.
• Click OK.
al
• Click OK.
rn
5. In the model tree, activate BODY.PRT.
6. Edit one of the three flanges on the valve
body.
te

press ENTER.
In

7. Double-click Add Checkpoint in the
Checkpoint Tree.
C
• Type Four Flanges in the Name field.

• Click OK.
PT
8. Edit a flange again.

press ENTER.
r

Fo
Checkpoint Tree.
• Type Five Flanges in the Name field.
• Click OK.

10. Edit the flange again.
press ENTER.
Checkpoint Tree.
• Type Six Flanges in the Name field.
• Click OK.
y
nl
12. Right-click the Four Flanges checkpoint and
select Activate.
O
13. Click Update .
14. Select Create a new checkpoint as a
se
successor of the active checkpoint from
update Checkpoint with Successors message
box, if necessary.
U
15. Click OK.
17. Query-select to edit the hole shown.
al
ENTER.
rn
• Press CTRL+A to activate the assembly.
te

Checkpoint Tree.
• Type Four Hex Bolts in the Name field.
In
• Click OK.
C
PT
19. Right-click the Four Flanges checkpoint and

r
select Activate.
Fo
• Select the BOLT_HEX.PRT shown.


By category.
• Click Open .
22. Click Edit Ref Table in the Replace dialog
box.
• Click Evaluate in the Reference Pairing
Table dialog box.
y
• Click OK > OK.
nl
24. Query-select the same previous hole to edit.
O
ENTER.
• Press CTRL+A.
se
Checkpoint Tree.
U
• Type Four Cross Bolts in the Name field.
• Click OK.
26. Right-click the Five Flanges checkpoint and
al
select Activate.
rn
28. Query-select the same previous hole to edit it.
te
ENTER.
• Press CTRL+A.
In
C

Checkpoint Tree.
PT
• Type Five Hex Bolts in the Name field.

• Click OK.
r
Fo

30. Right-click the Five Flanges checkpoint and
select Activate.
• Select the BOLT_HEX.PRT shown.
y
nl
O
• Select Unrelated Component.
• Click Open .
se
• Click Evaluate.
U
• Click OK > OK.
34. Query-select the same previous hole to edit it.
al
ENTER.
rn
• Press CTRL+A.
te

Checkpoint Tree.
• Type Five Cross Bolts in the Name field.
In
• Click OK.
C
• Pre-modified
PT
• Entry checkpoint
• Four Flanges
– Four Hex Bolts
– Four Cross Bolts
r
• Five Flanges
Fo
– Five Hex Bolts

– Five Cross Bolts
• Six Flanges

37. Right-click the Six Flanges checkpoint and select Delete.
• Click OK.
38. Right-click the Four Hex Bolts checkpoint and select Activate.
• Click OK.
40. Select ARM.PRT and click Resume .
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Opening and Saving Design Exploration Sessions
You can save a Design Exploration session to a file.
• Opening *.tmz files
• Updating Checkpoints
• Saving options
– File > Save
– Save Session
– Store Models
y
– Accept
nl
– Cancel
O
se
Figure 1 – Design Exploration Session
Opening and Saving Design Exploration Sessions
U
You can save the entire Design Exploration session into a *.tmz file. You can then select and open a
previously saved Design Exploration session (*.tmz) file using the following methods:
• Click File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > Open.
al
• Click File > Open (with the All Files (*) Type selected in the File Open dialog box).
• Use the Folder browser window.
rn
Since DEX stores the entire session, you cannot open a saved Design Exploration session when
there are already models In Session. You must erase all open models from session before opening
the Design Exploration session.
te
At any time within a Design Exploration session, you can make a change and use the Update option
to update a checkpoint. Keep in mind the following when updating checkpoints:
In
• If you update a checkpoint with successors, you can:

– Create a new checkpoint as a successor of the active checkpoint.
– Update the active checkpoint and delete its successors.
C
• If you modify models after setting an active checkpoint, and do not update or create a new
checkpoint, modifications will be lost when activating a different checkpoint.
PT
There are several options and points to consider when saving within a Design Exploration session.
When saving from the File Menu using File > Save or Save from the quick access toolbar:
• Models cannot be saved (or checked-in to a PDM system) within an active Design Exploration
session.
r
Fo
• While in a Design Exploration session, the File > Save command can instead be used to create
checkpoints.
• Once the DEX session is accepted or cancelled you may save or check in the model normally.
There are several options within the DEX toolbar to save and manage *.tmz files:
• Click Save Design Exploration Session – This method saves the DEX session to the
specified *.tmz file and leaves the Design Exploration session open.
• Click Store Models – This method saves the DEX session to the specified *.tmz file, complete
with all required models and leaves the Design Exploration session open.
• Click Accept – This method saves and closes the DEX session, accepting the current model
state and resuming the modeling session. All model iterations along the path to the current
checkpoint are applied to the current model In Session. After accepting, the model can be saved
(or checked-in) normally.

• Click Cancel – This method closes the Design Exploration session, cancelling any changes
made within the Design Exploration session, and returns to the original model. Within the Close
Design Exploration Session dialog box, you have the option of saving the session to a *.tmz file
and/or erasing all In Session models.
Keep the following in mind about *.tmz files:
• By default, Design Exploration stores only incremental changes. The first system-created
checkpoint stores only paths of the start models locations, for minimal file size.
• If you are not ready to decide which checkpoint to accept, or would like to review with others,
you can make the *.tmz file available. They can then explore your checkpoints or add their
own to the checkpoint tree.
y
• If you plan to send a *.tmz file to a user who does not have access to same file system or the
nl
same original model locations, you must use the Store Models option to back up all the start
models into the *.tmz file.
O
• When you are connected to a PDM server you can only download or check-out models, but you
cannot upload or check in models until you resume the original modeling session.
• When the design is finalized, you can store the *.tmz file to illustrate how a particular design was
se
decided upon.
• Design Exploration *.tmz files are not incremented with a numeric extension for each saved
iteration. You can enter a new name for the *.tmz file or overwrite the previous file.
U
• The content of the *.tmz file is encrypted and compressed to avoid any confusion between this
experimental data and any design models. al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Opening and Saving Design Exploration Sessions
Design_Exploration\Open_Save ARM.PRT
Task 1: Open, Update, and Save a Design Exploration session for a part model.
y
nl
2. Click File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > Open.
• Double-click ARM_DEX.TMZ.
• Read the message in the dialog box and click Close.
O
• Click Erase Not Displayed .
se
• Click OK.
4. Click File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > Open.
U
• Double-click ARM_DEX.TMZ.
• Notice the options in the dialog box and click OK.
5. Select the Thick Curved checkpoint and
al
click Activate .
• Edit CUTOUT.
rn
• Edit the left radius to 24 and the right radius
to 20.
te

6. Select the Thick Curved checkpoint and
In
click Update .
Activate .
C
• Edit EXTRUDE 1.
• Edit the 12 dimension to 10.
PT

8. Select the Thick checkpoint and click Update
.
r
• Verify Create a new checkpoint as a

Fo
successor of the active checkpoint is

selected and click OK.
• Type Thick Flush in the Name field.
• Click OK.
9. With the Thick Flush checkpoint still active,
edit Protrusion id 42.
• Edit the 13 dimension to 10.

10. Select the Long checkpoint and click Activate .
• Read the message in the dialog box and click Cancel.
11. Select the Thick Flush checkpoint and click Update .
• Read the message and the option in the dialog box and click Cancel.
13. Click Save Design Exploration Session from the Checkpoint Tree toolbar.
• Edit the name to arm_dex2 and click OK.
y
This method saves the DEX session and leaves the session open.
nl
O
• Verify the Save the Design Exploration session check box is selected and click OK.
This method saves and closes the DEX session, returning to the model.
se
• Notice no dialog box appears.
U
Once the DEX session is closed, you may save the model normally.
al
• Click Erase Not Displayed .
rn
• Click OK.
Task 2: Open, Update, and Save a Design Exploration session for an assembly model.
te
1. In the Folder Browser , click Working

In
Directory .
• Double-click VALVE_DEX.TMZ.
• Click OK.
C
2. Right-click Four Cross Bolts and select

Activate.
PT
3. Press CTRL and select both of the

BOLT_HEX.PRT components in the model
tree.
• Right-click and select Replace .
r
Fo

By category.
• Click Open .
• Click Evaluate.
• Click OK > OK.

7. Right-click the Four Cross Bolts checkpoint
and select Update.
8. Right-click the Five Cross Bolts checkpoint
and select Activate.
9. Press CTRL and select both of the
BOLT_HEX.PRT components in the model
tree.
• Right-click and select Replace .
y
10. Select Unrelated Component.
nl
• Click Open .
O
• Click Evaluate.
• Click OK > OK.
se
U
al
12. Right-click the Five Cross bolts checkpoint and select Update.
rn
13. Click Save Design Exploration Session .
• Type valve_dex2 in the Name field and click OK.
te
This method saves the DEX session and leaves the session open.
In
14. Click Store Models .

• Click Save Design Exploration Session .
• Double-click the Backup folder.
C
• Type valve_dex3 in the Name field and click OK.

This method saves the DEX session complete with all required models and leaves
PT
the session open.
15. Click Cancel .

r
• Select the Erase all models from memory and return to an empty Creo Parametric
Fo
session check box.

• Click OK.
This method closes the DEX session without saving, and erases all models
from session. In our example, the DEX session was previously saved to the
VALVE_DEX2.TMZ and VALVE_DEX3.TMZ files.

Using Design Exploration Options
You can optimize your Design Exploration session using various options.
• Properties
– Session
– Checkpoint
• View Changes
• Open Report
y
• Checkpoint Tree Display
nl
– Path
– Checkpoints Figure 1 – Checkpoint Properties
– Columns
O
se
U
al
Figure 2 – Checkpoint Tree Options Figure 3 – Viewing Changes
rn
Using Design Exploration Options
There are several options that can be used when utilizing Design Exploration:
te
• Session Properties accessed using File > Manage Session > Design Exploration session > :
– Session Report – Displays an information report for each checkpoint.
In
– Session Properties – View the name and description of the session.

• Hide the Checkpoint Tree – Hides the Checkpoint Tree for maximum graphics window space.
Once hidden, you can click Show the Checkpoint Tree to restore it.
C
• Properties – Available fields include Name, Keywords, and Comment. You can also view the
PT
Order of creation and Time of creation for reference.

• View Changes – In the View Changes dialog box, you can view all changes made to the
model in a color-coded format.
• Open Report – Displays a report for modified or all models within the current checkpoint.
r
• Checkpoint Tree Display Options:

Fo
– Path Display – Display the paths to all checkpoints or only the active checkpoint
– Checkpoints Display – Display checkpoints as a Tree hierarchy, or according to the time
created. Checkpoints along the active path are displayed in a darker font making it easier to
locate nodes on the same branch. Checkpoints in non-active branches are shown in a lighter
font.
– Automatically Created Checkpoints – Display all system-created checkpoints, or only the last
created in each sequence.
– Simple Search – Display the search field above the Checkpoint Tree. Search for checkpoints
by name or keywords.
– Columns Display – Display Keywords, Comments, or Time of Creation columns in the
Checkpoint Tree.

PROCEDURE - Using Design Exploration Options
Design_Exploration\Options NO FILES OPEN
Task 1: Experiment with Design Exploration options.
1. In the Folder Browser , click Working

Directory .
y
• Notice only *.TMZ files are displayed.
nl
2. Double-click VALVE_DEX4.TMZ.
• Click OK.
O
4. Orient to the 3D view orientation.
• Notice all components are extracted from
se
the VALVE_DEX4.TMZ file.
U
al
rn
the Settings type drop-down menu.
• Click OK.
te
6. In the model tree, select ARM.PRT and click

Resume from the mini toolbar.
In
• Select the Five Cross Bolts checkpoint

and click Update .
C
7. Right-click the Five Cross Bolts checkpoint

PT
and select Properties.

• Type Five Cross Bolts and Flush Arm in
the Name field.
• Type Cross Bolts also for plate in the
r
Comment field.
Fo
• Select the contents of the Comment field

and press CTRL+C to copy the text.
• Click OK.

and select Activate.
• In the model tree, select ARM.PRT and
click Resume from the mini toolbar.
y
nl
and select Properties.
O
• Type Four Cross Bolts and Flush Arm in
the Name field.
• Click in the Comment field and press
se
CTRL+V to paste the previously copied
text.
• Click OK.
U
10. Click View Changes .
• Rotate the model and notice the color
coding of the components.
al
• Click OK.
rn
te
In
11. Click Open Report .

• Notice the information and links available.
C
• Close the Design Exploration Report

window.
rPT
12. In the Checkpoint Tree, select Path of Active

Fo
Checkpoint from the Show types drop-down

menu.

13. Select All paths from the Show types
drop-down menu.
14. Select Timeline from the Show types
drop-down menu.
y
15. Select Tree from the Show types drop-down
menu.
nl
16. Click Show > Columns > Comments.
O
se
U
al
17. Click Hide the Checkpoint Tree .
18. Click Accept from the Checkpoint Tree
rn
toolbar.
• Select the Save the Design Exploration
te
session check box.

• Click OK.
• Click Save from the Quick Access
In
toolbar.
• Click Close from the Quick Access
toolbar.
C
19. Click Working Directory .

PT
• Notice the In Session models now exist in

the current directory.

r
Fo

Utilizing Update Control with Copy Geometry Features
You can utilize Update Control and file options to manage copy geometry features.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Update Control Options
U
al
Figure 2 – Show Differences Ribbon Tab
rn
Utilizing Update Control with Copy Geometry Features

te
Update Control functionality offers capabilities to better predict and apply design changes when
working with top-down design features such as Copy Geometry or Layout features. In complex
designs, a small change might lead to many consequent effects. Update Control provides
In
notifications of changed references, and you can preview and investigate them before making an
update. Update Control enables you to better monitor and control design changes and their impact
to referencing models, making complex and concurrent design projects easier and streamlined.
C
Update Control has the following options:

• Automatic Update
PT
– Automatic replaces the legacy Dependent option, and describes the behavior of the Update
operation when parent reference objects change. With the Automatic option, copy geometry
features and features that reference them update automatically during regeneration.
• Manual Update with Notification
r
– To avoid unpredictable changes, you can set the Update Control option for a Copy Geometry
Fo
feature to Manual Update with Notification.

– The Notification option identifies any Copy Geometry features that are out-of-date as a result
of a regeneration. Notifications can be seen in the model tree, and also from the Notification
Center.
– When a Copy Geometry feature displays an out-of-date notification, you can keep it as is,
allow it to regenerate by selecting Update, or you can investigate the change using Show
Differences to understand the potential impact.
• Manual Update
– Manual replaces the legacy Independent option, and describes the behavior of the Update
operation when parent reference objects change. With the Manual option, copy geometry
features and features that reference do not update automatically during regeneration, and can
be manually updated using the Update option.
• No Dependency

– The No dependency option permanently breaks external dependencies. This action can be
performed directly from the Update Control menu, or from the Reference Viewer.
• Show Differences
– The Show Differences option opens a ribbon tab that enables you to preview changed
references and filter the Changed and Outdated objects.
• Design Exploration
– Enables you to start a Design Exploration session to "try out" any changes, and only update
the current model if the changes are desired.
• Remove Notification
y
– Clears the notification status.
• Update
nl
– Propagates (regenerates) changes, updating the child objects.
The Show Differences ribbon tab includes the following options:
O
• Isolate – Configures the display to show only the Outdated and Changed references.
• Outdated geometry display and color.
se
• Changed geometry display and color.
• Explore Update – Enter a Design Exploration Session.
• Remove/Restore Notification.
U
• Update – Updates (regenerates) the model.
Update Control Option Availability

al
Some of the Update Control options are available with the Advanced Assembly Extension (AAX),
rn
whereas all the Update Control options are available as part of Design Exploration Extension
(DEX), as shown in the following table:
Update Control Option: AAX DEX
te
Automatic Update X X
Manual Update with Notification X
In
Manual Update X X
No Dependency X X
C
Show Differences X
Design Exploration X
PT
Remove Notification X
Update X X
File > Options Dialog Box

r
Fo
Reference Control has been improved and simplified. If you edit parts in assembly context and
would like to use assembly references without creating external dependency, you can set those to
be automatically broken immediately after creation. This eliminates extra manual workflows, as
well as unwanted design errors. In the Update Control Settings, set the option for Copied feature
references update to Update manually.
The following option categories are available in the File > Options dialog box:
• Assembly:

y
• Notification Center:
nl
O
se
U
al
• Update Control:
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

PROCEDURE - Utilizing Update Control with Copy Geometry Features
Design_Exploration\Update_Control UPDATE.ASM
Task 1: Experiment with Automatic Update on a Copy Geometry feature.
y
nl
O
se
U
• Clear the Suppressed objects check box.
• Select the Copied references check box
al
• Click OK.
3. In the model tree, select SKELETON.PRT
rn
and click Show from the mini toolbar.

te
SKELETON.PRT node.
• Notice the SKEL_EXTRUDE feature.
In
5. Expand the BODY.PRT node.

• Notice the COPY_GEOMETRY and
BODY_EXTRUDE features.
C
The COPY_GEOMETRY feature was

created while referencing the skeleton
PT
surface. The solid BODY_EXTRUDE

feature was then created referencing the
COPY_GEOMETRY.
r
Fo
6. Edit the definition of COPY_GEOMETRY.

• Notice the cylindrical surface selected.
7. In the dashboard, select the Options tab.
• Notice the Copied Geometry Update
options and observe that the default
selection is Automatic Update.
dashboard.

9. Edit SKEL_EXTRUDE.
• Edit the 50 diameter dimension to 45 and
press ENTER.
• Notice that COPY_GEOMETRY and
BODY_EXTRUDE update.
y
nl
10. Right-click COPY_GEOMETRY and select
Information > Reference Viewer.
• Notice the Parent References.
O
• Click Close from the Reference Viewer
dialog box.
se
Task 2:
U
Experiment with Manual Update with Notification on a Copy Geometry feature.
al
rn
COPY_GEOMETRY and cursor over
Update Control.
• Notice the four available update options.
te
• Select Manual Update with Notification.

In
• Edit the 45 diameter dimension to 40 and

press ENTER.
C
• Notice only COPY_GEOMETRY updates

this time.
PT
3. In the Status Bar, click Model Notifications

.
• Notice that there is one notification of an
outdated feature.
r
• Select the notification.

Fo
• In the Notification Center dialog box, select

the COPY_GEOMETRY feature.
• Notice the COPY_GEOMETRY feature is
located in the model tree and has a yellow
triangle before it.
• Click Close from the Notification Center
dialog box and de-select the feature.

4. In the model tree, click the drop-down arrow
next to the search field and select Update
Control > Notified outdated features.
• Notice in the model tree, COPY_
GEOMETRY is now highlighted.
• Click Clear Search in the Search text
entry box.
y
COPY_GEOMETRY and cursor over
nl
Update Control.
• Notice the additional options now available.
O
• Select Show Differences .
• Notice the Show Differences tab appears
in the ribbon.
se
6. Expand Changed from the Geometry Display
group.
• Notice orange is selected by default.
U
7. Expand Outdated from the Geometry Display
group.
• Select the cyan (light blue) color from the
al
Standard Colors options.
rn
8. Click Isolate from the Tools group.
te
In
9. Click Update from the Close group.

C
• Notice the COPY_GEOMETRY and

BODY_EXTRUDE update.
r PT
Fo

Task 3: Experiment with Manual Update on a Copy Geometry feature.

Update Control > Manual Update.
press ENTER.
• Notice only COPY_GEOMETRY updates.
y
• Notice that there are no notifications in the
nl
status bar.
O
Update Control > Update.
• Notice COPY_GEOMETRY and
SKEL_EXTRUDE update.
se
U
al
Task 4: Experiment with the No Dependency Option on a Copy Geometry feature.
rn
Update Control > No Dependency.
• Read the contents of the Break
te
Dependency prompt and click OK.

In

press ENTER.
C
• Notice BODY_EXTRUDE does not update.

3. Right-click COPY_GEOMETRY.
PT
• Notice the Update Control menu is no

longer available.
• Click Information > Reference Viewer.
• Notice no Parent References exist.
r
Fo
• Click Close.
4. Click Undo twice from the Quick Access toolbar.

5. Right-click COPY_GEOMETRY.
• Notice the Update Control menu is available again.

Task 5: Utilize Update Control and Assembly settings to control dependency creation.

2. Select the Notification Center category and examine the options.
3. Select the Assembly category and examine the options.
• Select None from the External components permitted for reference creation drop-down list.
• Ensure the Allow exceptions with confirmation check box is selected.
4. Select the Update Control category and examine the options.
y
• Select Update manually from the Copied feature references update drop-down list.
• Click OK and click No to confirm that the configuration edits made are applied to the
nl
current session only.
5. Hide COVER.PRT.
O
• Expand Pattern 1 of BOLT_HEX.PRT.
• Activate the first BOLT_HEX.PRT.
se
• Select the upper BODY.PRT surface as
shown.
U
• Click Confirm.
al
• Zoom in and select each edge from the
rn
hole in the body.
• Right-click and select OK to complete
te
the sketch.
In
8. Select Through All as the depth.

C
• Click Change Depth Direction .

PT
• Click Change Material Direction .

dashboard.
r
Fo

10. Activate UPDATE.ASM.
11. Open BOLT_HEX.PRT from the model tree.
12. In the model tree, right-click EXTRUDE 2 and
select Information > Reference Viewer.
• Select Dependencies from the Show types
options.
• Notice the UPDATE.ASM is a parent, but
not the BODY.PRT.
y
• Click the icon to break the dependency as
shown.
nl
• Read the Break Dependency prompt and
click Cancel.
O
• Click Close in the Reference Viewer dialog
box.
This is a valid method for breaking
se
dependencies, but we will use another
method.
U
• Select the Copied references check box.
al
• Click OK.
14. In the model tree, expand EXTRUDE 2.
rn
• Notice Geometry Backup id 216.
15. Right-click Geometry Backup id 216 and
te
select Make Feature.

• Read the prompt and click OK.
In
• Hide Copy Geometry id 216.

16. Right-click EXTRUDE 2 and select
Information > Reference Viewer.
C
• Notice no Parents exist.

• Click Close.
PT
17. In the model tree, right-click Copy Geometry

id 216 and select Information > Reference
Viewer.
• Notice that UPDATE.ASM is still a parent.
r
• Click Close.
Fo
Again, we could break the dependency,

but we will use another method.
18. In the model tree, right-click Copy Geometry id 216 and select Update Control > No
Dependency.
19. Read the Break Dependency prompt and click OK.
20. Right-click Copy Geometry id 216 and select Information > Reference Viewer.
• The UPDATE.ASM is no longer a parent.
• Click Close.

y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Module 15
y
Project
nl
O
Module Overview
se
Using Creo Parametric and the skills learned in this course, complete the following project design
tasks.
U
Objectives
• Complete DRIVETRAIN_SKEL.PRT.
al
• Create the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT.
rn
• Assemble the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT.
• Assemble the LINK_SKEL.PRT.
• Create the AUX_ARM.PRT.
te
• Create the AUX_SHAFT.PRT.

• Share geometry from a skeleton.
In
• Edit a skeleton controlled design.

• Create simplified reps.
• Create display styles.
C
• Assemble using mechanism constraints.

PT
• Add flexibility to STUD.PRT.

r
Fo

The Table Fan
In this project, you will complete the design of a table fan.
y
nl
O
se
Figure 1 – Completed Table Fan
Project Scenario
U
Product Design Consulting, Inc. (PDC) is in charge of designing a table fan for one of their
customers. Upon returning from Creo Parametric Advanced Assembly Design training, you are
al
assigned to complete the table fan because the engineer originally responsible for the design
is on vacation.
rn
You will use the skills learned in previous topics of this course to create the final assembly and
components of the air circulator.
te
Minimal Instructions
Because all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned up to this point in the
In
course, instructions for each project step will be minimal. There will be no step-by-step picks and
clicks given. This provides you with a chance to test your knowledge of the materials as you
proceed through the project.
C
Completed Models for Reference

PT
Be sure to save all project models within the working subfolder of the project classroom folder
structure. The project folder also contains a sub-folder named completed. Here you will find a
completed version of each model in the project. These completed models can be used as reference
if required.
r
Fo

Skeleton Models
This slide illustrates the skeleton models used in the design.
y
nl
Figure 1 – BASE_SKEL Figure 2 – DRIVETRAIN_SKEL
O
se
Figure 3 – LINK_SKEL Figure 4 – AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL
U
The Base, Drivetrain, and Link Skeletons
al
The base, drivetrain, and link skeletons have already been created. You use them to share
geometry to related components and as a placement reference when positioning components.
rn
The AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT Model

te
You will create the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT. You will use it to share geometry to other
models and as an assembly reference when positioning components.
In
C
r PT
Fo

The Shaft and Arm Parts
This slide illustrates the shaft and arm parts that you will create in this project.
y
nl
O
Figure 1 – AUX_ARM Figure 2 – AUX_SHAFT
se
The Shaft and Arm Parts
The arm and shaft models are created by referencing geometry that is copied into them from the
skeleton model. This ensures that the two models fit together perfectly.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Components to Assemblies
This slide illustrates a few of the components you will assemble in the design.
y
nl
Figure 1 – AUX_ARM and AUX_SHAFT Figure 2 – HUB
O
se
Figure 3 – BLADE Figure 4 – BOLT_4–08
U
Components to Assemblies
Throughout this design, you will use various techniques such as simplified reps, display styles,
al
substitution, replace, flexibility, and component interfaces to make the assembly process easier
and more efficient.
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Editing the Design
This slide illustrates edits that will be made to the design.
y
nl
Figure 1 – Initial Design Figure 2 – After Edits to the Skeleton
O
se
U
Figure 3 – Initial Position
al Figure 4 – Dragged Position
Editing the Design

rn
Edits made to the skeleton model will propagate changes throughout the design.
te
You can drag components that are positioned using mechanism constraints through their motion.
In
C
r PT
Fo

Objective 1: Reviewing the Current Assembly Structure
Scenario
Product Design Consulting, Inc. (PDC) is in charge of designing a table fan for one of their
customers. Upon returning from Creo Parametric Advanced Assembly Design training, you are
assigned to complete the table fan because the engineer originally responsible for the design
is on vacation.
You will use the skills learned in previous topics of this course to create the final assembly and
components of the table fan.
y
nl
Projects\Assembly_working NO FILES OPEN
O
Task 1: Open the fan assembly.
1. Add the configuration option multiple_skeletons_allowed and set it to yes for the Option
se
value.
Click File > Options and use the Configuration Editor.
U
2. Open FAN.ASM.
al
To help verify the correct datum entities,
enable all datum tag displays for this
rn
project.
te
In
C
PT
4. Unhide BASE_SKEL.PRT.
5. Edit the Representation status of all three
skeletons to Master.
BASE.ASM contains two skeletons. One
r
is used for the base design and one for

Fo
the link design.
In DRIVETRAIN.ASM, there is a skeleton

for the design of the drivetrain of the fan.

6. Open the BASE.ASM sub-assembly, in the
Default rep.
7. Edit the component display style of
BASE_SKEL.PRT to be transparent.
8. Open the model player and review how the
assembly was created.
Click Model Player on the Tools tab.
y
9. Reset the modified master style.
nl
10. Close the window.
11. Open the DRIVETRAIN.ASM sub-assembly,
O
in the Default rep.
12. Edit the component display style of the
housing models to be transparent.
se
13. Use the Model Player to review how the
assembly was created.
U
16. Reset the assembly model status to its

al
previous display status.
rn
In the View tab, select Reset Status
from the Status types drop-down menu.
te
17. Reset the modified master rep.

In
C
PT
This completes the objective.

r
Fo

Objective 2: Completing the DRIVETRAIN_SKEL.PRT
Scenario
Continue creating the components of the table fan.
Task 1: Open the drivetrain skeleton and create a surface to represent the cage diameter.
1. Open DRIVETRAIN.ASM.
2. Select and open DRIVETRAIN_SKEL.PRT
y
nl
3. Create the extrude feature, as shown in the
figure.
O
The feature is centered on datum plane
CAGE_CTR, using a Symmetric
depth, extruded as a Surface , and
se
named CAGE_DIA_SURF.
Task 2: Create a surface to represent the fan blade diameter.
U
1. Create the extrude feature, as shown in the figure.
al
The feature is centered on datum plane CAGE_CTR, extruded as a Surface and
named FAN_DIA_SURF.
The depth of this feature should be the same as the previous feature. To ensure
rn
that the depths are the same, use To Selected and reference edges on each
side of the previous feature.
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

• Notice the surfaces of the skeleton in the
assembly.
3. Save the model.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Objective 3: Creating the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT
Scenario
Task 1: Create a second skeleton to represent the shaft and arm design.
1. Create a standard skeleton named AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.

Ensure that you leave the skeleton unplaced so that it is created in an unconstrained
y
position. Also ensure that it is copied from MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.
nl
Task 2: Create geometry to define the skeleton.
O
1. Open AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT.
2. Rename PART_CSYS_DEF to AUX_CSYS.
se
3. Create an L shaped Sketch feature using the
FRONT datum plane as the sketch plane.
U
al
rn
te
In
4. Create a datum axis named AUX through the

FRONT and RIGHT datum planes.
5. Create a datum point named PNT0 at the end
C
of the sketch feature.

6. Create a datum axis named ARM through
PT
PNT0 and normal to the TOP datum plane.

7. Drag datum point PNT0 into the ARM feature.
Datum point PNT0 is now embedded
in the datum axis ARM.
r
Fo

8. Create a datum plane named ALIGN through
the top end of the sketch feature and parallel
to the TOP datum plane.
y
nl
O
se
U
9. Create a datum plane named DIST offset 6
from the TOP datum plane. al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

10. Create the extrude feature on datum plane TOP, as shown in the figure.
The feature should be extruded as a Surface feature and its depth should be defined
up to the datum plane DIST.
11. Save the model and close the window.
y
nl
O
se
Task 3: Assemble the skeleton using mechanism constraints.
U
1. Redefine AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT and add a Pin constraint.
Hide some of the outer components to gain access.
al
2. Select the AUX datum axes in both AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT and
rn
DRIVETRAIN_SKEL.PRT as the align reference.
te
In
C
PT
3. Select the ALIGN datum plane in AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT and the top gearbox
surface in the DRIVETRAIN_SKEL.PRT as the translation reference.
r
Fo
4. Save and close the window.

Task 4: Position the link skeleton using mechanism constraints.
1. Open FAN.ASM if necessary.

2. Redefine DRIVETRAIN.ASM and add a new constraint set. Create a Cylinder constraint.
3. Select the ARM datum axis in AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT and the LINK_2 axis in
LINK_SKEL.PRT.
4. Save and close the window.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Objective 4: Creating the AUX_ARM.PRT and AUX_SHAFT.PRT
Scenario
Task 1: Copy reference geometry from the skeleton to the arm model.
1. Create a new part named AUX_ARM.PRT.

Use the MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT
y
template.
nl
2. Create a Copy Geometry feature that
references the following geometry from
O
AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT:
• Surface Quilt
• Datum plane DIST
se
• Datum axis AUX
• Datum axis ARM
U
Use default placement to orient the copy
feature relative to the skeleton.
You must disable Published Geometry

al
Only because you are not copying a
publish feature.
rn
Task 2: Use reference geometry to create features in the arm part.

te
1. Create the extrude feature, as shown in the

figure.
In
C
PT
2. Create a second extrude feature, as shown

in the figure.
Depth is defined up to the DIST datum
r
plane.
Fo

3. Create a coaxial hole, as shown in the figure.
The hole depth should be Through All
.
y
4. Solidify the quilt.
nl
Edit the selection filter to Quilts. Also, use
Solidify from the editing group.
O
se
U
Task 3: Copy reference geometry from the skeleton to the shaft model.
al
1. Create a new part named AUX_SHAFT.PRT.
Use the MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT
rn
template.
2. Create a Copy Geometry feature that

te
references the following geometry from

AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT:
• Surface Quilt
In
• Datum plane ALIGN

• Datum plane DIST
Use default placement to orient the copy
C
feature relative to the skeleton.

PT
Task 4: Use reference geometry to create features in the shaft part.

r
1. Fill a flat, circular sketch on datum plane DIST

that is the same diameter as the surface quilt.
Fo
Use Fill from the Surfaces group, and

use the surface quilt as a reference.

2. Merge the two surfaces.
y
nl
3. Create an extrude feature, as shown in the
figure.
O
Reference the surface quilt to define the
diameter of the shaft and the ALIGN
datum plane to define depth. The sketch
se
plane should be datum plane TOP.
U
al
rn
4. Use the quilt to remove the material from the
shaft bottom.
te
Edit the selection filter to Quilts. Also,

use Solidify from the editing
In
group.

C
PT

r
Fo

Objective 5: Assembling Components to the DRIVETRAIN.ASM
Scenario
Task 1: Assemble the shaft and arm parts.
1. Open DRIVETRAIN.ASM.
2. Edit the component display style for
y
MOTOR.ASM to be transparent.
nl
3. Assemble AUX_SHAFT.PRT by constraining
datum coordinate system PART_CSYS_DEF
to datum coordinate system AUX_CSYS in
O
AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT.
se
U
4. Assemble AUX_ARM.PRT by
constraining datum coordinate system
al
PART_CSYS_DEF to the AUX_CSYS in
AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT.
rn
6. Save the model.
te
In
C
PT
Task 2: Create a work region named Cutaway in the cage part.
1. Open the generic CAGE.PRT.

2. Cut the cage down the middle by creating
r
a work region type simplified rep named

Fo
Cutaway.
You can remove the material using
a number of methods, including the
following:
• The Extrude option. Sketch a circle on
datum plane FRONT.
• The Use Quilt option. Cut the model
with datum plane FRONT.

Task 3: Substitute the Cutaway simplified rep into the assembly and assemble the hub part.
1. Hide both skeleton models in

DRIVETRAIN.ASM.
2. Resume CAGE.PRT.
3. In the assembly, substitute the Master Rep of
CAGE.PRT with the Cutaway simplified rep.
y
nl
O
se
4. Assemble HUB.PRT.
5. Reset the master rep.
6. Save the model.
U
Create three Coincident constraints between the HUB.PRT and DRIVESHAFT.PRT.
al
rn
te
In
C
PT
Task 4: Edit the number of ears on the HUB.PRT.
1. Activate HUB.PRT.
2. Edit the number of ears from 3 to 4.
r
3. Deactivate HUB.PRT.
Fo

Objective 6: Eliminating Interference between CAGE.PRT and
BLADE.PRT
Scenario
Task 1: Replace the cage with a family table instance.
1. Replace the CAGE.PRT with the CAGE_SIMPLE family table instance.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
Task 2: Assemble and pattern the blade part.
rn
1. Assemble BLADE.PRT, as shown.

te
In
C
r PT
Fo

2. Pattern the BLADE.PRT using a reference
pattern.
y
nl
O
3. Replace the CAGE_SIMPLE instance with
the CAGE_FULL.PRT model.
se
U
al
rn
te
In
Task 3: Eliminate interference between the blade and cage.
1. Perform a global interference analysis to find

any interferences in the assembly.
C
rPT
Fo

2. Unhide DRIVETRAIN_SKEL.PRT.
3. Select DRIVETRAIN_SKEL.PRT and the
first BLADE.PRT in the pattern. Edit their
representation to Master.
Notice the interference with the
CAGE_DIA_SURF of the skeleton.
y
nl
O
4. Edit the definition of the BLADE_OUTLINE
feature.
se
5. Change the direction of the material cut
direction in order to eliminate the interference.
U
al
rn
7. Hide DRIVETRAIN_SKEL.PRT and save the
display status.
te
In
C
PT

r
Fo

Objective 7: Editing the Parameter Controlled BASE_SKEL.PRT
Scenario
Task 1: Edit the tilt angle of the fan to 90 degrees.
1. Open FAN.ASM.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
2. Edit the following parameters in
rn
BASE_SKEL.PRT:
• Edit the TILT_ANGLE to 90.
• Edit the TILT_AXIS_HEIGHT to 180.
te
In the Parameters dialog box, select

Skeleton from the Look In drop-down list.
In

C
r PT
Fo

Task 2: Edit the tilt angle of the fan to 45 degrees.
1. Edit the TILT_ANGLE parameter from 90 to

45 and regenerate the model.
y
nl
O
se
U
Task 3: Edit the tilt axis height of the fan to 89.
al
1. Edit the TILT_AXIS_HEIGHT parameter from
180 to 89 and regenerate the model.
rn
2. Save the model.
te
In
C
PT

r
Fo

Objective 8: Editing the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT
Scenario
Task 1: Edit the surface feature in the skeleton to include notch geometry.
1. Open AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT.
y
nl
O
2. Redefine the flat to a notch for a more robust assembly interface.
se
Do not delete the sketched arc entity, since it is referenced by one of the fan
components. Sketch a rectangle and use the trim function to edit the shape.
U
al
rn
te
In

C
r PT
Task 2: Open and update the arm part.

Fo
1. Open AUX_ARM.PRT and regenerate the

model.

Task 3: Open and update the shaft part.
1. Open AUX_SHAFT.PRT and regenerate the

model.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Objective 9: Assembling Final Hardware
Scenario
Assemble the final hardware of the table fan.
Task 1: Create a component interface in the bolt.
1. Open BOLT_4-08.PRT.
2. Create a placing component interface named
y
COINCIDENT-COINCIDENT.
nl
3. Add a coincident constraint, and then another
coincident constraint to the bottom side of the
head of the bolt.
O
se
Task 2: Assemble the bolt to the rear housing.
1. Assemble BOLT_4-08.PRT using the
U
component interface COINCIDENT-
COINCIDENT, as shown in the figure. Flip
the bolt, if necessary.
al
rn
te
In
Task 3: Use copy and paste to assemble an additional bolt.

C
1. Copy and paste the previously assembled

BOLT_4–08.PRT into the positions shown in
PT
the figure.
2. For the bolt on the left side of the figure,
add an additional constraint between
BOLT_4–08.PRT and AUX_ARM.PRT.
r
Fo

Task 4: Assemble the stud.
1. Assemble STUD.PRT, as shown in the figure.

There is a press-fit interference
condition because of the press-fit.
2. Remove the interference by making

STUD.PRT flexible and suppressing the
feature that defines the press-fit geometry.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
Task 5: Assemble rivets to the fan blades.
rn
1. Open DRIVETRAIN.ASM and reorder
CAGE_FULL.PRT to be the last component
in the assembly.
te
2. Exclude CAGE_FULL.PRT from display by

using simplified rep functionality.
In
3. Assemble RIVET.PRT, as shown in the

figure.
C
PT
4. Repeat the position of the two additional

rivets.
r
Right-click the rivet and select Repeat .

Fo

5. Assemble the remaining rivets.
y
nl
6. Exclude all four of the BLADE.PRT
components from display using simplified rep
functionality.
O
7. Use Intelligent hardware to assemble the
screws and washers for the CAGE.PRT.
se
Use the DIN 7984 - 8.8 screw, size M5 x
8.000. Use the DIN 125-2-B washer.
U
al
rn
te
In
C
r PT
Fo

Objective 10: Dragging the AUX_ARM.PRT
Scenario
Review the completed table fan.
Task 1: Drag the arm to see the fan oscillate.
1. Open FAN.ASM if necessary.

2. Drag AUX_ARM.PRT and make the fan oscillate.
y
nl
O
se
U
al
rn
te
In

C
r PT
Fo

TRN 5103 410 03 - SG Ins - EN

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

TRN 5103 410 03 - SG Ins - EN

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Advanced Assembly Design using Creo

Authored and published using

PTC Inc., 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA

Document No. Date Description

Precision Learning After the Class

of this training that you may want to review.

Copying and Pasting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Utilizing Intelligent Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Manipulating Intelligent Fasteners Using Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Exercise 1: Using Measure to Define a Flexible Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Creating Part Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Exercise 2: Using Part Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Creating Display Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Sketching a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29

Assigning Connections for a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35

Understanding Design Exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Creating Design Exploration Branches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

Utilizing Update Control with Copy Geometry Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25

Course Handbook Layout

Procedure / Exercise Header

create a new model, you will see Create New.

Two other items to note for labs:

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

1. Notice the SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_

Step 4: Open the file for this procedure.

1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header above.

• Read the first task.

This completes the procedure.

© 2017 PTC Module 1 | Page 1

• Select a component or feature.

Locating Components in the Model Tree

sub-assemblies, patterns, or groups.

Module 1 | Page 2 © 2017 PTC

• Use conventional wildcard syntax.

Using the Assembly Model Tree Search Field

model tree to display only the found components.

© 2017 PTC Module 1 | Page 3

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

8. Notice the highlighted components in the

9. Click Filter Tree to filter the model tree

Module 1 | Page 4 © 2017 PTC

Interchange Group Members.

field and select Configuration queries >

22. Notice that the BOLT_5-28.PRT is a family

Family table generics.

24. Notice that the BOLT_5-18.PRT is a family

This completes the procedure.

© 2017 PTC Module 1 | Page 5

• 2-D Box Selection:

Selecting Multiple Components

to use 2-D Box Selection:

whether the system uses Inside Box or Crossing selection types.

• From an assembly, click 3D Box Select , and select a plane or surface.

2-D and 3-D Selection Box Options

Considerations When Using Box Selection

Module 1 | Page 6 © 2017 PTC

© 2017 PTC Module 1 | Page 7

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

8. Notice the selected components.